Home

R&S FSW User Manual - Rohde & Schwarz Norway

1. Frequency Offset Shifts the displayed frequency range along the x axis by the defined offset This parameter has no effect on the R amp S FSW hardware or on the captured data or on data processing It is simply a manipulation of the final results in which absolute frequency values are displayed Thus the x axis of a spectrum display is shifted by a constant offset if it shows absolute frequencies but not if it shows frequencies relative to the signal s center frequency A frequency offset can be used to correct the display of a signal that is slightly distorted by the measurement setup for example __L_L_L_LLLL N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 350 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings 6 3 3 Frequency and Span Configuration The allowed values range from 100 GHz to 100 GHz The default setting is 0 Hz Remote command SENSe FREQuency OFFSet on page 764 Signal Tracking Defines the settings for signal tracking These settings are only available for spans gt 0 For more details see chapter 6 3 1 3 Keeping the Center Frequency Stable Signal Tracking on page 345 Signal Tracking State Signal Tracking Activates or deactivates signal tracking This function is only available for spans gt 0 If activated after each sweep the center frequency is set to the maximum level of the specified trace found within the searched bandwidth Remote command CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion ST
2. Gate Length Gate Settings Defines how long the gate is open when it is triggered The gate length can only be set in the edge triggered gate mode In the level triggered mode the gate length depends on the level of the gate signal The gate length in relation to the sweep is indicated by a line labeled GL For more information see chapter 6 6 1 2 Gated Measurements on page 379 Remote command SENSe SWEep EGATe LENGth on page 788 6 6 3 How to Configure a Triggered and Gated Measurement The following step by step instructions demonstrate how to configure a triggered and gated measurement manually For remote operation see chapter 11 7 4 Configuring Triggered and Gated Measurements on page 781 Trigger and gate settings are configured in the Trigger and Gate dialog box To display the Trigger and Gate dialog box do one of the following e Select Trigger Gate from the Overview e Select the TRIG key and then the Trigger Gate Config softkey The following tasks are described 6 6 3 1 How to Determine the Required Trigger Gate ParametersS cccceceeeeeeeeesees 391 6 6 3 2 How to Configure a Triggered Measurement ccccceceeceeeeeeeeeeeetenneeeeeeeetntaeeeeeeeees 392 6 6 3 3 How to Configure a Gated Measurement cceccceececeeeeeeeteceeeaneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetes 393 6 6 3 1 How to Determine the Required Trigger Gate Parameters 1 Inthe Trig
3. cececceececeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneneeneeeeeeees 138 General MSR ACLR Measurement Settings General MSR ACLR measurement settings are defined in the MSR ACLR Setup dialog in the MSR General Settings tab Standard eaen a caaats sdaweauaveddunearsaxddaveabadsdead daduadacawa aed eavecwantdsaswdcendslaas 131 L Predefned Stet Si lees ssiscicciessisnenscacyssuanddeciaanensnaatsailadesatinetitcndsnseadianisays 131 L User Defined StandardS c cccceccscsssceecececcesnesssesseeecsccseesteseseressseceeseseecters 131 Number of SUDDIOGKS oniran aa ai a a E E EEA 133 R f rence CHAME a aaa a a aaa aaaea aAa aa da aAA a A AeA AAAA aaan 133 Noise cancelation sinirinin naana a a NAE A ANR 133 CIO CIO MoI E eaan A EA EEA 134 Absolute and Relative Values ACLR Mode cccccseceeeeeceeeeeeeeaeeeeeceeeeeseeeeeesenaees 134 Channel Power Levels and Density Power Unit esseesssssssssisssssssrrrnssssrersnnnnsssnsens 134 POWE MOJE enn E sigeudetsardiveeudeianadohesaudaasiafabendanaadaervedaes 135 Optimized Settings Adjust SettingS esssseesesrrrnnessrresreennnadnsenninntennnnaansnnnnneeenndannan 135 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 130 R amp S FSW Measurements a Ss Channel Power and Adjacent Channel Power ACLR Measurement Standard The main measurement settings can be stored as a standard file When such a standard is loaded the required channel and general measurement settings are automatically set on the R am
4. CF 900 0 MHz 1001 pts 200 0 kHz Span 2 0 MHz Fig 6 28 GSM signal with GATE OFF MultiView Spectrum Ref Level 0 00 dBm e RBW 30 kHz Att 10dB SWT 10ms VBW 30kHz Mode Auto FFT GAT EXT1 1 Frequency Sweep e LAP Clrw CF 900 0 MHz 1001 pts 200 0 kHz Span 2 0 MHz Fig 6 29 GSM signal with GATE ON Gated sweep operation is also possible for zero span measurements This allows you to display level variations of individual slots for instance in burst signals versus time User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 381 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings Trigger and Gate Configuration To indicate that a gate is used for the sweep GAT and the gate source is displayed in the channel bar 6 6 1 3 Determining the Parameters in Preview Mode The preview mode allows you to try out trigger and gate settings before actually applying them to the current measurement When the preview diagram shows the correct results you can Update the Main Diagram and check the results in the background before closing the dialog box If preview mode is switched off changes to the trigger and gate settings are applied to the measurement diagram directly The preview diagram displays a zero span measurement at the center frequency with the defined RBW and sweep time This is useful to analyze bursts for example to determine the required gate settings The main diagram remains unchanged concerning the zero span settings Only the trigger and
5. Consider the following when defining the dwell time e Unknown signals select a dwell time of at least 1 second to ensure that pulses down to a frequency of 5 Hz are weighted correctly User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 254 R amp S FSW Measurements Electromagnetic Interference EMI Measurement R amp S FSW K54 e Pulsed signals or signals that fluctuate slowly the dwell time must cover at least the time until the first signal peak is measured can require long dwell time e unmodulated signals or signals with a high modulation frequency the dwell time must cover at least the time until the first signal peak is measured usually shorter than for pulsed signals When you change the frequency or the attenuation the R amp S FSW waits until the lowpass filter has settled before starting the measurement In this case the measurement time depends on the resolution bandwidth and the characteristics of the signal RMS Average detector CISPR filter only The RMS Average detector is a combination of the RMS detector for pulse repetition frequencies above a corner frequency and the Average detector for pulse repetition frequencies below the corner frequency It thus achieves a pulse response curve with the following characteristics e 10 dB decade above the corner frequency e 20 dB decade below the corner frequency The average value is determined by lowpass filters of the 2nd order simulation of a mechanical pointer instrument
6. Calculation method However the intercept point can be calculated from the known line slopes and the mea sured spacing ap3 at a given level according to the following formula N IP3 223 4 P 2 The third order intercept point TOI for example is calculated for an intermodulation of 60 dB and an input level Py of 20 dBm according to the following formula IP3 2 20dBm 10dBm User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 235 R amp S FSW Measurements Third Order Intercept TOI Measurement Intermodulation free dynamic range The Intermodulation free dynamic range i e the level range in which no internal inter modulation products are generated if two tone signals are measured is determined by the third order intercept point the phase noise and the thermal noise of the signal ana lyzer At high signal levels the range is determined by intermodulation products At low signal levels intermodulation products disappear below the noise floor i e the noise floor and the phase noise of the signal analyzer determine the range The noise floor and the phase noise depend on the resolution bandwidth that has been selected At the smallest resolution bandwidth the noise floor and phase noise are at a minimum and so the max imum range is obtained However a large increase in sweep time is required for small resolution bandwidths It is therefore best to select the largest resolution bandwidth pos sible to obtain the range that is req
7. Impact of the Vertical Axis SeUINGS 2 ciice ise edteaeeeccecie 353 AMPIU SONOS eae vie acetate E EEE RNE 355 ScaliNg the VAM isc 6 ice asters teseen cette AY aeas regi eeatsesteaestaateny attends etadees 359 e How to Optimize the Amplitude Display cccccceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeecaneaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 361 Impact of the Vertical Axis Settings Some background knowledge on the impact of the described settings is provided here for a better understanding of the required configuration e Reference LeVel oo cece cece cece eee cces cee eeceseecaeeeeceseeaaeeeeesaueeeseseesaaeeeeeeseaeeeeeeees 353 FRE ASO eiin aare AAAA AAEE aA 354 a E E E E E S 354 Reference Level The reference level value is the maximum value the AD converter can handle without distortion of the measured value Signal levels above this value will not be measured correctly which is indicated by the IF OVLD status display The reference level should correspond with the maximum expected RF input level When determining the expected input level consider that the power from all input signals contribute to the total power The reference level must be higher than the total power from all signals The optimum reference level for the current measurement settings can be set automat ically by the R amp S FSW see Reference Level on page 356 The reference level determines the amplitude represented by the topmost grid line in the display When y
8. Marker State Activates or deactivates the marker in the diagram Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe on page 859 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe on page 858 Marker Position X value Defines the position x value of the marker in the diagram Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 860 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X on page 858 Marker Type Toggles the marker type The type for marker 1 is always Normal the type for delta marker 1 is always Delta These types cannot be changed User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 260 R amp S FSW Measurements Electromagnetic Interference EMI Measurement R amp S FSW K54 Note If normal marker 1 is the active marker switching the Mkr Type activates an additional delta marker 1 For any other marker switching the marker type does not acti vate an additional marker it only switches the type of the selected marker Normal A normal marker indicates the absolute value at the defined position in the diagram Delta A delta marker defines the value of the marker relative to the specified reference marker marker 1 by default Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe on page 859 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe on page 858 Reference Marker Defines a marker as the reference marker which is used to determine relative analysis results delta marker values
9. When you select this button the channel power currently measured on the Tx channel is stored as a fixed reference power In the following channel power measurements the power is indicated relative to the fixed reference power The reference value is displayed in the Reference field in relative ACLR mode the default value is 0 dBm Note In adjacent channel power measurement the power is always referenced to a transmission channel see Reference Channel on page 123 thus this function is not available Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence AUTO ONCE on page 650 Optimized Settings Adjust Settings All instrument settings for the selected channel setup channel bandwidth channel spac ing can be optimized automatically The adjustment is carried out only once If necessary the instrument settings can be changed later The following settings are optimized by Adjust Settings e Frequency Span on page 114 e Resolution Bandwidth RBW on page 114 e Video Bandwidth VBW on page 115 I User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 125 R amp S FSW Measurements 5 2 4 2 Channel Power and Adjacent Channel Power ACLR Measurement e Detector on page 115 e Trace Averaging on page 116 Note The reference level is not affected by this function To adjust the reference level automatically use the Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level function in the AUTO SET menu Remote comma
10. ssssesssssssirnssesrnnsssssnnnsrennnnnsssnnssns 352 Impact of the Frequency and Span Settings Some background knowledge on the impact of the described settings is provided here for a better understanding of the required configuration e Defining the Scope of the Measurement Frequency Range ccccccceeesceeeeees 345 e Stepping Through the Frequency Range Center Frequency Stepsize 345 e Keeping the Center Frequency Stable Signal Tracking ceecceeseeeeeeeneeeeees 345 e Coping with Large Frequency Ranges Logarithmic Scaling 346 E a a User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 344 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings 6 3 1 1 6 3 1 2 6 3 1 3 Frequency and Span Configuration Defining the Scope of the Measurement Frequency Range The frequency range defines the scope of the signal and spectrum to be analyzed It can either be defined as a span around a center frequency or as a range from a start to a stop frequency Furthermore the full span comprising the entire possible frequency range can be selected or a zero span The full span option allows you to perform an overview measurement over the entire span Using the Last Span function you can easily switch back to the detailed measurement of a specific frequency range For sinusoidal signals the center frequency can be defined automatically by the R amp S FSW as the highest frequency level in the frequency span see Adjusting the Cen
11. 1 Spurious Emissions Start 9 0 kHz 68704 pts 1 27 GHz Stop 12 75 GHz 2 Result Summary Range Low Range Up Ww Frequency Power Abs ALimit 9 000 kHz 150 kHz Hz 136 82525 kHz 62 09 dBm 49 09 dB 302 94301 kHz 72 49 dBm 59 49 dB 1 08023 GHz 52 14 dBm 39 14 dB As for general limit lines the results of each limit line check are displayed here _ SPU RIOUS_LINE_ABS as well as the combined result for all defined limit lines Limit Check The limit check is considered to be failed if any signal level outside the absolute limits is measured In addition to the limit line itself the largest deviations of the absolute power from the limit line for each range are displayed in the evaluation list if the limit check is activated Values that exceed the limit are indicated in red and by an asterisk for the peak values to be displayed in the evaluation list can be defined in the list evalu ation settings Furthermore you can define how many peaks per range are listed For details see chapter 5 6 4 3 List Evaluation on page 204 Although a margin functionality is not available for the limit check a margin threshold 5 6 4 Spurious Emissions Measurement Configuration Spurious emissions measurements are selected via the Spurious Emissions button in the Select Measurement dialog box The measurement is started immediately with the default settings It can be configured via the MEAS CONFIG key or in the Spuri
12. 13 165 R amp SEFSW Measurements SS a a a MMMM Spectrum Emission Mask SEM Measurement The following information is provided in the result table Label Description General Information Standard Loaded standard settings Tx Power Power of the reference range Tx Bandwidth Tx bandwidth used by the reference range RBW RBW used by the reference range Range results Range Low Frequency range start for the range the peak value belongs to Range Up Frequency range end for the range the peak value belongs to RBW RBW of the range Frequency Frequency Power Abs Absolute power level Power Rel Power level relative to the TX channel power ALimit Deviation of the power level from the defined limit In which detail the data is displayed in the result table can be defined in the List Evalu ation settings see chapter 5 5 5 6 List Evaluation on page 184 By default one peak per range is displayed However you can change the settings to display only peaks that exceed a threshold Margin In addition to listing the peaks in the list evaluation detected peaks can be indicated by blue squares in the diagram Show Peaks 1 Spectrum Emission Mask CF 2 1 GHZ 1001 pts 2 55 MHZ Span 25 5 MHz Furthermore you can save the evaluation list to a file which can be exported to another application for further analysis E a N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 166 R amp S FSW
13. E j User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 306 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings a a aes Data Input and Output sage is displayed on the R amp S FSW and the values for Result Frequency Start and Result Frequency Stop are corrected to comply with the range limits The value range for the offset depends on the selected generator The default setting is 0 Hz Offsets lt gt 0 Hz are indicated by the FRQ label in the channel bar Negative offsets can be used to define reverse sweeps For more information on coupling frequencies and reverse sweeps see Coupling the Frequencies on page 299 For more information on error messages and the channel bar see Displayed Information and Errors on page 301 Remote command SOURce EXTernal FREQuency FACTor DENominator on page 816 SOURce EXTernal FREQuency FACTor NUMerator on page 816 SOURce EXTernal FREQuency OFFSet on page 816 Result Frequency Start For reference only The start frequency for the generator calculated from the configured generator frequency and the start value defined for the R amp S FSW Result Frequency Stop For reference only The stop frequency for the generator calculated from the configured generator frequency and the stop value defined for the R amp S FSW Source Calibration Functions The calibration functions of the external generator are available in the Source Calibra tion subtab of the External Generator tab but only if external gen
14. The RMS Average detector is only available for the CISPR filter The detector is used for example to measure broadband emissions and may replace the quasipeak detector in the future The detector parameters depend on the measured frequency The time lag of the simu lated pointer instrument reflects the weighting factor of the signal depending on its form modulation etc Table 5 9 Required parameters depending on frequency for RMS Average detector Band A Band B Band C D Band E Frequency range lt 150 kHz 150 kHz to 30 MHz 30 MHz to 1 GHz gt 1 GHz IF bandwidth 200 Hz 9 kHz 120 kHz 1 MHz Time lag of simula 160 ms 160 ms 100 ms 100 ms ted pointer instru ment Corner frequency 10 Hz 100 Hz 100 Hz 1 kHz The same considerations apply to the dwell time as for the CISPR average detector 5 13 3 3 Frequency Resolution Sweep Points and Scaling The number of sweep points defines the number of measurement values collected during one sweep Thus increasing the sweep points also increases the accuracy of the results regarding the frequency resolution Because EMI measurements often cover a large frequency range you should define an adequate number of sweep points especially when performing the measurement on a User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 255 R amp S FSW Measurements 5 13 3 4 Electromagnetic Interference EMI Measurement R amp S FSW K54 logarithmic axis As on a linear axis the di
15. 4 For measurements with GSM EDGE LTE FDD and W CDMA carriers BC2 define whether a GSM EDGE or an LTE FDD carrier or both are located at the edge of the bandwidth 5 Select the Apply to SEM button The Sweep list is configured according to the MSR specification with the required number of ranges and defined limits 6 Start a sweep The determined powers and limit deviations for each range are indicated in the eval uation list If activated the peak power levels for each range are also indicated in the diagram 7 To save the evaluation list export the results to a file as described in chapter 5 5 6 2 How to Save SEM Result Files on page 188 5 5 6 1 How to Manage SEM Settings Files SEM measurement settings can be saved to an xml file which can then be exported to another application or loaded on the R amp S FSW again at a later time Some predefined XML files are provided that contain ranges and parameters according to the selected standard All XML files are stored under C r_s instr sem_std For details on the file format of the SEM settings file see chapter 5 5 7 1 Format Description of SEM XML Files on page 189 SEM settings or standard files are managed in the Standards tab of the Spectrum Emission Mask dialog box To display this dialog box select the Overview softkey and then the SEM Setup button How to load an SEM settings file 1 From the file selection dialog box select the settings file
16. Defines the bandwidth of the individual MSR subblock Note that subblock ranges also affect the position of the adjacent gap channels CACLR Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock lt sb gt RFBWidth on page 662 Number of Tx Channels Tx Count Subblock Definition Defines the number of transmit channels the specific subblock contains The maximum is 18 Tx channels Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock lt sb gt TXCHannel COUNt on page 663 Tx Channel Definition As opposed to common ACLR channel definitions the Tx channels are defined at abso lute frequencies rather than by a spacing relative to the common center frequency Each transmit channel can be assigned a different technology used to predefine the required bandwidth The Tx channel settings for the individual subblocks are configured in individual subtabs of the Tx Channel Settings tab For details on configuring MSR Tx channels see chapter 5 2 6 3 How to Configure an MSR ACLR Measurement on page 145 Note Channel names In MSR ACLR measurements Tx channel names correspond to the specified technology for LTE including the bandwidth followed by a consecutive number If the channel is too narrow to display the channel name it is replaced by on the screen Channel names cannot be defined manually The assigned subblock A B C D E is indicated with the channel name e g B _LTE_5M1 Remote command SENSe POWer ACH
17. EESEE E ET Ss Sh Frequency and Span Configuration e Select Frequency from the Overview e Select the FREQ key and then the Frequency Config softkey e Select the SPAN key and then the Frequency Config softkey 2 Define the frequency range using one of the following methods e Define the Center frequency and Span e Define the Start frequency and Stop frequency e To perform ameasurementin the time domain define the Center frequency and select the Zero span button e To perform a measurement over the entire available frequency range select the Full span button e To return to the previously set frequency range select the Last span button 6 3 4 How to Move the Center Frequency through the Frequency Range In some cases it may be useful to move the center frequency through a larger frequency range for example from one harmonic to another 1 Inthe Frequency dialog box define the Center Frequency Stepsize This is the size by which the center frequency is to be increased or decreased in each step Enter a manual or relative value or set the step size to the current center frequency or marker value To move from one harmonic to the next use the center frequency or marker value 2 Select the Center Frequency dialog field 3 Use the arrow keys to move the center frequency in discrete steps through the avail able frequency range 6 3 5 How to Keep the Center Frequency Stable
18. If a fixed reference point is configured see Defining a Fixed Reference on page 449 the reference point FXD can also be selected instead of another marker Remote command CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MREF on page 857 Linking to Another Marker Links the current marker to the marker selected from the list of active markers If the x axis value of the inital marker is changed the linked marker follows on the same x posi tion Linking is off by default Using this function you can set two markers on different traces to measure the difference e g between a max hold trace and a min hold trace or between a measurement and a reference trace Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m1 gt LINK TO MARKer lt m2 gt on page 859 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m1 gt LINK TO MARKer lt m2 gt on page 857 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt LINK on page 856 Assigning the Marker to a Trace The Trace setting assigns the selected marker to an active trace The trace determines which value the marker shows at the marker position If the marker was previously assigned to a different trace the marker remains on the previous frequency or time but indicates the value of the new trace The marker can also be assigned to the currently active trace using the Marker to Trace softkey in the Marker menu If a trace is turned off the assigned markers and marker functions are also deactivated
19. Margin 200 Peak List margin Reference range settings RefType CPROWER Reference power type TxBandwidth 3840000 Hz Channel power settings Filter State ON Alpha 0 22 PeaksPerRange 1 Max number of peaks per range to be detected Values 2 Number of detected peaks File data section 0 12750000 2515000 30000 13242367500 43 844 Measured peak values 722747802734 0 33028793334960938 49 6697 120 lt range number gt 66650391 FAIL lt start frequency gt 2 2515000 12750000 30000 13257632500 43 8447 22747802734 0 33028793334960938 49 6697 1206 6650391 FAIL lt resolution bandwidth of range gt lt stop frequency gt lt frequency of peak gt lt absolute power in dBm of peak gt lt relative power in dBc of peak gt related to the chan nel power lt distance to the limit line in dB gt positive value means above the limit lt limit fail pass 0 fail 1 gt 5 6 Spurious Emissions Measurement The R amp S FSW supports Spurious Emissions measurements About the MEASUrEMENL c c cssessssecsceceeeeececcececaeaeaeaeasaessaseeceeseeeeseceseesesaeanaaeas 196 e Spurious Emissions Measurement ReSults cccscsceseceeceeeceeeeeeeeeseseeeeseeaeaeeas 196 SPunOus EMISSIONS BASICS c ccc caeccccocceses iieii ai ana aai 197 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 195 R amp S FSW Measurements rs Spurious Emissions Measure
20. Modulation 3GPP W CDMA Reverse Link Procedure 1 Preset the R amp S FSW 2 Set the center frequency to 1950 MHz 3 Select the Channel Power ACLR measurement function from the Select Measure ment dialog box 4 Set the W CDMA 3GPP REV standard for adjacent channel power measurement in the ACLR Setup dialog box D User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 149 R amp S FSW Measurements iX a ee a en a a gn el Channel Power and Adjacent Channel Power ACLR Measurement The R amp S FSW sets the channel configuration to the W CDMA standard for mobiles with two adjacent channels above and below the transmit channel The frequency span the resolution and video bandwidth and the detector are automatically set to the correct values The spectrum is displayed in the upper window and the channel power the level ratios of the adjacent channel powers and the channel configuration in the lower window The individual channels are displayed as bars in the graph 5 Set the optimal reference level and RF attenuation for the applied signal level using the Auto Level function The R amp S FSW sets the optimum RF attenuation and the reference level for the power in the transmission channel to obtain the maximum dynamic range The following figure shows the result of the measurement MultiView Spectrum B Ref Level 8 CF 1 95 GHZ 1001 pts 2 57 MH2 Span 25 7 MHz 2 Result Summary W CDMA BGPP REV Channel Bandwidth Offset Power TX1
21. MultiView Spectrum Ref Level 30 00 dam RBW 1 MHz Att OdB SWT 9ps 3 VBW 1kHz Mode Auto FFT ICF 128 0 MHz 1001 pts 10 0 MHz Span 100 0 MHz Fig 5 21 RF sine wave signal with low S N ratio with a smaller video bandwidth 8 By reducing the resolution bandwidth by a factor of 10 the noise is reduced by 10 dB Set the RBW to 100 kHz User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 248 R amp S FSW Measurements SS SS a Se a Ml Electromagnetic Interference EMI Measurement R amp S FSW K54 The displayed noise is reduced by approx 10 dB The signal therefore emerges from noise by about 10 dB Compared to the previous setting the video bandwidth has remained the same i e it has increased relative to the smaller resolution band width The averaging effect of the video bandwidth is therefore reduced The trace will be noisier MultiView Spectrum Marker 1 Ref Level 30 00 d8m RBW 100 kHz 128 0 MHZ x Att dB SWT 251 ps VBW LkMHz Mode Auto FFT 1 Frequency Sweep AP CIAN CF 128 0 MHz 1001 pts 10 0 MHz Span 100 0 MHz Fig 5 22 Reference signal at a smaller resolution bandwidth 5 13 Electromagnetic Interference EMI Measurement R amp S FSW K54 The optional electromagnetic interference EMI measurement R amp S FSW K54 is suit able for measurements according to commercial and military electromagnetic compati bility EMC standards The functionality of the measurement is particularly useful in research and development T
22. Power Bandwidth Defines the percentage of total power in the displayed frequency range which defines the occupied bandwidth Values from 10 to 99 9 are allowed Remote command SENSe POWer BANDwidth BWIDth on page 672 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 161 R amp S FSW Measurements Occupied Bandwidth Measurement OBW Channel Bandwidth Defines the channel bandwidth for the transmission channel in single carrier measure ments This bandwidth is used to optimize the test parameters for details see Adjust Settings on page 162 The default setting is 14 kHz For measurements according to a specific transmission standard define the bandwidth specified by the standard for the transmission channel For multicarrier measurements this setting is irrelevant Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth CHANnel lt ch gt on page 646 Adjust Settings Optimizes the instrument settings for the measurement of the occupied bandwidth according to the specified channel bandwidth This function is only useful for single carrier measurements All instrument settings relevant for power measurement within a specific frequency range are optimized e Frequency span 3 x channel bandwidth e RBW lt 1 40 of channel bandwidth e VBW gt 3 x RBW e Detector RMS The reference level is not affected by Adjust Settings For an optimum dynamic range it should be selected such that the signal maximum is close to
23. 84 84 dB 22 38 dB 2 09728 GHz 51 51 dBm 82 05 dB 31 01 dB 2 10270 GHz 54 13 dBm 84 67 dB 33 63 dB 2 10355 GHz 51 94 dBm 82 48 dB 19 44 dB 2 10725 GHz 40 01 dBm 70 55 dB 20 51 dB 2 10911 GHz 40 28 dBm 70 82 dB 16 78 dB User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 169 R amp S FSW Measurements a SE a a lM Spectrum Emission Mask SEM Measurement The indicated limit line depends on the settings in the Sweep List Several types of limit checks are possible Table 5 3 Limit check types Limit check type Pass fail criteria Limit line definition Absolute Relative Absolute power levels may not exceed limit line Power deviations relative to the TX channel power may not exceed limit line Defined by the Abs Limit Start Abs Limit Stop values for each range Defined by the Rel Limit Start Rel Limit Stop values relative to the TX channel power fixed for each range Relative with func tion f x If the power exceeds both the abso lute and the relative limits the check fails Defined by the maximum of the absolute or rel ative relative to the TX channel power Rel Limit Start Rel Limit Stop values for each range Thus the start or stop point of the limit range or both are variable since the maximum may vary Abs and Rel If the power exceeds both the abso lute and the relative limits the check fails The less strict higher limit line is displayed for
24. E SSS User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 141 R amp S FSW Measurements a SS a a Ss Channel Power and Adjacent Channel Power ACLR Measurement Gap CACLR Channel Definition Between two subblocks in an MSR signal two gaps are defined a lower gap and an upper gap Each gap in turn contains 2 channels the CACLR channels The channels in the upper gap are identical to those in the lower gap but inverted Thus in the R amp S FSW MSR ACLR measurement only 2 gap channels are configured Gap channels CACLR are indicated by the names of the surrounding subblocks e g AB for the gap between subblocks A and B followed by the channel name Gap1 or Gap2 and an L for lower or a U for upper Both the lower and upper gap channels are displayed However if the gap between two subblocks is too narrow the second gap channel may not be displayed If the gap is even narrower no gap channels are displayed Gap CACLR Channel Spacings Gap CACLR Channel Definition CACLR channel spacings are normally predefined by the MSR standard but can be changed CACLR channels are defined using bandwidths and spacings relative to the outer edges of the surrounding subblocks Since the upper and lower CACLR channels are identical only two channels must be configured The required spacing can be determined accord ing to the following formula indicated for lower channels Spacing CF of the gap channel left subblock center
25. E a N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 126 R amp S FSW Measurements a Channel Power and Adjacent Channel Power ACLR Measurement Channel Bandwidths General Settings Channel Settings Standard EUTRA LTE Square Manage User Standards Bandwidths Spacing Limits Weighting Filters Names Tx Adjacent Channels 9 015 MHz ADJ 9 015 MHz 9 015 MHz AREH 9 015 MHz 6 y 9 015 MHz Gama 9 015 MHz kz 3 S ene 9 015 MHz MEER 9 015 MHz 9 015 MHz ARES 9 015 MHz 9 015 MHz ASEE 9 015 MHz 19 015 MHz AERJ 9 015 MHz The Tx channel bandwidth is normally defined by the transmission standard The correct bandwidth is set automatically for the selected standard The bandwidth for each channel is indicated by a colored bar in the display For measurements that require channel bandwidths which deviate from those defined in the selected standard use the IBW method Fast ACLR Off With the IBW method the channel bandwidth borders are right and left of the channel center frequency Thus you can visually check whether the entire power of the signal under test is within the selected channel bandwidth The value entered for any Tx channel is automatically also defined for all subsequent Tx channels Thus only one value needs to be entered if all Tx channels have the same bandwidth The value entered for any ADJ or ALT channel is automatically also defi
26. FSW Common Measurement Settings 6 2 5 3 Data Input and Output Mixer Type Specifies whether the external mixer for which the table is to be applied is a two port or three port type This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL PORTs on page 809 Position Value Each position value pair defines the correction value for conversion loss for a specific frequency The reference values must be entered in order of increasing frequencies A maximum of 50 reference values can be entered To enter a new value pair tap the Position Value table or select the Insert Value button Correction values for frequencies between the reference values are obtained by inter polation Linear interpolation is performed if the table contains only two values If it con tains more than two reference values spline interpolation is carried out Outside the fre quency range covered by the table the conversion loss is assumed to be the same as that for the first and last reference value The current configuration of the conversion loss function as described by the position value entries is displayed in the preview pane to the right of the table Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL DATA on page 808 Insert Value Inserts a new position value entry in the table If the table is empty a new entry at 0 Hz is inserted If entries already exis
27. FSW Measurements in Statistical Measurements APD CCDF MultiView Spectrum 0 10 dB AnBW 40 MHz Att 9dB Meas Time 12 5 ms 1 APD CF 100 0 MHz Ref 0 50 dBm 2 Result Summary Samples 500000 Mean Peak crest Trace 1 7 27 dBm 3 32 dBm 10 58 dB In addition to the histogram a result table is displayed containing the following informa tion e Number of samples used for calculation e For each displayed trace Mean amplitude Peak amplitude Crest factor The crest factor is defined as the peak power to mean power ratio or logarith mically as the peak level minus the average level of the signal Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function CCDF The Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function CCDF shows the probability that the mean signal power amplitude will be exceeded in percent The level above the mean power is plotted along the x axis of the graph The origin of the axis corresponds to the mean power level The probability that a level will be exceeded is plotted along the y axis SS ST User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 210 R amp S FSW Measurements Statistical Measurements APD CCDF MultiView 8 Spectrum Ref Level AnBW 40 MHz Att 3 Meas Time 12 5 ms 1 CCDF CF 100 0 MHz Mean Pwr 20 00 dB 2 Result Summary Samples 500000 Mean g 0 1 0 Trace i 7 22 dBm 1B 64 GE A red line indicates the ideal Gaussian distribution for the measured amplitude range The displa
28. If the signal is slightly instable on the display but you want to keep the center frequency on the signal peak the center frequency can be adjusted automatically using signal tracking 1 Inthe Frequency dialog box select the Signal Tracking tab 2 Define the following settings e Signal Tracking Bandwidth the frequency range around the center frequency to be tracked e Signal Tracking Threshold the minimum level the trace must reach to be detec ted as a maximum e Signal Tracking Trace the trace to be tracked SSS a N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 352 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings Amplitude and Vertical Axis Configuration 3 Activate signal tracking by selecting State ON After each sweep the center frequency is set to the maximum signal found within the searched bandwidth If no maximum signal above the defined threshold value is found in the searched bandwidth the center frequency remains unchanged The search bandwidth and the threshold value are shown in the diagram by red lines which are labeled as TRK 6 4 Amplitude and Vertical Axis Configuration 6 4 1 6 4 1 1 In the Spectrum application measurement results usually consist of the measured signal levels amplitudes displayed on the vertical y axis for the determined frequency spec trum or for the measurement time horizontal x axis The settings for the vertical axis regarding amplitude and scaling are described here
29. Tx Channel Definition The Tx channel bandwidth is normally defined by the transmission technology standard The correct bandwidth is predefined automatically for the selected technology Each Tx channel is defined independantly of the others automatic bandwidth configuration for subsequent channels as in common ACLR measurements is not performed The bandwidth for each channel is indicated by a colored bar in the display Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock lt sb gt BANDwidth BWIDth CHANnel lt ch gt on page 661 Weighting Filters Tx Channel Definition Weighting filters allow you to determine the influence of individual channels on the total measurement result For each channel you can activate or deactivate the use of the weighting filter and define an individual weighting factor Alpha value Remote command Activating Deactivating SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe SBLock lt sb gt CHANnel lt ch gt on page 660 Alpha value SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa SBLock lt sb gt CHANnel lt ch gt on page 660 MSR Adjacent and Gap Channel Setup The Adj Gap Channel Settings tab in the MSR ACLR Setup dialog box provides all the channel settings to configure adjacent and gap CACLR channels in MSR ACLR measurements __L_L_L_LLLLS a a User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 138 R amp S FSW Measurements Channel Power and Adjacent Channel Power ACLR Measurement MSR General Setti
30. dialog box which is displayed as a tab in the Analysis dialog box or when you select the AM Mod Depth Config softkey from the AM Mod Depth menu Net ee 20 0 MHz NE Caen 39 98 MHz WEGA 19 98002 kHz Search Signals The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in chapter 11 5 12 Measuring the AM Modulation Depth on page 734 Markor TA inia n E eh eas eee ee ee 244 Sean SION VS ess dak aod dae au ocsadie aye deaaced A E R ae bevisdaa nee betdaa beeeyediag 244 D User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 243 R amp S FSW Measurements AM Modulation Depth Measurement Marker 1 2 3 Indicates the detected characteristic values as determined by the AM Modulation Depth measurement Marker Description M1 Maximum of the signal carrier level D2 Offset of next peak to the right of the carrier D3 Offset of the next peak to the left of the carrier The marker positions can be edited the modulation depth is then recalculated according to the new marker values To reset all marker positions automatically use the Search Signals function Note Moving the marker positions manually When the position of delta marker 2 is changed delta marker 3 is moved symmetrically with respect to the reference marker 1 Delta marker 3 on the other hand can be moved for fine adjustment independantly of marker 2 Marker 1 can also be moved manually for re adjustment without affecting the position
31. for pulse repetition frequencies age above a corner frequency and the Average detector for pulse repeti tion frequencies below the corner frequency The average value is determined by lowpass filters of the 2nd order simulation of a mechanical pointer instrument The RMS Average detector is only available for the CISPR filter Remote command CALCulate MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FMEasurement DETector on page 738 CALCulate DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FMEasurement DETector on page 737 Select Marker Opens a dialog box to select and activate or deactivate one or more markers quickly ears User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 262 R amp S FSW Measurements Electromagnetic Interference EMI Measurement R amp S FSW K54 Selected State Selected State Selected State CECEN aup Con gp oea Con ee Remote command Marker selected via suffix lt m gt in remote commands 5 13 4 2 EMI Final Measurement Configuration The final EMI measurement can be performed with different settings than the initial peak search These settings are described here The detector to be used for the final EMI test can be defined differently for each frequency thus the detector is configured in the EMI marker settings see Final Test Detector on page 261 Filter Type ccactacicheeiees dae ede einen teea ahead bane ae edie 263 PRB sts ts cesectesstanseacaecabsagehedetdtpsdelesedanse ddedeeta dueeaessited aA E Aa aaa a
32. lt Start gt lt Stop gt RangeStop lt Stop gt lt FrequencyRange gt lt Limit gt lt Start Unit Unit Value Value gt lt Stop Unit Unit Value Value gt lt Limit gt lt Limit gt lt Start Unit Unit Value Value gt lt Stop Unit Unit Value Value gt lt Limit gt lt RBW Bandwidth Bandwidth Type FilterType gt lt VBW Bandwidth Bandwidth gt lt Detector gt Detector lt Detector gt lt Sweep Mode SweepMode Time SweepTime gt lt Amplitude gt lt ReferenceLevel Unit dBm Value Value gt lt RFAttenuation Mode Auto Unit dB Value Value gt lt Preamplifier State State gt lt Amplitude gt eee User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 191 R amp S FSW lt Range gt Measurements a a I eh Spectrum Emission Mask SEM Measurement Table 5 4 Attributes and child nodes of the BaseFormat element Absolute and Rela tive Absolute or Relative Child Node Attribute Value Parameter Description Mand FileFormatVersion 1 0 0 0 Yes Date YYYY MM DD Date in ISO 8601 format No HH MM SS Name lt string gt Name of the standard Yes Instrument Type FSL Name of the instrument No Application SA K72 K82 Name of the application No LinkDirection Name Downlink Uplink Yes None ShortName DL UL No Reference Yes Power Method TX Channel Power Yes TX
33. menu you configure the contents and display of the result list List Evaluation State Settings Show Peaks Margin Details Peaks Per Range Save Evaluation List Decimal Seperator BNU COMMA Peaks per RANG facsscceccceven da tacceccde ininda aieiai a ienaa kanka TEERAA aiaia 205 Saving the Evaltaton USt annoa AA A ERNA 205 List Evaluation State Activates or deactivates the list evaluation Remote command CALCulate lt n gt ESPectrum PSEarch PEAKsearch AUTO on page 695 TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 853 Show Peaks If activated all peaks that have been detected during an active list evaluation are marked with blue squares in the diagram Remote command CALCulate lt n gt ESPectrum PSEarch PEAKsearch PSHow on page 696 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 204 R amp S FSW Measurements 5 6 5 Spurious Emissions Measurement Margin Although a margin functionality is not available for the limit check a margin threshold for the peak values to be displayed in the evaluation list and diagram if activated can be defined Only peaks that exceed the margin value are displayed Remote command CALCulate lt n gt ESPectrum PSEarch PEAKsearch MARGin on page 695 Details Configures how detailed the list is On Includes all detected peaks up to a maximum defined by Peaks per Range Off Includes only one peak per range Peaks per Range Defines the
34. of the corresponding signal generator Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice GENerator INTerface on page 819 TTL Handshake If available for the specified generator type this option activates TTL synchronization via handshake for GPIB connections Using the TTL interface allows for considerably higher measurement rates than pure GPIB control because the frequency stepping of the R amp S FSW is directly coupled with the frequency stepping of the generator For more information on TTL synchronization see TTL synchronization on page 300 For an overview of which generators support TTL synchronization see Overview of Generators Supported by the R amp S FSW B10 Option on page 294 Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice GENerator LINK on page 819 GPIB Address TCP IP Address For LAN connections TCP IP address of the signal generator For GPIB connections GPIB address of the signal generator Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB RDEVice GENerator ADDRess on page 818 SYSTem COMMunicate TCPip RDEVice GENerator ADDRess on page 820 Reference Selects the internal R amp S FSW or an external frequency reference to synchronize the R amp S FSW with the generator default internal Remote command SOURce EXTernal ROSCillator SOURce on page 818 Edit Generator Setup File Displays the setup file for the currently selected Generator Type in read only mode in an editor Althoug
35. on page 114 Resolution Bandwidth RBW on page 114 Video Bandwidth VBW on page 115 Detector on page 115 Trace Averaging on page 116 Note The reference level is not affected by this function To adjust the reference level automatically use the Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level function in the AUTO SET menu Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESet on page 642 MSR Subblock and Tx Channel Definition The Tx Channel Settings tab in the MSR ACLR Setup dialog box provides all the channel settings to configure subblocks and Tx channels in MSR ACLR measurements __ gt _ _ LS a a User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 135 R amp S FSW Measurements Channel Power and Adjacent Channel Power ACLR Measurement mm MSR General Settings Tx Channel Settings Adj Gap Channel Settings AkH Sub Sub Block Definition Block A EERE 985 0 MHz RF Bandwidth 12 0MHz TX Count Sub Tx Channels Block B Center Technology Bandwidth Weighting Filter CE CS a Co fo Ca Oo XEN CD CNN CD For details on MSR signals see chapter 5 2 3 4 Measurement on Multi Standard Radio MSR Signals on page 116 For details on setting up channels see chapter 5 2 6 3 How to Configure an MSR ACLR Measurement on page 145 The Tx channel settings for the individual subblocks are configured in individual subtabs of the Tx Channel Settings tab SUBGIOCK DSU MMOH saci c2it cc ccn ied s
36. the signal must exceed this threshold before the next level crossing triggers a new measurement _ ___L____E a N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 392 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings Trigger and Gate Configuration 6 To skip multiple triggers in a burst define a Holdoff time that must pass between two triggers The holdoff time should be slightly larger than the burst 6 6 3 3 How to Configure a Gated Measurement 6 6 4 Determine the required parameters as described in chapter 6 6 3 1 How to Deter mine the Required Trigger Gate Parameters on page 391 The gate is opened by a trigger event which must be based on a power source Define the trigger as described in chapter 6 6 3 2 How to Configure a Triggered Measurement on page 392 As the Trigger Source use IF Power Video or External Define how long the gate is to remain open To measure the signal as long as the trigger level is exceeded for example for one or more pulses define Gate Mode Level To measure the signal for a certain time after a level is exceeded for example during a burst a Define Gate Mode Edge b Define the time to measure for each gate Gate Length To open the gate with a time delay for example to ignore an overshoot define a Gate Delay Select Gated Trigger On How to Output a Trigger Signal Using one of the variable TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors of the R amp S FSW the
37. you can define a relative and an absolute level In this case the maximum of the two values is used as the limit level For more information see Relative limit line functions on page 170 Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt LIMit lt PClass gt RELative STARt on page 682 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt LIMit lt PClass gt RELative STOP on page 684 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt LIMit lt PClass gt RELative STARt 3 RANGe lt range gt LIMit lt PClass gt RELative STOP 5 RANGe lt range gt LIMit lt PClass gt RELative STARt ABS FUNCtion on page 6 SENSe ESPectru FUNCtion on page 6 SENSe ESPectru on page 682 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt LIMit lt PClass gt RELative STOP ABSolute on page 684 50505 Insert before after Range Inserts a new range to the left of the currently focused range before or to the right after The range numbers of the currently focused range and all higher ranges are increased accordingly The maximum number of ranges is 30 Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt INSert on page 680 Delete Range Deletes the currently focused range if possible The reference range cannot be deleted A minimum of 3 ranges is required The range numbers are updated accordingly Remote command SENSe ESPectrum R
38. 02 13 217 R amp S FSW Measurements Statistical Measurements APD CCDF X Axis Defines the scaling settings for signal level values Range lt X Axis Defines the level range in dB to be evaluated by the statistics measurement Remote command CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe X RANGe on page 717 Ref Level X Axis Defines the reference level for the signal levels in the currently active unit dBm dBuV etc For the APD function this value corresponds to the right diagram border For the CCDF function there is no direct representation of this value on the diagram as the x axis is scaled relatively to the measured mean power Remote command CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe X RLEVel on page 717 Shifting the Display Offset X Axis Defines an arithmetic level offset This offset is added to the measured level irrespective of the selected unit The scaling of the x axis is changed accordingly The setting range is 200 dB in 0 1 dB steps Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet on page 775 Y Axis Defines the scaling settings for the probability distribution Y Unit Y Axis Defines the scaling type of the y axis as either percentage or absolute The default value is absolute scaling Remote command CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe Y UNIT on page 717 Y Max Y Min Y Axis Defines the upper max and lower min limit of the displayed probability rang
39. 1988 MHz Response 11 15 dBm 10 87 dBm 81 23 dBm 90 48 dBm M2 1 M1 1 300 0 kHz Function TOI Measurements 10 87 dBm 800 3 799 60 Span 3 0 MHz Function Result 25 363 dBm The third order intercept TOI is displayed in the marker information 2 The level of a signal analyzer s intrinsic intermodulation products depends on the RF level of the useful signals at the input mixer When the RF attenuation is added the mixer level is reduced and the intermodulation distance is increased With an addi tional RF attenuation of 10 dB the levels of the intermodulation products are reduced by 20 dB The noise level is however increased by 10 dB Increase the RF attenuation to 20 dB to reduce intermodulation products The R amp S FSW s intrinsic intermodulation products disappear below the noise floor MultiView Spectrum Ref Level 10 00 dBm RBW 10 kHz s Att 30dB SWT 419ps VBW 1 kHz CF 800 0 MHz 2 Marker Table Type Retr vrFe Stimulus 1 799 6004 MHz 800 3996 MHz 798 8012 MHz 801 1988 MHz User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 Mode Auto FFT Response 11 20 dBm 10 92 dBm 77 68 dBm 79 58 dBm M2 1 2 M1 1 Function Attenuation 10 92 dBm 800 39960 MHz 11 20 dBm 799 60040 MHz Span 3 0 MHz Function Result 22 682 dBm 241 R amp S FSW Measurements AM Modulation Depth Measurement 5 11 AM Modulation Depth Measurement Using the R amp S FSW yo
40. 264 Automatic Peak SCAN s arainn aa aaia aK a eaaa 264 Dwel TIME ac ch ctvaticsssisncencsessdeaanetenlvanandusdtvnaanaandendennsanncncdeesasarsncdvecaeaaadzenaneeanatduitenes 264 Frequency AXIS SCAliiG i 8 iced cee eed te teed ee ie eee 264 PROSEN GIS ei cscs taste acne eves sea pave nee ey een dua ei cee guava eve guanveiae eatuawyence 265 Res BW Mba cieitetetsctisteeustgaedeaceestanantaetsianaadedieaasaaelesivaaaaddiesin sadntstaen dea 265 Filter Type Defines the filter type The following filter types are available Normal 3dB Channel RRC 5 Pole not available for sweep type FFT CISPR 6 dB requires EMI R amp S FSW K54 option MIL Std 6 dB requires EMI R amp S FSW K54 option For more information see chapter 6 5 1 6 Which Data May Pass Filter Types on page 365 e UUM User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 263 R amp S FSW Measurements Electromagnetic Interference EMI Measurement R amp S FSW K54 Note The EMI specific filter types are available if the EMI R amp S FSW K54 measurement option is installed even if EMI measurement is not active For details see chap ter 5 13 3 1 Resolution Bandwidth and Filter Types on page 252 The RBW filter configured in the bandwidth settings is identical to the filter configured in the EMI configuration Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution TYPE on page 769 RBW Defines the resolution bandwidth The available resolution bandwidths
41. 5 Measurement Example Calibration with an External Generator The following measurement example demonstrates the most common functions using an external generator This example requires the External Generator Control R amp S FSW B10 option The example assumes an SMUO6 generator is connected to the R amp S FSW A band elimination filter is the device under test After calibration an additional attenuator is inserted between the DUT and the R amp S FSW The following procedures are described e Calibrating the measurement setup on page 312 e Measuring the effects of the DUT on page 314 e Compensating the effects of additional attenuation after calibration on page 316 Calibrating the measurement setup 1 Connect the signal generator s GPIB interface connector to the EXT GEN CONTROL GPIB connector on the rear panel of the R amp S FSW D User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 312 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings 4 5 6 7 8 9 Data Input and Output Connect the signal generator output to the RF INPUT connector on the front panel of the R amp S FSW Adapt the measurement range of the R amp S FSW to the filter to be tested In this mea surement define the following settings a Press the FREQ key select Frequency Config and enter Frequency Start 100 MHZ b Enter Frequency Stop 300 MHz Press the INPUT OUTPUT key and select External Generator Config In the Interface Configuration sub tab sele
42. 686 Ref Level Sets the reference level for the range For details on the reference level see chapter 6 4 1 1 Reference Level on page 353 Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt RLEVel on page 686 RF Att Mode Activates or deactivates the auto mode for RF attenuation For details on attenuation see chapter 6 4 1 2 RF Attenuation on page 354 Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt INPut ATTenuation AUTO on page 679 R amp S FSW Measurements a SS a a es Spectrum Emission Mask SEM Measurement RF Attenuator Sets the attenuation value for that range For details on attenuation see chapter 6 4 1 2 RF Attenuation on page 354 Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt INPut ATTenuation on page 679 Preamp Switches the preamplifier on or off For details on the preamplifier see Preamplifier option B24 on page 358 Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt INPut GAIN STATe on page 680 Transd Factor Sets a transducer for the specified range You can only choose a transducer that fulfills the following conditions e The transducer overlaps or equals the span of the range e The x axis is linear e The unit is dB For details on transducers see chapter 9 2 Basics on Transducer Factors on page 513 Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt TRANsdu
43. BW CISPR softkey A CISPR 6 dB filter is configured b Set the bandwidth to 1 MHz The R amp S FSW shows the currently selected resolution bandwidth in the diagram header Configure the traces for the initial EMI measurement a Press the TRACE key b Press the Trace Config softkey to configure two traces c Define the detectors to use for the initial measurement Select the peak detector for trace 1 and the average detector for trace 2 The peak detector ensures that the detected peak levels in the frequency range covered by one pixel are displayed The R amp S FSW now displays two traces Trace 1 shows the peak values trace 2 shows the average values Increase the number of sweep points for the EMI measurement a Press the SWEEP key on the front panel b Select the Sweep Config softkey c Set the number of Sweep Points to 200000 Press the AMPT key then select the Amplitude Config softkey and in the Ampli tude dialog box select V as the Unit Performing the measurement 1 Configure the EMI measurement markers In this example we will use 6 markers a Select the Marker Config softkey and activate six normal markers SS User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 270 R amp S FSW Measurements 5 13 8 Electromagnetic Interference EMI Measurement R amp S FSW K54 b Set markers 1 to 3 on trace 1 Set markers 4 to 6 on trace 2 c For each of these markers select the CISPR AV detector to be u
44. CFiLter 21 kHz CFlLter PDC 24 3 kHz a 0 35 RRC IS 136 25 kHz CFiLter 30 kHz CFiLter CDPD CDMAone 50 kHz CFiLter 100 kHz CFiLter 150 kHz CFiLter FM Radio 192 kHz CFiLter PHS 200 kHz CFiLter 300 kHz CFiLter 500 kHz CFiLter J 83 8 VSB DVB USA 1 MHz CFiLter CDMAone 1 228 MHz CFILter CDMAone 1 28 MHz a 0 22 RRC 1 5 MHz CFiLter DAB 2 MHz CFiLter 3 MHz CFiLter 3 75 MHz CFiLter 3 84 MHz a 0 22 RRC W CDMA 3GPP 4 096 MHz a 0 22 RRC W CDMA NTT DOCoMo 5 MHz CFiLter 10 MHz CFiLter 20 MHz CFiLter 28 MHz CFiLter 40 MHz CFiLter 80 MHz CFiLter These filters are only available with option R amp S FSW B8 Resolution Bandwidths gt 10 MHz E MMN User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 376 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings Trigger and Gate Configuration 6 6 Trigger and Gate Configuration Triggering means to capture the interesting part of the signal Choosing the right trigger type and configuring all trigger settings correctly allows you to detect various incidents in your signals Gating allows you to restrict measurement analysis to the important part or parts of the signal for example bursts e Basics of Triggering and Gated Measurement cecccceceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeetseeaaeees 377 e Thgger and Gate SSN OS eressirriorrir niiti nnani aii AEEA ERARA 382 e How to Configure a Triggered and Gated Measurement eeeeeeeeeeeeeees 391 e How to Output a
45. Channel Peak Power Reference lt string gt No Channel Table 5 5 Attributes and child nodes of the PowerClass element Child Node Attribute Value Parameter Description Mand StartPower Value lt power in dBm gt The start power must be equal Yes to the stop power of the previ ous power class The Start Power value of the first range is 200 Unit dBm Yes InclusiveFlag true Yes StopPower Value lt power in dBm gt The stop power must be equal Yes to the start power of the next power class The StopPower value of the last range is 200 Unit dBm InclusiveFlag false Yes DefaultLimitFailMode Absolute Relative Yes User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 192 Measurements Spectrum Emission Mask SEM Measurement Table 5 6 Attributes and child nodes of the Range element normal ranges dBr dB Child Node Attribute Value Parameter Description Mand Index 0 19 Inde XE s are continuous Yes and have to start with 0 Name lt string gt Name of the range Only if Referen ceChannel con tains a name and the range is the reference range Short lt string gt Short name of the range No Name ChannelType TX Adjacent Yes WeightingFilter Only if Referen cePower method is TX Channel Power and the range is the refer ence range Type RRC CFilter Type of the weighting filter Yes Roll Off Factor 0 1 Excess bandwidth of the fil Only if the filter ter type is RRC Bandwid
46. DATA on page 853 In this case the measured power value for each sweep point by default 1001 is returned Channel Power Basics Some background knowledge on basic terms and principles used in channel power measurements is provided here for a better understanding of the required configuration settings Measurement Methods ai a incei cei iaetend eesaadeuet aeten aed as 109 Measurement Repeatability 2 cc022 cccccccceteteceeeseasaeeteceeeeseaaeenecneeecannnnaacneeees 111 e Recommended Common Measurement Parameters ccccccseeceeeeseeceeeeeseeeeaeees 112 e Measurement on Multi Standard Radio MSR Signals cccccceeeeeeeeeeteeeeees 116 Measurement Methods The channel power is defined as the integration of the power across the channel band width The Adjacent Channel Leakage Power Ratio ACLR also known as the Adjacent Channel Power Ratio ACPR is defined as the ratio between the total power of the adjacent channel to the carrier channel s power An ACLR measurement with several carrier channels also known as transmission or TX channels is also possible and is referred to as a multicarrier ACLR measurement There are two possible methods for measuring channel and adjacent channel power with a signal analyzer e IBW method Integration BandWidth method e Fast ACLR Zero span method i e using a channel filter LSS SSS SSS User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 109 R amp S FSW Measurements SS S
47. FFT 1 TOI CF 2 2 GHz 1001 pts 2 0 MH2 Span 20 0 MHz 2 Marker Table Stimulus Response Function Function Result 2 199001 GHz 3 97 dBm 2 200999 GHz 3 96 dBm TOI 25 617 dBm 2 197003 GHz 64 67 dBm 2 202997 GHz 62 00 dBm Remote command The TOI can also be queried using the remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion TOI RESult on page 733 TOI Configuration Third Order Intercept TOI measurements are selected via the Third Order Intercept button in the Select Measurement dialog box The measurement is started immediately with the default settings It can be configured via the MEAS CONFIG key or in the Third Order Intercept dialog box which is displayed as a tab in the Analysis dialog box or when you select the TOI Config softkey from the TOI menu Third Order Intercept VERGA 9 279 GHz Marker 2 13 197 GHz Mela coigisam 17 115 GHz VETOR 9 361 GHz Search Signals ___L______ a N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 238 R amp S FSW Measurements Third Order Intercept TOI Measurement The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in chapter 11 5 11 Measuring the Third Order Intercept Point on page 732 WHT V294 eiei Syngenta salaecg A a a EA E Si 239 Seatth SUMS oiiaii D EEA NEEE EENAA EEEE EEANN eeeeayees 239 Marker 1 2 3 4 Indicates the detected characteristic values as determined by the TOI measurement see chapter 5 10 3 TOI Results
48. For pulsed signals the transmission intervals should not be included in the statistical evaluation Thus you must define gate ranges to be included in the measurement 1 Press the MEAS CONFIG key then select the APD Config or CCDF Config soft key The APD or CCDF dialog box is displayed Select the Edit Gate Ranges button Define the time period for which the input signal is to be analyzed for example the duration of 3 signal pulses For each active trace define up to three ranges within the time period to be measured In the example covering 3 pulses you could define one range for each pulse a Assuming the external trigger determines T 0 as the start of the first pulse define the start time of range 1 at 0 s b Define the stop time of range 1 at the duration of the first pulse SS ST User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 219 R amp S FSW Measurements Statistical Measurements APD CCDF c Activate range 1 by setting Range 1 Use to On d Define the start time of range 2 as duration of pulse 1 duration of interval e Define the stop time of range 2 as start time of range 2 duration of pulse 2 f Activate range 2 by setting Range 2 Use to On g Define the third range in the same way 5 Start a sweep As soon as the defined number of samples have been measured the statistical eval uation is displayed Only the signal levels within the pulse periods are considered 5 7 7 Examples 5 7 7 1 C
49. IF Note The IF output frequency of the IF WIDE OUTPUT connector cannot be defined manually but is determined automatically depending on the center frequency It is indi cated in this field when the IF WIDE OUTPUT connector is used For details on the used frequencies see the data sheet User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 342 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings gE SSS SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSS SS SS SS S SS S S S SS S S S S _S S S S S S _S S _ _ SSS _ EEE Ss ss Data Input and Output The IF WIDE OUTPUT connector is used automatically instead of the IF VIDEO DEMOD connector if the bandwidth extension hardware option R amp S FSW B160 U160 is activated i e for bandwidths gt 80 MHz For more information see chapter 6 2 1 6 IF and Video Signal Output on page 278 Remote command OUTPut IF IFFRequency on page 837 Noise Source Switches the supply voltage for an external noise source on or off External noise sources are useful when you are measuring power levels that fall below the noise floor of the R amp S FSW itself for example when measuring the noise level of a DUT For details see chapter 6 2 1 4 Input from Noise Sources on page 277 Remote command DIAGnostic SERVice NSOurce on page 836 Trigger 2 3 Defines the usage of the variable TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors where Trigger 2 TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector on the front panel Trigger 3 TRIGGER 3 I
50. Limit Lines General limit line functionality is provided by the R amp S FSW base unit The base unit also provides various predefined limit lines that you can use for various applications The R amp S FSW EMI measurement adds further predefined limit lines designed in compliance with several EMC standards Limit line configuration is described in chapter 7 5 3 2 Limit Line Settings and Func tions on page 479 How to Perform EMI Measurements The following step by step instructions demonstrate how to perform an EMI measure ment with the R amp S FSW EMI measurement option 1 Press the MODE key on the front panel and select the Spectrum application 2 Define the frequency range of the EMI measurement a Press the FREQ key and then the Frequency Config softkey b Define the start and stop frequency 3 Configure the traces for the intial EMI measurement a Press the TRACE key b Select the Trace Config softkey to configure as many traces as required c Define the detectors to use for the initial measurement for example the peak detector and the average detector 4 Press the MEAS key on the front panel and select the EMI measurement N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 267 R amp S FSW Measurements 10 11 12 13 Electromagnetic Interference EMI Measurement R amp S FSW K54 The EMI main menu is displayed Select the EMI Config softkey and define the resolution bandwidth and filter type
51. MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion SUMMary RMS STATe on page 723 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion SUMMary RMS RESult on page 726 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion SUMMary MEAN STATe on page 723 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion SUMMary MEAN RESult on page 725 Limit State Switches the limitation of the evaluation range on or off Default setting is off If deactivated the entire sweep time is evaluated If switched on the evaluation range is defined by the left and right limit If only one limit is set it corresponds to the left limit and the right limit is defined by the stop frequency If the second limit is also set it defines the right limit Remote command CALCulate MARKer X SLIMits STATe on page 862 Left Limit Right Limit Defines a power level limit for line S1 left or S2 right Remote command CALCulate MARKer X SLIMits LEFT on page 863 CALCulate MARKer X SLIMits RIGHT on page 863 How to Measure Powers in the Time Domain To measure the power in the time domain 1 Select the Time Domain Power measurement function from the Select Measure ment dialog box 2 Select the type of power measurement results to be determined by selecting the corresponding softkeys 3 To restrict the power evaluation range define limits a Select the Time Dom Power Config softkey to display the Time Domain Power configuration dialo
52. Manual 6 2 1 6 IF and Video Signal Output The measured IF signal or displayed video signal i e the filtered and detected IF signal can be sent to the IF VIDEO DEMOD output connector The video output is a signal of 1 V It can be used for example to control demodulated audio frequencies The IF output is a signal of the measured level at a specified frequency Restrictions Note the following restrictions for IF output e F and video output is only available in the time domain zero span e For I Q data only IF output is available e F output is not available if any of the following conditions apply The Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 is active for input or output MSRA operating mode is active The wideband extension is used hardware option R amp S FSW B160 B320 used automatically for bandwidths gt 80 MHz in this case use the IF WIDE OUTPUT connector The sample rate is larger than 200 MHz upsampling IF WIDE OUTPUT If the optional hardware R amp S FSW B160 B320 for bandwidth extension is installed and activated i e for bandwidths gt 80 MHz the IF output is not sent to the IF VIDEO User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 278 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings 6 2 2 6 2 2 1 Data Input and Output DEMOD output connector but rather to the additional IF WIDE OUTPUT connector pro vided by the option In this case the IF output frequency cannot be defined ma
53. Manual 1173 9411 02 13 129 R amp S FSW Measurements 5 2 5 1 Channel Power and Adjacent Channel Power ACLR Measurement selected see Standard on page 121 the ACLR Setup dialog box is replaced by the MSR ACLR Setup dialog box To display the MSR ACLR Setup dialog box dialog box do one of the following e Select the CP ACLR Standard softkey from the CH Power menu and select the Multi Standard Radio standard Then select the CP ACLR Config softkey e Select the CP ACLR Config softkey from the CH Power menu Then select the Multi Standard Radio standard from the Standard selection list gt m MSR General Settings Tx Channel Settings Adj Gap Channel Settings Standard Sub Blocks Multi Standard Radio Manage User Standards Sub Block Count COCEA COISE MAX POWER TX CHANNEL ACLR Mode Abs Rel Noise Cancellation m Or Power Unit Abs Hz Selected Trace Power Mode CIRW Adjust Settings For more information see chapter 5 2 3 4 Measurement on Multi Standard Radio MSR Signals on page 116 The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in chapter 11 5 3 Measuring the Channel Power and ACLR on page 643 e General MSR ACLR Measurement SettingS cceccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeseneeesecaeeesenees 130 e MSR Subblock and Tx Channel Definition ccccecceeeeeeccencecceeeeeeeeneeneeeees 135 e MSR Adjacent and Gap Channel Setup
54. Mpt SONGS ico cs eae ee neces deg EKNE N han dticeneeta del oe 358 L Preamplifier Option B24 cccsscccsssscssscscssscecsscecsssssesecsnsessnscecenscseseecaeeeeeas 358 Noise cancellation iicicccce etecentett ies aeley wate rieiatadid tha eieide EEEE 359 Reference Level Defines the expected maximum reference level Signal levels above this value may not be measured correctly which is indicated by the IF OVLD status display OVLD for analog baseband or digitial baseband input Defines the expected maximum reference level Signal levels above this value may not be measured correctly which is indicated by the IF OVLD status display The reference level is also used to scale power diagrams the reference level is then used as the maximum on the y axis Since the R amp S FSW hardware is adapted according to this value it is recommended that you set the reference level close above the expected maximum signal level to ensure an optimum measurement no compression good signal to noise ratio Note that the Reference Level value ignores the Shifting the Display Offset It is important to know the actual power level the R amp S FSW must handle For details see chapter 6 4 1 1 Reference Level on page 353 Note that for input from the External Mixer R amp S FSW B21 the maximum reference level also depends on the conversion loss see Reference level on page 322 Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe
55. RBW Weighting Filter Predefined standards can be selected via the CP ACLR Standard softkey in the CH Power menu or in the General Settings tab of the CP ACLR Setup dialog box For details on the available standards see chapter 5 2 8 Reference Predefined CP ACLR Standards on page 153 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer PRESet on page 643 User Defined Standards Standard In addition to the predefined standards you can save your own standards with your spe cific measurement settings in an xml file so you can use them again at a later time User defined standards are stored on the instrument in the C R_S instr acp_std direc tory A sample file is provided for an MSR ACLR measurement MSR_ACLRExample xml It sets up the measurement for the MSR signal generator waveform described in the file C R_S instr user waveform MSRA GSM WCDMA LET GSM wvy Note that ACLR user standards are not supported for Fast ACLR and multicarrier ACLR measurements TE a SSS User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 121 R amp S FSW Measurements Channel Power and Adjacent Channel Power ACLR Measurement Note User standards created on an analyzer of the R amp S FSP family are compatible to the R amp S FSW User standards created on an R amp S FSW however are not necessarily compatible to the analyzers of the R amp S FSP family and may not work there The following parameter definitions are saved in
56. RF bandwidth of left sub block 2 Spacing CF of the gap channel left subblock center RF bandwidth of left sub block 2 See also figure 5 5 and figure 5 6 For details see chapter 5 2 6 3 How to Configure an MSR ACLR Measurement on page 145 Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing GAP lt gap gt on page 664 Gap CACLR Channel Bandwidths Gap CACLR Channel Definition The gap channel bandwidth is normally predefined by the transmission technology stand ard The correct bandwidth is set automatically for the selected technology The band width for each channel is indicated by a colored bar in the display if the gap is not too narrow see Channel display for MSR signals on page 118 Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth GAP lt gap gt on page 659 Weighting Filters Gap CACLR Channel Definition Weighting filters allow you to determine the influence of individual channels on the total measurement result For each channel you can activate or deactivate the use of the weighting filter and define an individual weighting factor Alpha value Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe GAP lt gap gt on page 660 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa GAP lt gap gt on page 659 __L_LLL_L LLL_ a N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 142 R amp S FSW Measurements 5 2 6 5 2 6 1 Channel Power and Adjacent Channel Power ACLR Measu
57. RF input is also possible via the remote command INPut ATTenuation PROTection RESet 6 2 1 2 RF Input from the Analog Baseband Connector RF input can not only be taken from the RF INPUT connector on the front panel of the R amp S FSW If the optional Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B771 is installed and active for input an RF signal can be input at the BASEBAND INPUT connector and redirected from there to the RF input path A transducer is activated to compensate for the additional path of the redirected signal The signal is then processed as usual in the frequency and time domain as for any other RF input This is useful for example to perform frequency sweep measurements with single ended or differential active probes which can also be connected to the BASEBAND INPUT I connector I User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 275 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings 6 2 1 3 Data Input and Output Frequency sweep measurements on probe input You can perform RF measurements measurements in the time or frequency domain by connecting a probe to the BASEBAND INPUT connector and switching the input source to this connector in the RF input configuration see Input Connector on page 281 The probe s attenuation is compensated automatically by the R amp S FSW using a trans ducer named Probe on Baseband Input The probe can only be connected on I as only input at the connector can be redirected to the RF pat
58. Remote command TRIGger SEQuence SLOPe on page 784 SENSe SWEep EGATe POLarity on page 788 Trigger 2 3 Defines the usage of the variable TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors where Trigger 2 TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector on the front panel Trigger 3 TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on the rear panel Trigger 1 is INPUT only Note Providing trigger signals as output is described in detail in the R amp S FSW User Manual Input The signal at the connector is used as an external trigger source by the R amp S FSW No further trigger parameters are available for the connec tor Output The R amp S FSW sends a trigger signal to the output connector to be used by connected devices Further trigger parameters are available for the connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 790 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt DIRection on page 789 Output Type lt Trigger 2 3 Type of signal to be sent to the output Device Trig Default Sends a trigger when the R amp S FSW triggers gered Trigger Sends a high level trigger when the R amp S FSW is in Ready for trig Armed ger state This state is indicated by a status bit in the STATus OPERation reg ister bit 5 as well as by a low level signal at the AUX port pin 9 For details see STATus OPERation Register on page 575 and the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual User Defined Sends a trigger when user selects Send T
59. Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt TRACe on page 859 Final Test Detector Defines the detector to be used for the final EMI test at the marker frequency This setting is only available if the EMI R amp S FSW K54 measurement option is installed For details see chapter 5 13 3 2 Detectors and Dwell Time on page 252 SSS a SS User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 261 R amp S FSW Measurements a SSS a a ee Electromagnetic Interference EMI Measurement R amp S FSW K54 Note The trace detector configured in the trace settings is used for the initial peak search only see chapter 7 3 2 1 Trace Settings on page 417 Off No final test is performed Positive peak Determines the maximum signal level that was detected during the specified dwell time Average Determines the average signal level of the samples that were collected during the specified dwell time Quasipeak Determines the maximum signal level weighted to CISPR 16 1 1 that was detected during the dwell time The quasipeak detector is only available for the CISPR filter and not for an RBW of 1 MHz CISPR Aver Determines a weighted average signal level according to CISPR age 16 1 1 The average value according to CISPR 16 1 1 is the maximum value detected while calculating the linear average value during the specified dwell time The CISPR Average detector is only available for the CISPR filter RMS Aver A combination of the RMS detector
60. S FSW Measurements 5 13 4 1 Electromagnetic Interference EMI Measurement R amp S FSW K54 In addition some common settings are also relevant for EMI measurements e chapter 9 3 2 Transducer Settings on page 518 e chapter 7 5 3 2 Limit Line Settings and Functions on page 479 EMI Marker Configuration eserci EEEE EEEE 260 EMI Final Measurement Configuration ssssssssssiensseeinnnsseennnsseennnnntnnnnnneennnnnennn 263 USN Control Sangsara a AAEE EEE 265 EMI Marker Configuration The inital peak search for the R amp S FSW EMI measurement is defined by the marker configuration To configure EMI markers select the EMI measurement then press the MEAS CONFIG or MKR key and select Marker Config Selected MAKER meiiies ana aa aa aaa aA araa a 260 Marker State muscanu a decd cag A a E E E EEEE 260 Marker Position A ValUS bocce aud aana E TERA ETEEN 260 A FEC Ce ge e ee 260 Reference WAR cau iiesesadadsctensaessanncusaninanadcasdddessstadaceneadansakdaciuetunaaanddunmanesatdiedsients 261 Linking to Another MARKED ccc hacen ai denceadieiacede ee A eed 261 Assigning the Marker to a Trat ij ceec ccc eeepedeeseawsdecocgesanaesanecevesdhavaagceegeiae EEEE 261 Final Test Deter iiias a a AEEA EG 261 Select MAKE nnna a Ee a a E ESEE AEEA 262 Selected Marker Marker name The marker which is currently selected for editing is highlighted orange Remote command Marker selected via suffix lt m gt in remote commands
61. SWE EGAT SOUR VID for gated triggering see SENSe SWEep EGATe SOURce on page 788 IF Power Trigger Source Trigger Settings The R amp S FSW starts capturing data as soon as the trigger threshold is exceeded around the third intermediate frequency For frequency sweeps the third IF represents the start frequency The trigger bandwidth at the third IF depends on the RBW and sweep type For measurements on a fixed frequency e g zero span or I Q measurements the third IF represents the center frequency The trigger threshold depends on the defined trigger level as well as on the RF attenu ation and preamplification For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet This trigger source is only available for RF input Note Be aware that in auto sweep type mode due to a possible change in sweep types the trigger bandwidth may vary considerably for the same RBW setting Remote command TRIG SOUR IFP see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 785 SWE EGAT SOUR IFP for gated triggering see SENSe SWEep EGATe SOURce on page 788 Baseband Power lt Trigger Source Trigger Settings Defines triggering on the baseband power for baseband input via the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 or the Analog Baseband interface R amp S FSW B71 Remote command TRIG SOUR BBP see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 785 RF Pow
62. Trigger Signal ccecscceeceeeseeceeeeeseeseeeeeeeseeeaeeeeeeseneaeeeeseeeeaaees 393 6 6 1 Basics of Triggering and Gated Measurements Some background knowledge on triggering and gated measurements is provided here for a better understanding of the required configuration settings Tnggered measurements eesrieeeciiine eini EnEn AEN ERER 377 Gated Measuremicnt cccccccceccceccceaeteecccessneececeeenaeteceeeadatecescvansedeceeduaanecees 379 e Determining the Parameters in Preview MOde 1 cc cceetesseesseeseneeeseeteeneeee 382 6 6 1 1 Triggered measurements In a basic sweep measurement with default settings the sweep is started immediately when you start the measurement for example by pressing the RUN SINGLE key How ever sometimes you want the measurement to start only when a specific condition is fulfilled for example a signal level is exceeded or in certain time intervals For these cases you can define a trigger for the measurement In FFT sweep mode the trigger defines when the data acquisition starts for the FFT conversion An Offset can be defined to delay the measurement after the trigger event or to include data before the actual trigger event in time domain measurements pre trigger offset For complex tasks advanced trigger settings are available e Hysteresis to avoid unwanted trigger events caused by noise e Holdoff to define exactly which trigger event will cause the trigger in a j
63. Value lt power in dBm gt Ref Level on page 175 Yes if the Refer enceLevel child node is used Unit dBm Defines dBm as unit Yes if the Refer enceLevel node is used RFAttenuation Mode Manual Auto RF Att Mode on page 175 Yes if the Refer enceLevel child node is used Preamplifier ON OFF Preamp on page 176 Yes 5 5 7 2 ASCII File Export Format Spectrum Emission Mask When trace data from an SEM measurement is exported the data is stored in ASCII format as described below The first part of the file lists information about the signal ana lyzer and the general setup File contents Explanation File header Type FSW 26 Model Version 1 00 Firmware version Date 31 Mar 11 Storage date of data set Mode ANALYZER SEM Operating mode and measurement function Center Freq 13250000000 000000 Hz X axis settings Freq Offset 0 000000 Hz Span 25500000 000000 Hz x Axis LIN Start 13237250000 000000 Hz Stop 13262750000 000000 Hz Level Offset 0 000000 dB Y axis settings Ref Position 100 000000 y Axis LOG User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 194 R amp S FSW Measurements i eg ae ed Spurious Emissions Measurement File contents Explanation Level Range 100 000000 dB Trace settings Trace Mode CLR WRITE Detector RMS Sweep Count 0 Trace 1 x Unit Hz y Unit dBm List evaluation settings
64. above the mean power is plotted along the x axis of the graph The origin of the axis corresponds to the mean power level The probability that a level will be exceeded is plotted along the y axis 5 7 8 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement If the results do not meet your expectations try the following methods to optimize the measurement e Make sure the defined bandwidth is wide enough for the signal bandwidth of the device under test to be fully analyzed see Analysis Bandwidth on page 214 e lf the complete signal is be measured increase the number of samples so that the resulting measurement time is longer than one period of a bursted signal e f only parts of the signal are to be examined define a trigger source and a gate 5 8 Time Domain Power Measurement The R amp S FSW can determine the power of a signal in the time domain using the Time Domain Power measurement function About the Measurement 2 cccccccccceceeee eee eeeeeeeceeaeeaneeeceeeeeeeeeeeddeeeneaaeeeneeeeeeees 223 Time Domain Powel Results carieni iadnn a anada a 223 e Time Domain Power Basics Range Definition Using Limit Lines 224 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 222 R amp S FSW Measurements EE ees Time Domain Power Measurement e Time Domain Power Configuration cccccccceesecceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeetseneaeeeeeeetseeeaaees 224 e How to Measure Powers in the Time DOMa in cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeee
65. always be defined manually where they are available Remote command Activating Deactivating ENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe CHANnel lt ch gt on page 650 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe ACHannel on page 649 ENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe ALTernate lt ch gt on page 649 Alpha value ENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa CHANnel lt ch gt on page 649 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa ACHannel on page 648 ENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa ALTernate lt ch gt on page 648 Channel Names In the R amp S FSW s display carrier channels are labelled Tx by default the first neigh boring channel is labelled Adj adjacent channel all others are labelled Alt alternate channels You can define user specific channel names for each channel which are dis played in the result diagram and result table Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel NAME SENSe POWer ACHannel NAME SENSe POWer ACHannel NAME ACHannel on page 646 ALTernate lt ch gt on page 646 CHANnel lt ch gt on page 646 B A A MSR ACLR Configuration ACLR measurements can also be performed on input containing multiple signals for dif ferent communication standards A new measurement standard is provided that allows you to define multiple discontiguous transmit channels at specified frequencies inde pendant from the selected center frequency If the Multi Standard Radio standard is S User
66. and Adjacent Channel Power ACLR Measurement All instrument settings for the selected channel setup channel bandwidth channel spac ing can be optimized automatically using the Adjust Settings function see Optimized Settings Adjust Settings on page 125 The easiest way to configure a measurement is using the configuration Overview see chapter 6 1 Configuration Overview on page 273 Sweep Time The sweep time is selected depending on the desired reproducibility of results Repro ducibility increases with sweep time since power measurement is then performed over a longer time period As a general approach it can be assumed that approx 500 non correlated measured values are required for a reproducibility of 0 5 dB 99 of the measurements are within 0 5 dB of the true measured value This holds true for white noise The measured values are considered as non correlated if their time interval cor responds to the reciprocal of the measured bandwidth With IS 136 the measurement bandwidth is approx 25 kHz i e measured values at an interval of 40 us are considered as non correlated A measurement time of 40 ms is thus required per channel for 1000 measured values This is the default sweep time which the R amp S FSW sets in coupled mode Approx 5000 measured values are required for a reproducibility of 0 1 dB 99 i e the measurement time is to be increased to 200 ms The number of A D converter values N used
67. and at the delta markers If the powers of the two AM side bands are unequal the mean value of the two power values is used for AM modulation depth cal culation 5 11 2 AM Modulation Depth Results As a result of the AM Modulation Depth measurement the following values are displayed in the marker area of the diagram Label Description MDepth AM modulation depth in percent M1 Maximum of the signal carrier level D2 Offset of next peak to the right of the carrier D3 Offset of the next peak to the left of the carrier User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 242 R amp S FSW Measurements a SSSI a ET AM Modulation Depth Measurement MultiView Spectrum Ref Level 0 00 dBm RBW 10 kHz Att 10cB SWT 419s VBW 10 kHz Mode Auto FFT 1 AM Mod Depth CF 225 0 MHz 1001 pts 100 0 kHz Span 1 0 MHz 2 Marker Table Type Ref Tre Stimulus Response Function Function Result 225 0 MHz 4 29 dBm 279 7 kHz 10 51 dB MDeptt 59 718 o 279 7 kHz 10 49 dB Remote command The AM modulation depth can also be queried using the remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion MDEPth RESult on page 735 5 11 3 AM Modulation Depth Configuration AM Modulation Depth measurements are selected via the AM Modulation Depth button in the Select Measurement dialog box The measurement is started immediately with the default settings It can be configured via the MEAS CONFIG key or in the AM Mod ulation Depth
68. and overload conditions are minimized In order to do so a level measurement is performed to determine the optimal reference level You can change the measurement time for the level measurement if necessary see Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual on page 395 Remote command SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 795 Resetting the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Auto Resets the measurement duration for automatic settings to the default value Spectrum application 1 ms Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE on page 793 Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual This function allows you to change the measurement duration for automatic setting adjustments Enter the value in seconds Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE on page 793 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation on page 792 Upper Level Hysteresis When the reference level is adjusted automatically using the Auto Level function the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are also adjusted In order to avoid frequent adaptation due to small changes in the input signal you can define a hysteresis This setting defines an upper threshold the signal must exceed compared to the last mea surement before the reference level is adapted automatically Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis UPPer on page 794 E a a User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 395 Adju
69. and the available channel filters are not changed by the coupling With a span RBW ratio of 100 and a screen resolution of 1000 pixels each frequency in the spectrum is displayed by 10 pixels A span RBW ratio of 1000 provides the highest resolution A higher span RBW ratio i e low RBW values and large frequency spans however results in large amounts of data 6 5 1 5 How Data is Measured the Sweep Type In a standard analog frequency sweep the local oscillator of the analyzer sweeps the input data quasi analog from the start to the stop frequency to determine the frequency spectrum Alternatively the analyzer can sample signal levels at a defined frequency and transform the data by Fast Fourier Transformation FFT sweep This measurement method pro vides very precise results without spurious effects However the calculations add to the overall measurement time so that measurements with long sweep times and large num bers of sweep points may take longer than a common frequency sweep By default Auto mode the R amp S FSW automatically uses the optimal sweep type depending on the current measurement settings User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 364 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings Bandwidth Filter and Sweep Configuration Restrictions for FFT mode FFT mode is not available when using 5 Pole filters Channel filters or RRC filters or the Quasi peak detector In this case sweep mode is used The same applie
70. are closely related and interdependant The values available for resolution bandwidth and video bandwidth depend on the selected filter type In addition these settings have an impact on other measurement parameters The following equation shows the interdependency of these settings T sweepMIN K Span RBW where K Filter constant By default a Gaussian filter is used The resolution bandwidth the video bandwidth and the sweep time are set automatically according to the set span and default coupling is used Thus the following settings are applied RBW 100 Span VBW RBW 100 Span Sweep time Tmin for set Span RBW VBW When defining the bandwidth and filter settings consider the impact of the individual settings on the other settings and the measurement result as described in more detail in the following sections e Separating Signals by Selecting an Appropriate Resolution Bandwidth 362 e Smoothing the Trace Using the Video Bandwidth essssesssrsssssssssssssrrrrrnsssssses 363 _ Coupling VBW and RBW us sierindi ien tacavtadecsadacadusnicnaticuatondcacedtsectacececedeaendannderdy 364 Coupling Spamand RBW inensis taaa aa eaaa aaa aa ENa adani 364 e How Data is Measured the Sweep TyPe 2 c ccccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceececaneeeeeeeeeeees 364 Which Data May Pass Filter TyPe s 2 2 ccveceseecceeteceeeeeceeteaaaeeescneeteaeeneeeens 365 e How Long the Data is Measured Sw
71. automatically While the mea surement is running the RUN CONT key is highlighted To stop the measurement press the RUN CONT key again The key is no longer highlighted The results are not deleted until a new measurement is started 5 12 2 Measurement Example Measuring Levels at Low S N Ratios The minimum signal level a signal analyzer can measure is limited by its intrinsic noise Small signals can be swamped by noise and therefore cannot be measured For signals that are just above the intrinsic noise the accuracy of the level measurement is influenced by the intrinsic noise of the signal analyzer The displayed noise level of a signal analyzer depends on its noise figure the selected RF attenuation the selected reference level the selected resolution and video bandwidth and the detector For details see e chapter 6 4 1 2 RF Attenuation on page 354 e chapter 6 4 1 1 Reference Level on page 353 e chapter 6 5 1 1 Separating Signals by Selecting an Appropriate Resolution Band width on page 362 e chapter 6 5 1 2 Smoothing the Trace Using the Video Bandwidth on page 363 e chapter 7 3 1 1 Mapping Samples to Sweep Points with the Trace Detector on page 406 This measurement example shows the different factors influencing the S N ratio User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 246 R amp S FSW Measurements Basic Measurements Signal generator settings e g R amp S SMU Frequency 128 MHz Leve
72. box which is displayed when you select the Manage User Standards button in the General Settings tab of the CP ACLR Setup dialog box Cancel Ee In the Manage dialog box you can save the current measurement settings as a user defined standard or load a stored measurement configuration Furthermore you can delete an existing configuration file E SS SSS Sz User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 132 R amp S FSW Measurements SS SSS NS nM Channel Power and Adjacent Channel Power ACLR Measurement For details see chapter 5 2 6 4 How to Manage User Defined Configurations on page 146 Remote command To query all available standards CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer STANdard CATalog on page 644 To load a standard CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer PRESet on page 643 To save a standard CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer STANdard SAVE on page 644 To delete a standard CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer STANdard DELete on page 644 Number of Subblocks Defines the number of subblocks i e groups of transmission channels in an MSR signal For more information see chapter 5 2 3 4 Measurement on Multi Standard Radio MSR Signals on page 116 Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel SBCount on page 661 Reference Channel The measured power values in the adjacent channels can be displayed relative to th
73. channel in the last subblock Channel display for MSR signals As in common ACLR measurements the individual channels are indicated by different colored bars in the diagram The height of each bar corresponds to the measured power of that channel In addition the name of the channel is indicated above the bar Subblocks are named A B C D E and are also indicated by a slim blue bar along the frequency axis Note that Tx channel names correspond to the specified technology for LTE including the bandwidth followed by a consecutive number If the channel is too narrow to display the channel name itis replaced by on the screen Channel names cannot be defined manually The assigned subblock is indicated with the channel name e g B LTE_5M1 for the first Tx channel in subblock B that uses the LTE 5 MHz bandwidth technology Gap channels CACLR are indicated by the names of the surrounding subblocks e g AB for the gap between subblocks A and B followed by the channel name Gap1 or Gap2 and an L for lower or a U for upper Both the lower and upper gap channels are displayed However if the gap between two subblocks is too narrow the second gap channel may not be displayed If the gap is even narrower no gap channels are displayed Adjacent and alternate channels are displayed as in common ACLR measurements Channel power results The Result Summary for MRS signal measurements is similar to to the table for com
74. channel configuration select Adjust Set tings 6 Start a sweep The result is displayed as OBW in the marker results How to determine the OBW for a multicarrier signal using search limits 1 Select the OBW measurement function from the Select Measurement dialog box 2 Select the OBW Config softkey to display the Occupied Bandwidth configuration dialog box 3 Define the percentage of power Power Bandwidth that defines the bandwidth to be determined 4 Define search limits so the search area contains only the first carrier signal a Enter values for the left or right limits or both b Enable the use of the required limits 5 Start a sweep The result for the first carrier is displayed as OBW in the marker results 6 Change the search limits so the search area contains the next carrier signal as described in step step 4 The OBW is re calculated and the result for the next carrier is displayed Anew sweep is not necessary 7 Continue in this way until all carriers have been measured 5 4 5 Measurement Example In the following example the bandwidth that occupies 99 of the total power of a PDC signal at 800 MHz level 0 dBm is measured 1 Preset the R amp S FSW _ LL _LL_L L L_LzL_L_ a N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 163 R amp S FSW Measurements a 8 es Spectrum Emission Mask SEM Measurement Set the center frequency to 800 MHz Set the reference level to 10 dBm Sel
75. channel itself nor the defined adjacent channels Therefore most of the samples taken during the sweep time cannot be used for channel power or ACLR calculation To decrease the measurement times the R amp S FSW offers a Fast ACLR mode In Fast ACLR mode the power of the frequency range between the channels of interest is not measured because it is not required for channel power or ACLR calculation The mea surement time per channel is set with the sweep time It is equal to the selected mea surement time divided by the selected number of channels SS ST User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 110 R amp S FSW Measurements 5 2 3 2 Channel Power and Adjacent Channel Power ACLR Measurement In the Fast ACLR mode the R amp S FSW measures the power of each channel in the time domain with the defined channel bandwidth at the center frequency of the channel in question The digital implementation of the resolution bandwidths makes it possible to select filter characteristics that are precisely tailored to the signal In case of CDMA2000 for example the power in the useful channel is measured with a bandwidth of 1 23 MHz and that of the adjacent channels with a bandwidth of 30 kHz Therefore the R amp S FSW changes from one channel to the other and measures the power at a bandwidth of 1 23 MHz or 30 kHz using the RMS detector MultiView Spectrum Ref Level 0 00 dBm Att 10 dB SWT 233 3 ms 1 ACLR 850 0 MHz 100 pts 2 Result Summ
76. correct bandwidth is set automatically for the selected technology The bandwidth for each channel is indicated by a colored bar in the display SS SST User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 140 R amp S FSW Measurements SSS M a a ge a ed Channel Power and Adjacent Channel Power ACLR Measurement The value entered for any ADJ or ALT channel is automatically also defined for all sub sequent alternate ALT channels Thus only one value needs to be entered if all adjacent channels have the same bandwidth Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth ACHannel on page 645 SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth ALTernate lt ch gt on page 645 Weighting Filters Adjacent Channel Definition Weighting filters allow you to determine the influence of individual channels on the total measurement result For each channel you can activate or deactivate the use of the weighting filter and define an individual weighting factor Alpha value Remote command Activating Deactivating SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe ACHannel on page 649 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe ALTernate lt ch gt on page 649 Alpha value SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa ACHannel on page 648 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa ALTernate lt ch gt on page 648 Limit Checking Adjacent Channel Definition During an ACLR measurement the power values can be checked whether they exceed user defined or stand
77. create and use your own XML files Alternatively edit the settings directly in the Spectrum Emission Mask dialog box and save the XML file afterwards This way no modifications have to be done in the XML file itself In addition to saving the current settings to a file settings files can also be created inde pendantly of the R amp S FSW in an exernal application When creating your own XML files be sure to comply with the following conventions because the R amp S FSW can only interpret XML files of a known structure For sample files look in the C r_s instr sem_ std directory of the R amp S FSW To load a settings file use the Load function in the Standard Files tab of the Spectrum Emission Mask dialog box see How to load an SEM settings file on page 187 All XML files are stored under C r_s instr sem_std The files for importing range settings obey the rules of the XML standard The child nodes attributes and structure defined for the data import are described here Be sure to follow the structure exactly as shown below or else the R amp S FSW is not able to interpret the XML file and error messages are shown on the screen It is recommended that you make a copy of an existing file and edit the copy of the file Basically the file consists of three elements that can be defined e The BaseFormat element e The PowerClass element e The Range element The BaseFormat element It carries information about basic s
78. density is displayed instead Thus the absolute unit of the channel power is switched from dBm to dBm Hz Note The channel power density in dBm Hz corresponds to the power inside a bandwidth of 1 Hz and is calculated as follows channel power density channel power log channel bandwidth Thus you can measure the signal noise power density for example or use the additional functions Absolute and Relative Values ACLR Mode and Reference Channel to obtain the signal to noise ratio Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer RESult PHZ on page 665 Power Mode The measured power values can be displayed directly for each trace Clear Write or only the maximum values over a series of measurements can be displayed Max Hold In the latter case the power values are calculated from the current trace and compared with the previous power value using a maximum algorithm The higher value is retained If Max Hold mode is activated Pwr Max is indicated in the table header Note that the trace mode remains unaffected by this setting Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer MODE on page 639 Setting a Fixed Reference for Channel Power Measurements Set CP Reference For pure channel power measurements no adjacent channels defined with only one Tx channel the currently measured channel power can be used as a fixed reference value for subsequent channel power measurements
79. described in chapter 11 5 3 Measuring the Channel Power and ACLR on page 643 e General CP ACLR Measurement SettingS 22 c scceeeeceseecceeteeeeenseeeeeeneenenees 120 Ghannel SCID eaa a aE 126 5 2 4 1 General CP ACLR Measurement Settings General measurement settings are defined in the ACLR Setup dialog in the General Settings tab SAVANE asaan a aa wade dd claaddaliadeante aa a aa a Maina a aaa 121 L Predefined Standards cccscccscsscssssssscsssessssseecsescceecscceceecseseecceseaeeesenses 121 L User Defined Staridards c ceccccsccceccessvsecsssctcssnctvetastatesscelactaivacedbdseneeasteerers 121 Numberof Channels TX ADJ ninangisinoniidaonian iaaea aiara 123 Reference Channel aaceccininencmnn na AAE ATEA 123 Noise GCANCOllAUON viccicicccsisdccascccaad iiis a a aa a a aaia 124 ioe Sl ae oa a a 124 Selected Trace enrugas sakdasaeaadatasauddanaadddaaddaarnadaddaascdvabanedaswataadcacaass 124 Absolute and Relative Values ACLR Mode cccceseceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesneeeeeeenaees 124 Channel Power Levels and Density Power Unit essssssesssesssrnsssrnrsrersserrnnerenns 125 Power Mode aioir a a a A OEN nat 125 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 120 R amp S FSW Measurements mman Channel Power and Adjacent Channel Power ACLR Measurement Setting a Fixed Reference for Channel Power Measurements Set CP Reference OE EEE EEE DIEA IIN E T E E TT T EE ES 125 Optimized Setti
80. device manuals DCR DOOR ACHO occ acest E cant anehuweey cai ectsudedocnaeantoogidy EEEE iR 282 Microbutton Action Active R amp S probes except for RT ZS10E have a configurable microbutton on the probe head By pressing this button you can perform an action on the instrument directly from the probe Select the action that you want to start from the probe Run single Starts one data acquisition No action Prevents unwanted actions due to unintended usage of the microbut ton Remote command SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETup MODE on page 813 Power Sensors The R amp S FSW can also analyze data from a connected power sensor BasicS on POWER SENSO x cicdeccsciscidacetiieeiaiccitestebidcaededtethincadduetibidadacadehbedadadelebions 282 Power Sensor SCUINGS tcc iiaics edited tine tdidtiviieetn TT 284 e How to Work With a Power S nSOl ccccccccccccceceeseeccseeeeeeeeceseeaeesseueeeeuseeseueeeeaaes 289 Basics on Power Sensors For precise power measurement up to 4 power sensors can be connected to the instru ment via the power sensor interface on the front panel Both manual operation and remote control are supported Currently only R amp S NRP Zxy power sensors are supported For a detailed list of sup ported sensors see the data sheet Power sensors can also be used to trigger a measurement at a specified power level e g from a signal generator see Using a Power Sensor as an External Power Tri
81. each range If you use a function to define the relative limit start or stop value the signal is checked against an additional condition the power must exceed the absolute limit as well as the absolute and relative function values Abs or Rel If the power exceeds either the abso lute or the relative limits the check fails The stricter lower limit line is displayed for each range If you use a function to define the relative limit start or stop value the signal is checked against an additional condition if the power exceeds the absolute limit or the higher of the absolute and relative function values the check fails Relative limit line functions A new function allows you to define limit lines whose start or end points or both are variable depending on the carrier power Thus the resulting limit line may change its slope within the range depending on the carrier power Common relative limit lines are calculated once for the defined start and end points and maintain a constant slope If the relative limit value function is used in combination with the Abs and Rel or Abs or Rel limit check types an additional condition is considered for the limit check see table 5 3 Limit check results in the evaluation list The largest deviations of the power from the limit line for each range are displayed in the evaluation list Furthermore the absolute powers for those values as well as the relative
82. each sweep the center frequency is set to the maximum signal found within the searched bandwidth If no maximum signal above a defined threshold value is found in the searched bandwidth the center frequency remains unchanged The search bandwidth and the threshold value are shown in the diagram by red lines which are labeled as TRK E a a User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 345 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings M a eT Frequency and Span Configuration Frequency Signal Tracking State off Gruiu RULIGI E 37 0 dBm OM A CF 1 321912416 GHz 1001 pts Span 2 641824832 GHz 6 3 1 4 Coping with Large Frequency Ranges Logarithmic Scaling In a linear display the frequencies are distributed linearly across the x axis That means the entire frequency range is divided by the number of sweep points and the distance between sweep points is equal Linear scaling is useful to determine precise frequencies within a small range Fig 6 20 Linear x axis scaling the distance between the sweep points is equal e g 200 kHz However if high and low frequencies appear in the same display it is difficult to determine individual frequencies precisely or to distinguish frequencies that are close together In a logarithmic display lower frequencies are distributed amoung a much larger area of the display while high frequencies are condensed to a smaller area Now it is much easier to distinguish several lower frequencies as t
83. eed 306 Manual Source FISQ UNG Ys eiie E EETA 306 Automatic Source Frequency Numerator Denominator Offset cceceeeeeeeees 306 Result Frequency Stat icc ia eee teed ecg eda 307 Result FPFEQUGHIGY Stop neinni snascuadinnncecedevanaactiasunnaduacesssen aii an Aiia 307 Source State Activates or deactivates control of an external generator Remote command SOURce EXTernal STATe on page 817 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 305 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output Source Power The output power of the external generator The default output power is 20 dBm The range is specified in the data sheet Remote command SOURce EXTernal POWer LEVel on page 817 Source Offset Constant level offset for the external generator Values from 200 dB to 200 dB in 1 dB steps are allowed The default setting is 0 dB Offsets are indicated by the LVL label in the channel bar see also Displayed Information and Errors on page 301 With this offset attenuators or amplifiers at the output connector of the external generator can be taken into account for the displayed output power values on screen or during data entry for example Positive offsets apply to an amplifier and negative offsets to an attenuator subsequent to the external generator Remote command SOURce POWer LEVel IMMediate OFFSet on page 817 Source Frequency Coupling Defines the frequency coupling mode between
84. external mixers are not supported in MSRA mode Mixer STUN Soca ccies acces de aaeeee eterna e anena a aa a aa a aaa tankaae vine aeaa a aaa KEE Eaa 326 6e Basie SOUINGS oian ASA NEEE EAST 330 e Managing Conversion Loss Tables ccc8s cceniisieetieceeeesceeneaeeeeteees 332 e Creating and Editing Conversion Loss Tables cccccccsscceeeeeesseeneceeeeeetseeeaaeees 333 Mixer Settings In this tab you configure the band and specific mixer settings User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 326 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output Frequency Basic Settings Mixer Settings Conversion Loss Table External Mixer Band Settings Mixer Type RF Start Digital IQ RF Stop Handover Freq m RF Overrange Preset Band Harmonic Type Range Harmonic Order Conversion Loss a Mixer Settings FRE OMG ING AET E EE E T E TETEE 328 PIS SOU BanG unene A A AE EEA 328 MIKO Typene ETEA E eed eee ede ain 328 Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration ccccccseceeeceeeeeeeceeeseecaeeeeseeteeeneees 328 MR Hci acacia lected a Veo cst adie aie nek 329 CR Sapte agers a intend e a sa E tenia 329 L Harmonie Ordernar sanan a A alana AEE 329 SSS econ a E A E E 329 External Mixer State Activates or deactivates the external mixer for input If activated ExtMix is indicated in the channel bar of the application together with the used band see Band on page 328 Remote command SENSe MIXer ST
85. gate settings are applied to the measurement 6 6 2 Trigger and Gate Settings Trigger and gate settings can be configured via the TRIG key or in the Trigger and Gate dialog box which is displayed when you select the Trigger Gate button in the Overview Show Preview On oft 1 Time Sweep Settings Frequency 13 25 GHz RBW 20 0 MHz Sweep Time fio oms e CF 13 25 GHz 1001 pts 5 1 0 ms Trigger Source Trigger In Out Gated Trigger On We ara s 2 Gate Mode Trigger Level 20 0 dBm Drop Out Time Trigger Offset Slope Rising Falling Gate Delay 0 0s Hysteresis 3 0 dB Holdoff Gate Length 400 0 us External triggers from one of the TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors on the R amp S FSW are configured in a separate tab of the dialog box User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 382 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings Trigger and Gate Configuration Trigger Source Trigger In Out Trigger 2 Output Output Type User Defined Level Low Pulse Length 100 0 us Send Trigger JL Trigger 3 Input Output For step by step instructions on configuring triggered and gated measurements see chapter 6 6 3 How to Configure a Triggered and Gated Measurement on page 391 PO OWIG Weiccntscncciasedesbadesauaxacwasvantacatzensteaaesadedanna deadesdgdesswactadas DaN a a a iiaa EEA 384 C U e a E R E as dang AE 384 EREN e e daca dee aco htiee 384 EGY TUG iste eciccain si inscninsdaiinanawansusicdainaniitnnedsonsaedncaienusanst
86. internal trigger signal can be output for use by other connected devices For details on the connectors see the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual To output a trigger to a connected device 1 In the Trigger In Out tab of the Trigger and Gate dialog box set the trigger to be used to Output Note Trigger 2 is output to the front panel connector Trigger 3 is output to the rear panel connector Define whether the trigger signal is to be output automatically Output Type Device triggered or Trigger Armed or whether you want to start output manually Output Type User defined For manual output Specify the constant signal level and the length of the trigger pulse to be output Note that the level of the trigger pulse is opposite to the constant output Level setting compare the graphic on the Send Trigger button Connect a device that will receive the trigger signal to the configured TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector _L_ L_L_L_LLLLL_ a S User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 393 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings a Adjusting Settings Automatically 5 Start a measurement and wait for an internal trigger or select the Send Trigger button The configured trigger is output to the connector 6 7 Adjusting Settings Automatically Some settings can be adjusted by the R amp S FSW automatically according to the current measurement settings In order to do so a measurement is performed The duratio
87. level or the hardware settings The reference line determines the range and the scaling of the y axis just as the refer ence level does The normalized reference trace 0 dB directly after calibration is displayed on this ref erence line indicated by a red line in the diagram By default the reference line is dis played at the top of the diagram If you shift the reference line the normalized trace is shifted as well Shifting the reference line and normalized trace You can shift the reference line and thus the normalized trace in the result display by changing the Reference Position or the Reference Value _L_L_L_ LLL_ EE N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 298 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output MultiView Spectrum RBW 2 MHz ns VBW 2MHz 100 0 MHZ 1001 pts 20 0 MHz 300 0 MHZ Fig 6 6 Shifted reference line If the DUT inserts a gain or an attenuation in the measurement this effect can be reflected in the result display on the R amp S FSW To reflect a power offset in the measurement trace change the Reference Value For a detailed example see chapter 6 2 4 5 Measurement Example Calibration with an External Generator on page 312 Coupling the Frequencies As described in Normalization on page 296 normalized measurement results are very accurate as long as the same settings are used as for calibration Although approximate normalization is possible it is import
88. maximum number of peaks per range that are stored in the list Once the selected number of peaks has been reached the peak search is stopped in the current range and continued in the next range The maximum value is 50 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt PSEarch PEAKsearch SUBRanges on page 709 Saving the Evaluation List Exports the evaluation list of the Spurious Emissions measurement to an ASCII file for evaluation in an external application If necessary change the decimal separator for evaluation in other languages Define the file name and storage location in the file selection dialog box that is displayed when you select the Save function For details see How to Save the Spurious Emissions Evaluation List on page 206 Remote command MMEMory STORe LIST on page 926 FORMat DEXPort DSEParator on page 906 How to Perform a Spurious Emissions Measurement 1 Press the MEAS key then select the Spurious Emissions measurement 2 Define the span of the signal to be monitored in the general span settings 3 Select the Overview softkey then select the Spurious Setup button The Spurious Emissions dialog box is displayed 4 Split the frequency span of the measurement into ranges for signal parts with similar characteristics Define the required ranges in the Sweep List using the Insert before Range and Insert after Range buttons which refer to the currently selected range 5 Define the measu
89. measured signal If Auto peak search and limit lines are active the active markers are set to the peak delta values between the measured signal and the limit lines The active marker levels and positions are displayed in the Marker Table Note the marker results are also displayed in the Result Summary in addition the Marker Table contains the marker results for those markers for which no final EMI test is performed Final test results Result Summary The results of the final EMI tests at the active marker frequencies are displayed in the Result Summary The Result Summary provides the following information Label Description Type Marker name Ref Reference marker for delta markers Trace Assigned trace X value Marker x value frequency for final test Y value Marker y value level during inital measurement Final Test Detector used for final EMI test Line name Line activated for limit check A Limit Delta between measured level and limit line if active The value is colored to indicate the following states e green does not exceed limit e yellow within margin e red exceeds limit Final Result Value measured during final EMI test using specified detector at marker frequency EMI Measurement Basics Some background knowledge on basic terms and principles used in EMI measurements is provided here for a better understanding of the required configuration settings e Resol
90. of the delta markers Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 860 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X on page 858 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X RELative on page 870 Search Signals Performs a new search on the input signal and recalculates the AM Modulation Depth according to the measured values Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion MDEPth SEARchsignal ONCE on page 735 5 11 4 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement If the results do not meet your expectations try the following methods to optimize the measurement e Set the center frequency to the frequency of the device under test e Adjust the span so the peaks to the left and right of the carrier produced by the AM modulated signal are clearly visible If the span is too wide these signals may fall together with the carrier and the mea surement can not be performed If the span is too narrow theses signals are outside of the measured span and the delta markers can not find these peaks The rule of thumb is to set the span to three times the value of the AM modulation frequency User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 244 R amp S FSW Measurements Basic Measurements 5 11 5 How to Determine the AM Modulation Depth Apply a modulated carrier signal to the R amp S FSW input On the R amp S FSW press the MEAS key Select the AM Modulation Depth measurement function from the S
91. range of values However if large and small values LSS M User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 354 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings a a SSS Ss Amplitude and Vertical Axis Configuration appear in the same display it is difficult to determine individual values precisely or to distinguish values that are close together In a logarithmic display smaller values are distributed amoung a much larger area of the display while large values are condensed to a smaller area Now it is much easier to distinguish several lower values as they are spread over a wider area Logarithmic scal ing is useful when large ranges of values must be combined in one display Logarithmic scaling is best applied to measurement values in logarithmic units dB dBm etc In addition to linear or logarithmic scaling the vertical axis can be set to display either absolute or relative values Absolute values show the measured levels while relative values show the difference between the measured level and the defined reference level Relative values are indicated in percent for linear scaling and in dB for logarithmic scal ing 6 4 2 Amplitude Settings Amplitude settings determine how the R amp S FSW must process or display the expected input power levels To configure the amplitude settings Amplitude settings can be configured via the AMPT key or in the Amplitude dialog box gt To display the Amplitude dialog box do one of the following e Sele
92. ratio C N and the Carrier to noise ratio in relation to the bandwidth C N measurements are selected via the corresponding button in the Select Measure ment dialog box The measurement is started immediately with the default settings It can be configured via the MEAS CONFIG key or in the Carrier Noise configuration dialog box which is displayed as a tab in the Analysis dialog box or when you select the Carrier Noise Config softkey from the Carrier Noise menu on Channel Bandwidth 9 0 15 MHz Adjust Settings Carrier to noise measurements are not available in zero span mode The easiest way to configure a measurement is using the configuration Overview see chapter 6 1 Configuration Overview on page 273 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 156 R amp S FSW Measurements c S aM Carrier to Noise Measurements The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in chapter 11 5 4 Measuring the Carrier to Noise Ratio on page 670 CIN auaa a a a aa e aa aa a a a 157 CO a E E E a ee ane a a ee 157 Ghamel Bandwidth inuisssiinininsdinan a a A E E E TN 157 Adjust SONGS ccce aie EEE EE EEE 157 C N Switches the measurement of the carrier noise ratio on or off If no marker is active marker 1 is activated The measurement is performed on the trace that marker 1 is assigned to To shift marker 1 and measure another trace use the Marker to Trace softkey in the Marker menu see Assi
93. sample detector is used for noise or phase noise marker calculation However it is unreliable if the displayed span is much greater then the resolution bandwidth or if the tuning steps of the local oscillator are too large The sample detector is not recommended for EMI tests Quasipeak detector CISPR filter only The quasipeak detector displays the maximum signal level weighted to CISPR 16 1 1 that was detected during the dwell time The quasipeak detector is only available for the CISPR filter and not for an RBW of 1 MHz The filter bandwidth and time parameters of the detector depend on the measured fre quency The time lag of the simulated pointer instrument reflects the weighting factor of the signal depending on its form modulation etc ___SES M User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 253 R amp S FSW Measurements Electromagnetic Interference EMI Measurement R amp S FSW K54 Table 5 7 Required parameters depending on frequency for CISPR quasipeak detector Band A Band B Band C D Frequency range lt 150 kHz 150 kHz to 30 MHz gt 30 MHz Resolution bandwidth 200 Hz 9 kHz 120 kHz Charge time 45 ms ims 1 ms Discharge time 500 ms 160 ms 550 ms Time lag of the simulated 160 ms 160 ms 100 ms pointer instrument Consider the following when defining the dwell time e Unknown signals select a dwell time of at least 1 second to ensure that pulses down to a frequency of 5 Hz are weighted correc
94. sation cenai n A ination ERR 143 Number of Adjacent Channels ADJ Count Defines the number of adjacent channels above and below the Tx channel block in an MSR signal The carrier channel to which the relative adjacent channel power values should be referenced must be defined see Reference Channel on page 123 Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel ACPairs on page 645 Limit Checking Activates or deactivates limit checks globally for all adjacent and gap CACLR channels In addition limits must be defined and activated individually for each channel User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 139 R amp S FSW Measurements ee EE ee ae Channel Power and Adjacent Channel Power ACLR Measurement The results of the power limit checks are also indicated in the STAT QUES ACPL status registry see STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit Register on page 578 Remote command CALCulate LIMit ACPower STATe on page 655 Adjacent Channel Definition Defines the channels adjacent to the transmission channel block in MSR signals A max imum of 12 adjacent channels can be defined For MSR signals adjacent channels are defined in relation to the center frequency of the first and last transmission channel in the entire block i e The lower adjacent channels are defined in relation to the CF of the first Tx channel in the first subblock The upper adjacent channels are defined in relatio
95. set one sweep is performed The sweep count is applied to all the traces in a diagram If the trace configurations Average Max Hold or Min Hold are set the sweep aver age count also determines the number of averaging or maximum search procedures see chapter 7 3 1 2 Analyzing Several Traces Trace Mode on page 408 For details on how the number of sweep points and the sweep count affect the trace results on the screen see chapter 7 3 1 1 Mapping Samples to Sweep Points with the Trace Detector on page 406 How Often Data is Measured Sweep Mode How often the spectrum is swept depends on the sweep mode Either a certain number of sweeps can be defined Sweep Count which are performed in Single Sweep mode or the sweep is repeated continuously Continuous Sweep mode ____L___SS__SS A User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 366 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings 6 5 2 Bandwidth Filter and Sweep Configuration By default the data is collected for the specified number of sweeps and the corresponding trace is displayed When the next sweep is started the previous trace is deleted However the data from a single sweep run can also be retained and displayed together with the new data Continue Single Sweep mode This is particularly of interest when using the trace configurations Average or Max Hold to take previously recorded measurements into account for averaging maximum search see chapter 7 3 1
96. settings other than the limit and transducer values are identical for several adjacent ranges activate Fast SEM mode to speed up the measure ment You only have to activate the mode for one range the others are adapted automatically If necessary change the settings for the reference power to which all SEM results refer in the Reference Range tab To indicate the determined peaks in the display during an SEM measurement select the Evaluations button in the Overview and activate the Show Peaks option To save the current SEM measurement settings to a file to re use them later save a settings file as described in How to save a user defined SEM settings file on page 187 Start a sweep The determined powers and limit deviations for each range are indicated in the eval uation list If activated the peak power levels for each range are also indicated in the diagram To save the evaluation list export the results to a file as described in chapter 5 5 6 2 How to Save SEM Result Files on page 188 __L_L__L LLL SSS User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 186 R amp SEFSW Measurements a aa Spectrum Emission Mask SEM Measurement To perform an MSR SEM measurement 1 Select the MSR Config softkey 2 Select the band category that determines the digital standards used in the measure ment setup see Band Category on page 181 3 Define the bandwidth that contains all relevent carrier signals to be measured
97. softkey or use a different generator type Switch to the Source Calibration subtab Select the Source Calibration Type Transmission to perform a calibration sweep and store a reference trace for the measurement setup Select Source Calibration Normalize On Optionally shift the reference line further down in the result display by descreasing the Reference Position The measurement setup is now calibrated Subsequent measurement results are normalized so that any unwanted effects from the cables and connectors are removed How to Remove the Effects of a Particular Component from Measurement Results Using Calibration Set up the measurement including the component and perform a calibration as described in How to Calibrate a Measurement Setup using an External Generator on page 310 After setting Source Calibration Normalize On select Save as Trd Factor to store the normalized reference trace as a transducer factor If necessary switch to another measurement channel for a different R amp S FSW appli cation Press the SETUP key then select the Transducer softkey Select the stored transducer in the list of available transducers and select the Active setting for it D User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 311 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output 6 Perform any measurement with the setup that contains the calibrated component The measurement results do not incl
98. the Amplitude dialog box gt To display the Amplitude dialog box do one of the following e Select Amplitude from the Overview e Select the AMPT key and then the Scale Config softkey The remote commands required to define these settings are described in chapter 11 7 3 Configuring the Vertical Axis Amplitude Scaling on page 774 E a N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 359 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings Amplitude and Vertical Axis Configuration Amplitude Scale Range ing Logarithmic Range 100 dB v t Linear Percent Ref Level Position 100 0 e Linear with Unit Auto Scale Once eo Auto SEAE ONCE ae ne ee ee ae ee ee 360 ae e E cosn tagcat A E E E E A 360 Range Defines the displayed y axis range in dB frequency domain or Hz time domain The default value is 100 dB or 500 kHz Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe on page 779 Ref Level Position Defines the reference level position i e the position of the maximum AD converter value on the level axis in where 0 corresponds to the lower and 100 to the upper limit of the diagram Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe RPOSition on page 780 Auto Scale Once Automatically determines the optimal range and reference level position to be displayed for the current measurement settings The display is only set once it is not adapted further if the measurem
99. the Channel Settings tab of the ACLR Setup dialog box select the Spacing subtab The value entered for any Tx channel is automatically also defined for all subsequent Tx channels Thus only one value needs to be entered if all Tx channels have the same spacing If the channel spacing for the adjacent or an alternate channel is changed all higher alternate channel spacings are multiplied by the same factor new spacing value old spacing value The lower adjacent channel spacings remain unchanged Only one value needs to be entered for equal channel spacing User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 144 R amp S FSW Measurements 5 2 6 3 Channel Power and Adjacent Channel Power ACLR Measurement Example Defining channel spacing In the default setting the adjacent channels have the following spacing 20 kHz ADJ 40 kHz ALT1 60 kHz ALT2 80 kHz ALT3 100 kHz ALT4 If the spacing of the first adjacent channel ADJ is set to 40 kHz the spacing of all other adjacent channels is multiplied by factor 2 to result in 80 kHz ALT1 120 kHz ALT2 160 kHz ALT3 If starting from the default setting the spacing of the 5th adjacent channel ALT4 is set to 150 kHz the spacing of all higher adjacent channels is multiplied by factor 1 5 to result in 180 kHz ALT5 210 kHz ALT6 240 kHz ALT7 How to Configure an MSR ACLR Measurement Performing an ACLR measurement on MSR signals is sup
100. the filter select a bandwidth large enough so the displayed signal reflects the entire shape of the filter Smoothing the Trace Using the Video Bandwidth The video filters are responsible for smoothing the displayed trace Using video band widths that are small compared to the resolution bandwidth only the signal average is displayed and noise peaks and pulsed signals are repressed If pulsed signals are to be measured it is advisable to use a video bandwidth that is large compared to the resolution bandwidth VBW 10 x RBW for the amplitudes of pulses to be measured correctly The level of a sine wave signal is not influenced by the video bandwidth A sine wave signal can therefore be freed from noise by using a video bandwidth that is small com pared with the resolution bandwidth and thus be measured more accurately RMS Average detector and VBW If an RMS or average detector is used the video bandwidth in the hardware is bypassed Thus duplicate trace averaging with small VBWs and RMS or average detector no longer occurs However the VBW is still considered when calculating the sweep time This leads to a longer sweep time for small VBW values Thus you can reduce the VBW value to achieve more stable trace curves even when using an RMS or average detector Nor mally if the RMS or average detector is used the sweep time should be increased to get more stable traces E a a User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 363 R amp S FSW Comm
101. the level limits for each power class The range always starts at 200 dBm INF and always stops at 200 dBm INF These fields cannot be modified If more than one power class is defined the value of PMin must be equal to the value of PMax of the previous power class and vice versa Note that the power level may be equal to the lower limit but must be lower than the upper limit P mins P lt P max Remote command CALCulate LIMit ESPectrum PCLass lt class gt MINimum on page 692 CALCulate LIMit ESPectrum PCLass lt class gt MAXimum on page 692 Sweep List Switches to the Sweep List tab of the Spectrum Emission Mask dialog box and focuses the Limit Check setting for the corresponding power class 1 4 in the reference range see Limit Check 1 4 on page 176 Adding or Removing a Power Class Adds a new power class at the end ofthe list or removes the last power class After adding or removing the last power class is adapted to end at INF Remote command CALCulate LIMit ESPectrum PCLass lt class gt EXCLusive on page 691 MSR Settings In the MSR Settings tab of the Spectrum Emission Mask dialog box you configure multi standard radio MSR measurements which allow you to perform SEM tests on multiple carriers using different digital standards For details see chapter 5 5 4 4 Multi Standard Radio MSR SEM Measurements on page 172 E a TN User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 180
102. the reference level see Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level on page 357 The adjustment is carried out only once If necessary the instrument settings can be changed later Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESet on page 642 Search Limits Left Right If activated limit lines are defined and displayed for the search Only results within the limited search range are considered For details on limit lines for searches see Peak search limits on page 439 Remote command CALCulate MARKer X SLIMits STATe on page 862 CALCulate MARKer X SLIMits LEFT on page 863 CALCulate MARKer X SLIMits RIGHT on page 863 Deactivating All Search Limits Deactivates the search range limits Remote command CALCulate MARKer X SLIMits STATe on page 862 CALCulate THReshold STATe on page 864 D User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 162 R amp S FSW Measurements Occupied Bandwidth Measurement OBW 5 4 4 How to Determine the Occupied Bandwidth How to determine the OBW for a single signal 1 Select the OBW measurement function from the Select Measurement dialog box 2 Select the OBW Config softkey to display the Occupied Bandwidth configuration dialog box 3 Define the percentage of power Power Bandwidth that defines the bandwidth to be determined 4 If necessary change the channel bandwidth for the transmission channel 5 To optimize the settings for the selected
103. to be used for the measurement By default the R amp S FSW uses a filter with a 3 db bandwidth EMI measurements usually require a filter with a 6 dB bandwidth Define the dwell time for which each marker position is measured during the final measurement To obtain an overview of peak values in the input signal during the initial measure ment activate the Auto Peak Search As soon as a sweep is started the R amp S FSW looks for the strongest peaks in the frequency range you are measuring and positions one of the active markers on those peaks The number of active markers determines the number of detected peaks no additional markers are activated Define the type of scaling for the frequency axis according to the definition of the limit lines in the standard Optionally select the LISN Config softkey to configure a LISN control Configure the EMI measurement markers a Select the Marker Config softkey and activate the number of markers or delta markers you want to analyze b For each active marker select a detector to be used for the Final Test i e the subsequent EMI measurement at the marker position c If you already know which frequencies cause irregular values set the markers to those positions Otherwise perform an initial peak search to obtain an overview see step step 7 Optionally select the Marker Demod Config softkey to configure continuous marker demodulation Demodulation begins immediately wi
104. to calculate the power is defined by the sweep time The time per trace pixel for power measurements is directly proportional to the selected sweep time If the sample detector is used it is best to select the smallest sweep time possible for a given span and resolution bandwidth The minimum time is obtained if the setting is cou pled This means that the time per measurement is minimal Extending the measurement time does not have any advantages as the number of samples for calculating the power is defined by the number of trace points in the channel If the RMS detector is used the repeatability of the measurement results can be influ enced by the selection of sweep times Repeatability is increased at longer sweep times If the RMS detector is used the number of samples can be estimated as follows Since only uncorrelated samples contribute to the RMS value the number of samples can be calculated from the sweep time and the resolution bandwidth Samples can be assumed to be uncorrelated if sampling is performed at intervals of 1 RBW The number of uncorrelated samples is calculated as follows Ndecorr SWT RBW Ngecorr Means uncorrelated samples The number of uncorrelated samples per trace pixel is obtained by dividing Ngecorr by 1001 pixels per trace The Sweep Time can be defined using the softkey in the Ch Power menu or in the Sweep configuration dialog box see Sweep Time on page 126 SS ST User Manual
105. trace detectors see Detector on page 419 e RMS e Average e Sample e Positive Peak Remote command SENSe POWer NCORrection on page 776 Fast ACLR If activated instead of using the IBW method the R amp S FSW sets the center frequency to the different channel center frequencies consecutively and measures the power with the selected measurement time sweep time number of channels Remote command SENSe POWer HSPeed on page 656 Selected Trace The CP ACLR measurement can be performed on any active trace Remote command SENSe POWer TRACe on page 642 Absolute and Relative Values ACLR Mode The powers of the adjacent channels are output in dBm or dBm Hz absolute values or in dBc relative to the specified reference Tx channel Abs The absolute power in the adjacent channels is displayed in the unit of the y axis e g in dBm dByV Rel The level of the adjacent channels is displayed relative to the level of the transmission channel in dBc Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel MODE on page 665 ______L_LL___ Se SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSaanhnBnBnDhBnBnBnnnnRnRmaRanRanRa92aaESSSSSSSS User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 124 R amp S FSW Measurements a SS SS a a a Channel Power and Adjacent Channel Power ACLR Measurement Channel Power Levels and Density Power Unit By default the channel power is displayed in absolute values If Hz is activated the channel power
106. user defined SEM measurement on page 185 e To perform an MSR SEM measurement on page 187 To select an SEM measurement gt Press the MEAS key then select the Spectrum Emission Mask measurement To perform an SEM measurement according to a standard gt Load the settings file as described in How to load an SEM settings file on page 187 and start a measurement To configure a user defined SEM measurement 1 Define the span of the signal to be monitored in the general span settings 2 Split the frequency span of the measurement into ranges for signal parts with similar characteristics Starting from the center frequency determine which sections of the signal to the left and right can be swept and monitored using the same parameters Criteria for such a range definition may be for example The signal power level The required resolution bandwidth or sweep time Transducer factors Permitted deviation from the defined signal level i e the required limit values for monitoring If the signal consists of a transmission channel and adjacent channels the channel ranges can usually be used for the range definition E a a User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 185 R amp S FSW Measurements 10 11 12 Spectrum Emission Mask SEM Measurement If the signal power level to be monitored may vary and the limits will vary accordingly define power classes For each range of levels that can be monitored in the same way def
107. you only need to define the bandwidth for the first channel the others are adapted automatically e f necessary a weighting filter e Optionally define and activate relative or absolute limits or both against which the power levels of the channel are to be checked SS SST User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 145 R amp S FSW Measurements 5 2 6 4 Channel Power and Adjacent Channel Power ACLR Measurement 8 Define the settings for the two upper or lower gap CACLR channels since the upper and lower channels are identical it is only necessary to configure two channels e The spacing defined as the distance from the outer edge of the subblock to the left or right of the gap The required spacing can be determined as follows Spacing CF of the gap channel left subblock center RF bandwidth of left subblock 2 e The bandwidth e f necessary a weighting filter e Optionally define and activate relative or absolute limits or both against which the power levels of the channel are to be checked 9 If power limits are defined and activated activate global limit checking for the mea surement on the Adj Gap Channel Settings tab 10 Optionally store the settings for the MSR ACLR measurement as a user defined standard as described in To store a user defined configuration on page 146 Oth erwise the configuration will be lost when you select a different measurement stand ard How to Manage User Defined Co
108. 1 are included in all four LISN Phase L2 and L3 are only included in four line networks You can select one phase only for each measurement Remote command INPut LISN PHASe on page 739 150 kHz Highpass Filter Enables or disables the use of an additional 150 kHz highpass filter to protect the R amp S FSW LISN from excessive input User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 266 R amp S FSW Measurements 5 13 5 5 13 6 Electromagnetic Interference EMI Measurement R amp S FSW K54 The filter is available for the ENV 216 network only Remote command INPut LISN FILTer HPASs STATe on page 740 EMI Result Analysis The R amp S FSW EMI measurement provides functionality to analyze the results Marker Demodulation The R amp S FSW is able to demodulate AM and FM signals for acoustic tests and monitoring purposes When the demodulator function is active the R amp S FSW EMI measurement demodulates the signal continuously regardless of the Continuous Demodulation set ting in the marker function configuration The demodulation begins as soon as a marker is activated During the initial measurement demodulation is performed for the entire measurement span during the final measurement only the detected peak marker posi tions are demodulated for the defined dwell time You can listen to the results during the measurement with headphones or with the internal speaker For more information see Marker Demodulation on page 467
109. 1173 9411 02 13 113 R amp SEFSW Measurements iii a ae a a a a a Channel Power and Adjacent Channel Power ACLR Measurement Frequency Span The frequency span must cover at least the channels to be measured plus a measure ment margin of approximately 10 If the frequency span is large in comparison to the channel bandwidth or the adjacent channel bandwidths being analyzed only a few points on the trace are available per channel This reduces the accuracy of the waveform calculation for the channel filter used which has a negative effect on the measurement accuracy It is therefore strongly recommended that the formulas mentioned be taken into consideration when selecting the frequency span The frequency span for the defined channel settings can be optimized using the Adjust Settings function in the Ch Power menu or the General Settings tab of the ACLR Setup dialog box see Optimized Settings Adjust Settings on page 125 You can set the frequency span manually in the Frequency configuration dialog box see chap ter 6 3 3 How To Define the Frequency Range on page 351 For channel power measurements the Adjust Settings function sets the frequency span as follows No of transmission channels 1 x transmission channel spacing 2 x transmission channel bandwidth measurement margin For adjacent channel power measurements the Adjust Settings function sets the fre quency span as a function o
110. 2 Ana lyzing Several Traces Trace Mode on page 408 Bandwidth Filter and Sweep Settings To configure the bandwidth filter and sweep Bandwidth and filter settings can be configured via the Bandwidth tab of the Band width dialog box Sweep settings can be configured in the Sweep dialog box or via the Sweep tab of the Bandwidth dialog box 1 To display the Bandwidth dialog box do one of the following e Select Bandwidth from the Overview e Select the BW key and then the Bandwidth Config softkey e Select the SWEEP key and then the Sweep Config softkey 2 To display the Sweep dialog box do one of the following e Select Bandwidth from the Overview and switch to the Sweep tab in the Bandwidth dialog box e Select the SWEEP key and then the Sweep Config softkey The remote commands required to define these settings are described in chapter 11 7 2 Configuring Bandwidth and Sweep Settings on page 767 How to perform a basic sweep measurement is described in chapter 5 12 1 How to Perform a Basic Sweep Measurement on page 245 E a N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 367 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings Bandwidth Filter and Sweep Configuration Bandwidth Sweep Sweep Time 37 8 ms D Filter Type BV wW 1 0 Coupling Default Fig 6 22 Bandwidth dialog box Sweep Time Swee r Sweep Points a er Optimization Select Frame
111. 5 3 4 Howto Determine the Carrier to Noise Ratio 1 Press the C N C NO softkey to configure the carrier to noise ratio measurement 2 To change the channel bandwidth to be analyzed press the Channel Bandwidth softkey 3 To optimize the settings for the selected channel configuration press the Adjust Settings softkey 4 To activate the measurements without reference to the bandwidth press the C N softkey To activate the measurements with reference to the bandwidth press the C NO softkey 5 If the carrier signal is located within the analyzed channel bandwidth switch off the carrier signal so that only the noise is displayed in the channel and perform a second measurement The carrier to noise ratio is displayed after the measurement has been completed 5 4 Occupied Bandwidth Measurement OBW An important characteristic of a modulated signal is its occupied bandwidth In a radio communications system for instance the occupied bandwidth must be limited to enable distortion free transmission in adjacent channels e About the Measurement ccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeecesaeeaeeeeceeeeeeeeeeacdeeqeeaenaeaeeeeeeees 158 OBW PROGRES oroin a aa sanndeea Ea aa a aaa KAE Eaa ea aaa KEE aE 160 e OBW CONNGUUANOM renia i aa N 161 e How to Determine the Occupied Bandwidth ccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeees 163 e Measurement Example ccccccccccccceecceeeeeeeeee ects ee caa
112. 52 R amp S FSW Measurements SS SS SS ee Electromagnetic Interference EMI Measurement R amp S FSW K54 Positive and negative peak detector The maximum and minimum peak detectors display the maximum and minimum signal level that was detected during the specified dwell time The minimum and maximum peak detectors are already available with the base unit Consider the following when defining the dwell time e Unmodulated signals minimum time required by the detector e Pulsed signals the time must be long enough to capture at least one complete pulse Average detector The average detector displays the average signal level of the samples that were collected during the specified dwell time The average detector is already available with the base unit Consider the following when defining the dwell time e Unmodulated signals minimum time required by the detector e Pulsed signals the time must be long enough to capture several complete pulses at least 10 e The time is determined by the lowest modulation frequency to be averaged RMS detector The RMS detector displays the root mean square RMS value over the specified dwell time The integration time is the specified dwell time The RMS detector is already available with the base unit The same considerations apply to the dwell time as for the average detector Sample detector The sample detector displays the last value from the samples allocated to a pixel The
113. 7 File Name Contain the name of the data file without the path or extension By default the name of a settings file consists of a base name followed by an underscore Multiple files with the same base name are extended by three numbers e g limit lines 005 For details on the file name and location see chapter 8 2 2 2 Storage Location and File Name on page 494 Load Standard Loads the selected measurement settings file Save Standard Saves the current measurement settings for a specific standard as a file with the defined name Delete Standard Deletes the selected standard Standards predefined by Rohde amp Schwarz can also be deleted A confirmation query is displayed to avoid unintentional deletion of the standard Note Restoring predefined standard files The standards predefined by Rohde amp Schwarz available at the time of delivery can be restored using the Restore Stand ards softkey See Restore Standard Files on page 183 Restore Standard Files Restores the standards predefined by Rohde amp Schwarz available at the time of delivery The XML files from the C R_S instr sem_backup folder are copied to the C R_S instr sem_std folder Note that this function will overwrite customized standards that have the same name as predefined standards Remote command SENSe ESPectrum PRESet RESTore on page 674 Restore Standard Files Restores the standards predefined by Rohde
114. 8 Normalized measurement results after calibration Measuring the effects of the DUT After calibration we can insert the band elimination filter our DUT in the measurement setup 1 Connect the signal generator output to the band elimination filter 2 Connect the band elimination filter output to the RF INPUT connector on the front panel of the R amp S FSW E User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 314 R amp S FSW MultiView 2 Spectrum Ref Level 0 00 Att 100 0 MHz Common Measurement Settings Vata input ana Output RBW 2 MHz 3ms VBW 2MHz Mode Auto Sweep 1001 pts 20 0 MHz 300 0 MHz Fig 6 9 Band elimination filter results 3 Shift the reference line from the top of the diagram to the middle of the diagram by changing the position of the reference point 0 0 dB to 50 In the Source Calibration tab enter Position 50 At the same time the range of the displayed y axis moves from 100 0 dB to 0 dB to 50 dB to 50 dB MultiView 88 Spectrum 100 0 MHz RBW 2 Mhz VBW 2 MHz 1001 pts 300 0 MHz 20 0 MHZ Fig 6 10 Reference line shifted to middle of diagram 50 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 315 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output Compensating the effects of additional attenuation after calibration After calibration an additional attenuator is inserted between the DUT and the R amp S FSW This may be necessary for example to protect the analyz
115. 94 dBm 82 48 dB 19 44 dB 2 10725 GHz 40 01 dBm 70 55 dB 20 51 dB 2 10911 GHz 40 28 dBm 70 82 dB 16 78 dB N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 128 R amp S FSW Measurements 5 2 5 Channel Power and Adjacent Channel Power ACLR Measurement The results of the power limit checks are also indicated in the STAT QUES ACPL status registry see STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit Register on page 578 Remote command CALCulate LIMit ACPower STATe on page 655 CALCulate LIMit ACPower ACHannel ABSolute STATe on page 652 CALCulate LIMit ACPower ACHannel ABSolute on page 651 CALCulate LIMit ACPower ACHannel RELative STATe on page 653 CALCulate LIMit ACPower ACHannel RELative on page 652 CALCulate LIMit ACPower ALTernate lt ch gt ABSolute STATe on page 653 CALCulate LIMit ACPower ALTernate lt ch gt ABSolute on page 653 CALCulate LIMit ACPower ALTernate lt ch gt RELative STATe on page 654 CALCulate LIMit ACPower ALTernate lt ch gt RELative on page 654 CALCulate LIMit ACPower ACHannel RESu1t on page 652 Weighting Filters Weighting filters allow you to determine the influence of individual channels on the total measurement result For each channel you can activate or deactivate the use of the weighting filter and define an individual weighting factor Alpha value Weighting filters are not available for all supported standards and cannot
116. 99982000 000000 Hz x Axis LIN Start 9000 000000 Hz Stop 8000000000 000000 Hz Level Offset 0 000000 dB Y axis settings Ref Position 100 000000 y Axis LOG Level Range 100 000000 dB Trace settings Trace Mode CLR WRITE Sweep Count 1 TRACE 1 Trace Mode CLR WRITE x Unit Hz y Unit dBm List evaluation settings Margin 6 000000 s Peak List margin PeaksPerRange 25 Max number of peaks per range to be detected Values 3 Number of detected peaks User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 207 R amp S FSW Measurements Statistical Measurements APD CCDF File contents Explanation File data section 0 9000 150000 1000 79500 25 006643295288086 Measured peak values 12 006643295288086 PASS 0 9000 150000 1000 101022 11126961483 47 075 111389160156 34 075111389160156 PASS 0 9000 150000 1000 58380 171184022824 47 079 341888427734 34 079341888427734 PASS lt resolution bandwidth of range gt lt frequency of peak gt lt range number gt lt start frequency gt lt stop frequency gt lt absolute power in dBm of peak gt lt distance to the limit line in dB gt positive value means above the limit lt limit fail pass 0 fail 1 gt 5 7 Statistical Measurements APD CCDF To measure the amplitude distribution the R amp S FSW has simple measurement functions to determine both the Amplitude P
117. A fixed impedance of 50 Q is used for all probes to convert voltage values to power levels Input from Noise Sources The R amp S FSW provides a connector NOISE SOURCE CONTROL with a voltage supply for an external noise source By switching the supply voltage for an external noise source on or off in the firmware you can activate or deactive the device as required External noise sources are useful when you are measuring power levels that fall below the noise floor of the R amp S FSW itself for example when measuring the noise level of an amplifier In this case you can first connect an external noise source whose noise power level is known in advance to the R amp S FSW and measure the total noise power From this value you can determine the noise power of the R amp S FSW Then when you measure the power level of the actual DUT you can deduct the known noise level from the total power to obtain the power level of the DUT The noise source is controlled in the Output settings see Noise Source on page 343 Receiving and Providing Trigger Signals Using one of the variable TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors of the R amp S FSW the R amp S FSW can use a signal from an external reference as a trigger to capture data Alter natively the internal trigger signal used by the R amp S FSW can be output for use by other connected devices Using the same trigger on several devices is useful to synchronize the transmitted and received signals wit
118. ANGe lt range gt DELete on page 677 Symmetric Setup Any changes to the range settings in active Symmetric Setup mode lead to symmetrical changes in the other ranges where possible In particular this means TE LL a M User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 177 R amp S FSW Measurements 5 5 5 2 Spectrum Emission Mask SEM Measurement e Inserting ranges a symmetrical range is inserted on the other side of the reference range e Deleting ranges the symmetrical range on the other side of the reference range is also deleted e Editing range settings the settings in the symmetrical range are adapted accordingly Note If Fast SEM mode is deactivated while Symmetric Setup mode is on Sym Setup mode is automatically also deactivated If Fast SEM mode is activated while Symmetric Setup mode is on not all range set tings can be set automatically Reference Range The range centered around the center frequency is defined as the reference range for all other ranges in the sweep list In the Reference Range tab of the Spectrum Emission Mask dialog box you define the general settings for the reference range Sweep List Reference Range Power Classes Standard Files Power Reference Type chan Power Channel Power Settings TxBandwidth 3 84 MHz RRC FilterState Off On Alpha Power Reference TY OG i cccccccveetcsccccccsdaessnthcceccuseattlacececavensadssneccctunvisscnaceeuu
119. ATANAN TAERE EAEAN 203 insert beloreialler Ranga oiinadi AAEE EAN EA AA 203 Delete Range seis hinds etiede EE E EAE NTA EEE EEEE E E 203 Range Start Range Stop Sets the start frequency stop frequency of the selected range If you set a span that is smaller than the overall span of the ranges the measurement includes only the ranges that lie within the defined span and have a minimum span of 20 Hz Remote command SENSe LIST RANGe lt range gt FREQuency STARt on page 703 SENSe LIST RANGe lt range gt FREQuency STOP on page 703 Filter Type Sets the filter type for this range For details on filter types see chapter 6 5 1 6 Which Data May Pass Filter Types on page 365 Remote command SENSe LIST RANGe lt range gt FILTer TYPE on page 702 RBW Sets the RBW value for this range For details on the RBW see chapter 6 5 1 1 Separating Signals by Selecting an Appro priate Resolution Bandwidth on page 362 Remote command SENSe LIST RANGe lt range gt BANDwidth RESolution on page 700 VBW Sets the VBW value for this range For details on the VBW see chapter 6 5 1 2 Smoothing the Trace Using the Video Bandwidth on page 363 Remote command SENSe LIST RANGe lt range gt BANDwidth VIDeo on page 701 Sweep Time Mode Activates or deactivates the auto mode for the sweep time For details on the sweep time mode see chapter 6 5 1 7 How Long the Data is M
120. ATe on page 799 RF Start RF Stop Displays the start and stop frequency of the selected band read only The frequency range for the user defined band is defined via the harmonics configuration see Range 1 2 on page 329 For details on available frequency ranges see table 11 3 Remote command SENSe MIXer FREQuency STARt on page 801 SENSe MIXer FREQuency STOP on page 802 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 327 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings EE EeEE _ __ _ gt EEEE gt _ h_____a__ _E_E EES ss Ty Data Input and Output Handover Freq Defines the frequency at which the mixer switches from one range to the next if two different ranges are selected The handover frequency can be selected freely within the overlapping frequency range Remote command SENSe MIXer FREQuency HANDover on page 801 Band Defines the waveguide band or user defined band to be used by the mixer The start and stop frequencies of the selected band are displayed in the RF Start and RF Stop fields For a definition of the frequency range for the pre defined bands see table 11 3 The mixer settings for the user defined band can be selected freely The frequency range for the user defined band is defined via the harmonics configuration see Range 1 2 on page 329 Remote command SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND VALue on page 802 RF Overrange If en
121. Att 10 dB SWT 640 ps TRG IFP 1 Time Domain Power CF 1 8 GHz 2 Marker Table Type Ref Tre Stimulus M1 591 6 ps 100 pts Function Result 11 02 dBm 12 89 dBm 13 03 dBm 1 62 dB Response 102 34 dBm Harmonic Distortion Measurement The harmonics and their distortion can be measured using the Harmonic Distortion function e About INE MEASULEINGIE sinicciicciacsddtddccssciiiccaiasaad dedassablvcacinavaieiacasaaidsdeciaatiadeauaas 227 Harmonic Distortion BASICS viccisccciciscisdiccascedasdccaseadsuecsesvesstaraccsvsacsasieossvandeaesveraacn 228 Harmonie Distortion ROSUNS isses isiin dud sqanidecas sansa caedsasadscnsacncaseesade 230 e Harmonic Distortion Configuration cceccccccceseeceeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeetseseaeeeeeeetsenaaaeees 231 e Howto Determine the Harmonic Distortion cccccscecceceesseceeeceeseeeeeetenseeeeeees 232 About the Measurement With this measurement it is possible to measure the harmonics easily for example from a VCO In addition the total harmonic distortion THD is calculated For measurements in the frequency domain the Harmonic Distortion measurement starts with an automatic search for the first harmonic peak within the set frequency range The center frequency is set to this frequency and the reference level is adjusted accord ingly For measurements in zero span the center frequency remains unchanged The Harmonic Distortion measurement then performs zero sp
122. C N C No Measures the carrier noise ratio and opens a submenu to configure the measurement Measurements without C N and measurements with reference to the bandwidth C No are possible Carrier noise measurement is only possible in the frequency domain span gt 0 For details see chapter 5 3 Carrier to Noise Measurements on page 154 Remote command CALC MARK FUNC POW SEL CN CNOCALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer SELect on page 641 Results CALC MARK FUNC POW RES CN CNO see CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion POWer RESult on page 639 chapter 11 5 4 Measuring the Carrier to Noise Ratio on page 670 OBW Measures the occupied bandwidth i e the bandwidth which must contain a defined per centage of the power and opens a submenu to configure the measurement For details see chapter 5 4 Occupied Bandwidth Measurement OBW on page 158 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 103 R amp S FSW Measurements se SS Sa eS Available Measurement Functions OBW measurement is only possible in the frequency domain span gt 0 Remote command CALC MARK FUNC POW SEL OBWCALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer SELect on page 641 Results CALC MARK FUNC POW RES OBW see CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion POWer RESult on page 639 chapter 11 5 5 Measuring the Occupied Bandwidth on page 671 Spectrum Emission Mask Activates a Spectrum Emission Mask SEM measure
123. CDMA2000 Bandwidth Offset Power z 0 86 dBm 0 86 dBm Upper 79 59 dB 80 34 dB 85 04 dB 83 85 dB Results are provided for the TX channel and the number of defined adjacent channels above and below the TX channel If more than one TX channel is defined the carrier channel to which the relative adjacent channel power values should be referenced must be defined By default this is the TX channel with the maximum power Table 5 1 Measurements performed depending on the number of adjacent channels 0 Only the channel powers are measured 1 The channel powers and the power of the upper and lower adjacent channel are measured 2 The channel powers the power of the upper and lower adjacent channel and of the next higher and lower channel alternate channel 1 are measured 3 The channel power the power of the upper and lower adjacent channel the power of the next higher and lower channel alternate channel 1 and of the next but one higher and lower adjacent channel alternate channel 2 are measured 12 The channel power the power of the upper and lower adjacent channel and the power of all the higher and lower channels alternate channels 1 to 11 are measured In the R amp S FSW s display only the first neighboring channel of the carrier TX channel is labelled Adj adjacent channel all others are labelled Alt alternate channels In this manual adjacent refers to both adjacent and alterna
124. Continue Frame Frame Count 1 Spectrogram Clear Fig 6 23 Sweep dialog box for spectrogram display User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 368 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings Bandwidth Filter and Sweep Configuration Sweep Average COunt cccccccecceeeececeeeeeeeeeceeaeeeeecaeeseceeeeeseaaeeeseceesdeeeeeeseaeeeseneeeees 371 SWEEP POI S 2 523 feucaussaadaana nana aseadadadasneaadscagcansbasnaaueda wasaaa saudanasaad e a a aN 372 COPUNUIZAUOR esis cess tees aasieteiecas a AEE aged dea fumes vavaetacce AEEA aired aeenetesiedeceraieaas 372 DWE TYPO fs srccccatccesadanseaaszans a a E a ai a aaa Aaaa iaa 372 single sweep RUN SINGLE ansins hania AAEE ANAN N 373 Continuaus SweeWNRUN CONT roncar A A aE E aes aa 373 Continue Single SWE sekre aaa ATEREA TE OR 373 Spectrogram VANES 5 0 cccc esencceteavtvinecectasevesadasccnganevpedatcegaeee eeeusncceaiaeasantcccaaeseetdaceed 374 L Select TAIN faces viaticicisnssildid inn nsisietacinvaatdensteutaadulsnsedaindansnasachaulgulatenududuasesttwad wait 374 L Continue Face sess csacvvicnaca van sist stoetuida nana cha banana onietnataaatontdeiaads 374 L Frame COW fa sesiccicasies esceannsigvantinanonrnsinaninsis vusiousbnsadicheinastndailacatedinlviuaansssincdis 374 L Reais CORI acs sats decease sneha sntduastn ssanbtatasebsbbdaanousdnaas ooseasaonsseine 374 RBW Defines the resolution bandwidth The available resolution bandwidths are specified in the data sheet Numeric input is alw
125. Eep EGATe TRACe lt k gt STATe lt range gt on page 715 Edit Gate Ranges Opens a dialog box to configure up to 3 gate ranges for each trace For details see chapter 5 7 5 2 Gate Range Definition for APD and CCDF on page 215 Adjust Settings Adjusts the level settings according to the measured difference between peak and min imum power for APD measurement or peak and mean power for CCDF measurement in order to obtain maximum power resolution Adjusts the reference level to the current input signal Remote command CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe AUTO ONCE on page 716 Gate Range Definition for APD and CCDF Gate ranges for gated triggering in statistical measurements can be configured in the Gate Ranges dialog box which is displayed when you select the Edit Gate Ranges button in the APD or CCDF configuration dialog boxes For background information on defining gate ranges see chapter 5 7 4 APD and CCDF Basics Gated Triggering on page 212 The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in chapter 11 5 8 3 Using Gate Ranges for Statistical Measurements on page 713 eee User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 215 R amp S FSW Measurements b_n a nu a A Statistical Measurements APD CCDF Range 1 Use Range 1 Start Range 1 Stop Range 2 Use Range 2 Start Range 2 Stop Range 3 Use Range 3 Start Range 3 Stop Up to three ranges can be defined for each
126. External Generator Control The following step by step instructions demonstrate how to work with External Generator Control R amp S FSW B10 option e How to Calibrate a Measurement Setup using an External Generator 310 e Howto Remove the Effects of a Particular Component from Measurement Results Using Calbraton cicien eater vanced sieeve Ta 311 e How to Compensate for Additional Gain or Attenuation after Calibration 312 How to Calibrate a Measurement Setup using an External Generator 1 Connect the signal generator s GPIB interface connector to the EXT GEN CONTROL GPIB connector on the rear panel of the R amp S FSW 2 Connect the signal generator output to the RF INPUT connector on the front panel of the R amp S FSW 3 Ifthe signal generator supports TTL synchronization connect the signal generator to the FSW B10 AUX CONTROL port 4 Ifthe measurement setup does not require the full span of the R amp S FSW change the Frequency Start and Frequency Stop values FREQ key gt Frequency Config softkey 5 Press the INPUT OUTPUT key and select External Generator Config 6 Inthe Interface Configuration subtab select the Generator Type connected to the R amp S FSW If the required generator type is not available proceed as follows a Select a generator type that has similar characteristics frequency and power ranges b Select Edit Generator Setup File The configuration file for
127. FSW K54 option For more information see chapter 6 5 1 6 Which Data May Pass Filter Types on page 365 Note The EMI specific filter types are available if the EMI R amp S FSW K54 measurement option is installed even if EMI measurement is not active For details see chap ter 5 13 3 1 Resolution Bandwidth and Filter Types on page 252 The RBW filter configured in the bandwidth settings is identical to the filter configured in the EMI configuration Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution TYPE on page 769 Default Coupling Sets all coupled functions to the default state AUTO In addition the ratio RBW VBW is set to SINE 1 1 and the ratio SPAN RBW to 100 For more information see chapter 6 5 1 3 Coupling VBW and RBW on page 364 Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution AUTO on page 768 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo AUTO on page 769 SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO on page 773 Sweep Average Count Defines the number of sweeps to be performed in the single sweep mode Values from 0 to 200000 are allowed If the values 0 or 1 are set one sweep is performed The sweep count is applied to all the traces in all diagrams If the trace configurations Average Max Hold or Min Hold are set this value also determines the number of averaging or maximum search procedures In continuous sweep mode if sweep count 0 default averaging is performed ove
128. G IFP 1 Time Domain Power CF 1 8 GHz 100 pts 2 Marker Table Type Ref Tre Stimulus Response i Function Result M1 591 6 ps 102 34 dBm T 11 02 dBm 12 89 dBm 13 03 dBm 1 62 dB D User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 223 R amp S FSW Measurements Time Domain Power Measurement The results can also be queried using the remote commands described in chapter 11 5 9 Measuring the Time Domain Power on page 721 5 8 3 Time Domain Power Basics Range Definition Using Limit Lines The range of the measured signal to be evaluated for the power measurement can be restricted using limit lines The left and right limit lines S1 S2 define the evaluation range and are indicated by vertical red lines in the diagram If activated the power results are only calculated from the levels within the limit lines For example if both the on and off phase of a burst signal are displayed the measurement range can be limited to the transmission or to the muting phase The ratio between signal and noise power of a TDMA signal for instance can be measured by using a measurement as a reference value and then varying the measurement range In order to get stable measurement results for a limited evaluation range usually a trigger is required 5 8 4 Time Domain Power Configuration Time Domain Power measurements are selected via the Time Domain Power button in the Select Measurement dialog box The measurement is started immediately with the de
129. INPUT In both cases the nominal LO level is 15 5 dBm Bias Current Single diode mixers generally require a DC voltage which is applied via the LO line This DC voltage is to be tuned to the minimum conversion loss versus frequency Such a DC voltage can be set via the BIAS function using the D A converter of the R amp S FSW The value to be entered is not the voltage but the short circuit current The current is defined in the Bias Settings or set to the value of the conversion loss table see Bias Set tings on page 331 and Bias on page 335 U 2 0 2 0 V serial data Uas 0 5 0 5 V to LO OUT IF IN Fig 6 14 Bias circuit of the R amp S FSW The voltage U at the output of the operational amplifier can be set in the range 2 0 to 2 0 V An open circuit voltage V pias of 0 5 to 0 5 V is obtained accordingly at the output of the voltage divider A short circuit current of lshort Vo 200 Q 10 mA to 10 mA is obtained for a short circuit at the output of the voltage divider In order to use biasing it E a N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 320 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings SEES SSSSSSSSSSSSSSS S SS SS SS S S S S _ S _S S _ S _ S S S S S _ S _ _ S S S Sgg amp g amp g ES Ss Data Input and Output is not important to know the exact current flowing through the diode since the conversion loss must be set to a minimum with the frequency Th
130. IP address is not correct or the generator is not ready for operation an error message is displayed Ext Generator GPIB Handshake Error or Ext Generator TCPIP Handshake Error see Displayed Infor mation and Errors on page 301 Overview of Generators Supported by the R amp S FSW B10 Option The R amp S SMA and R amp S SMU require the following firmware versions R amp S SMA V2 10 x or higher R amp S SMU V1 10 or higher Generator type TTL support Generator type TTL support SMA01A X SMR40 X SMBV100A3 X SMR40B11 1 X 1 Requires the option SMR B11 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 294 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output Generator type TTL support Generator type TTL support SMBV100A6 X SMR50 X SMC100A1 X SMR50B11 X SMC100A3 X SMR60 X SME02 X SMR60B11 1 X SME03 X SMP02 X SME06 X SMP03 X SMG SMP04 X SMGL SMP22 xX SMGU SMT02 SMH SMT03 SMHU SMT06 SMIQ02B X SMV03 SMIQ02E SMU02B31 X SMIQ03B X SMU03 X SMIQO3E SMU03B31 X SMIQ04B X SMU04 X SMIQ06B X SMU04B31 X SML01 SMU06 X SML02 SMU06B31 X SML03 SMX SMR20 X SMY01 SMR20B11 X SMY02 SMR27 X HP8340A SMR27B11 X HP8648 SMR30 X HP ESG A Series 1000A 2000A 3000A 4000A SMR30B11 X HP ESG D SERIES E4432B 1 Requires the option SMR B11 Generator Setup Files For each sign
131. Manual 1173 9411 02 13 101 R amp S FSW Measurements E Available Measurement Functions When you select a measurement function the measurement is started with its default settings immediately and the corresponding measurement configuration menu is dis played The measurement configuration menu can be displayed at any time by pressing the MEAS CONFIG key The easiest way to configure measurements is using the configuration Overview see chapter 6 1 Configuration Overview on page 273 In addition to the measurement specific parameters the general parameters can be con figured as usual see chapter 6 Common Measurement Settings on page 273 Many measurement functions provide special result displays or evaluation methods however in most cases the general evaluation methods are also available see chapter 7 Com mon Analysis and Display Functions on page 397 After a preset the R amp S FSW performs a basic frequency sweep Fregueney SWCD i cecvcssacdieccsessdadirdedeasaenccedueutanandusilesbeanndaaedvessaadeaceeiaraaadncdetubaaanduadeans 102 Zoo SGA ci deria aan sek Se ces case cau a te aae a a a een aed a te ede ee ed 102 Ch Power AGUR sireenin aiia cennacd cabs ad avedeeess agua dese vase devdenssuecdedduabeuesdedenas 103 CIN CINO ded dvccsteananchecanssaauudelawsitaedactuadansvdesuiesadaulecunaatsducetuenaadeatennaaddausenbbaadacaearvanncatieltes 103 OBW aiina un cath a a a ieee ceva ide dence pediae as doers 103 Spec
132. Measurements 5 5 4 5 5 4 1 Spectrum Emission Mask SEM Measurement Retrieving Results via Remote Control The measurement results of the spectrum emission mask test can be retrieved using the CALC LIM FAIL command from a remote computer see CALCulate LIMit lt k gt FAIL on page 905 for a detailed description The power result for the reference range can be queried using CALC MARK FUNC POW RES CPOW the peak power for the reference range using CALC MARK FUNC POW RES PPOW see CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion POWer RESult on page 639 4 he measured power trace can be queried using TRAC DATA and TRAC DATA X see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 853 and TRACe lt n gt DATA X on page 854 The measured peak power list can be queried using TRAC DATA LISTTRACe lt n gt DATA on page 853 SEM Basics Some background knowledge on basic terms and principles used in SEM measurements is provided here for a better understanding of the required configuration settings Ranges anid Range Settings c spend heeveisiosicanecehodedasias aheeced vee seiiecraaee aetdeedeaes 167 e Limit Lines in SEM Measurements ccccccccceeceesceececeeeseeeeeceseeeaeeeesenensseeeeeees 169 Fast SEM Measurements cccccccsssccccecessseeeeececsesecececeeuseceeeceengeseeeeseneaseeeeeetes 171 e Multi Standard Radio MSR SEM Measurements cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeees 172 Ranges and Range
133. NPUT OUTPUT connector on the rear panel Trigger 1 is INPUT only Note Providing trigger signals as output is described in detail in the R amp S FSW User Manual Input The signal at the connector is used as an external trigger source by the R amp S FSW No further trigger parameters are available for the connec tor Output The R amp S FSW sends a trigger signal to the output connector to be used by connected devices Further trigger parameters are available for the connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 790 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt DIRection on page 789 Output Type lt Trigger 2 3 Type of signal to be sent to the output Device Trig Default Sends a trigger when the R amp S FSW triggers gered Trigger Sends a high level trigger when the R amp S FSW is in Ready for trig Armed ger state This state is indicated by a status bit in the STATus OPERation reg ister bit 5 as well as by a low level signal at the AUX port pin 9 For details see STATus OPERation Register on page 575 and the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual _L_L_L_ L LLL_ EE SSS User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 343 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings 6 3 6 3 1 Frequency and Span Configuration User Defined Sends a trigger when user selects Send Trigger button In this case further parameters are available for the output signal Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt O
134. Networks LISN For measurements on power lines the R amp S FSW EMI measurement adds functionality to control a line impedance stabilization network LISN directly Thus you can determine the interference caused by power supplies and cables You can connect the LISN to the user port of the R amp S FSW Control cables for the various LISNs are available as accessories The R amp S FSW then controls which phase of the LISN is to be tested and outputs the information to the user port The R amp S FSW EMI measurement supports several V networks For each type of network you can define the phase you want to test for interferences The R amp S FSW EMI mea surement allows you to test one phase at a time LLL a M User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 256 R amp S FSW Measurements 5 13 3 5 5 13 3 6 Electromagnetic Interference EMI Measurement R amp S FSW K54 Table 5 10 Supported networks and phases Network type Phases Two line V networks ESH3 Z5 N L1 ENV216 N L1 Four line V networks ESH2 Z5 N L1 L2 L3 ENV4200 N L1 L2 L3 For the ENV216 network a 150 kHz high pass filter is available to protect the input of the R amp S FSW Using Transducer Factors The R amp S FSW EMI measurement provides functionality to include transducer factors in the test setup Transducers are devices like antennas probes or current probes that are connected to the R amp S FSW to measure interferences o
135. Output File Name USERTABLE Comment fi User defined conversion loss table for USER band Band Settings Harmonic order Mixer S N Value 55 00000000000 GHz 20 00 dB 75 00000000000 GHz 30 00 dB MIKOF TYPO i isisnch iene hited tlc E 336 CSUR OPA NON scan E cautetnck dat peat dae aes tat E E E EE 336 nsen WANG ar iana aaa A a baled aa A a A A A A A ANA 336 Delete WANE enaa a E A A E a N AS 336 SME ea a a A a 336 SA tc E A EEE E TTE P EEE E S T EEE E avasie ad 336 SWE inosan a a a a A 336 File Name Defines the name under which the table is stored in the C r_s instr user cvl directory on the instrument The name of the table is identical with the name of the file without extension in which the table is stored This setting is mandatory The ACL extension is automatically appended during storage Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 809 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 334 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings EeE eE SSF E Data Input and Output Comment An optional comment that describes the conversion loss table The comment can be freely defined by the user Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL COMMent on page 807 Band The waveguide or user defined band for which the table is to be applied This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range For a definitio
136. R Average or Average RMS detector the bandwidth is fixed depending on the frequency For more information see chapter 5 13 3 2 Detectors and Dwell Time on page 252 Detectors and Dwell Time The R amp S FSW EMI measurement adds new detectors to those already available with the base unit The additional detectors are especially designed for and required by EMI applications The additional detectors are available only if the EMI R amp S FSW K54 measurement option is installed and the filter type CISPR or MIL is selected see chapter 5 13 3 1 Resolution Bandwidth and Filter Types on page 252 However the EMI measurement need not be active The detector to be used for the initial peak search is configured in the trace settings see chapter 7 3 2 1 Trace Settings on page 417 while the detector for the final test is configured in the EMI marker settings see chapter 5 13 4 1 EMI Marker Configura tion on page 260 Dwell time EMC tests often require a specific dwell time for an EMI measurement The dwell time defines how long the R amp S FSW measures the signal at the individual frequencies Each detector needs a different period of time to fully charge and discharge the individual requirements on the dwell time are described for each detector For details on defining the dwell time for an R amp S FSW EMI measurement see Defining a Dwell Time for the Final Measurement on page 259 U User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 2
137. R amp S FSW Measurements Available Measurement Functions 5 Measurements 5 1 In the Spectrum application the R amp S FSW provides a variety of different measurement functions e Basic measurements measure the spectrum of your signal or watch your signal in time domain e Power measurements calculate the powers involved in modulated carrier signals e Emission measurements detect unwanted signal emission e Statistic measurements evaluate the spectral distribution of the signal e Special measurements provide characteristic values of the signal e EMI measurements detect electromagnetic interference in the signal The individual functions are described in detail in the following chapters Measurements on I Q based data The I Q Analyzer application not Master in MSRA mode can also perform measure ments on the captured I Q data in the time and frequency domain The measurements are configured using the same settings as described here for the Spectrum application The results however may differ slightly as hardware settings are not adapted automat ically as for the Spectrum application Additionally the analysis interval used for the measurement is indicated as in all MSRA applications For more information see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual Available Measurement FUnCUIONS 2 5 c220c0 ce ecceceetseceeeena seedings ctaadbenneeeee 101 e Channel Power and Adjacent Channel Power ACLR Measureme
138. R amp S FSW Measurements Spectrum Emission Mask SEM Measurement Sweep List Reference Range Power Classes MSR Settings Standard Files Common Settings Base Station RF Bandwidth Band Cale Qory iie ceilidh dd ede ede eed 181 Base Staton RF IBARGWICUA oeeie e EE 181 Carrier Adjacent to RF Bandwidth Edge ssssssssssssssssssrrusssssesnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnennn 181 APPI TO SEM oirr niine a a a aeaa Aaaa aaa aa Aaaa 182 Band Category Defines the band category for MSR measurements i e the combination of available car riers to measure BC1 LTE FDD and W CDMA BC2 LTE FDD W CDMA and GSM EDGE BC3 LTE TDD and TD SCDMA Remote command SENSe ESPectrum MSR BCATegory on page 693 Base Station RF Bandwidth Defines the relevant RF bandwidth span required to measure all available carriers in MSR SEM measurements Remote command SENSe ESPectrum MSR RFBWidth on page 694 Carrier Adjacent to RF Bandwidth Edge For particular measurement setups the specification demands specific limits for the SEM ranges These settings are only available for Band Category 2 GSM EDGE A GSM EDGE carrier is located at the edge of the RF bandwidth present User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 181 R amp S FSW Measurements SS SSS SSS a eS Spectrum Emission Mask SEM Measurement LTE FDD 1 4 An LTE FDD 1 4 MHZ or 3 MHz carrier is located at the edge of the RF MHz 3 MHz bandwidth prese
139. R amp S FSW However when FFT sweeps are performed Sweep type FFT see chapter 6 5 1 5 How Data is Measured the Sweep Type on page 364 FFT filters are used The FFT Filter Mode setting refers to the filter bandwidth in this sweep mode For a list of available filter types see chapter 6 5 3 Reference List of Available RRC and Channel Filters on page 375 Normal 3dB Gaussian filters Gaussian filters provide a good compromise between steep edges and a short settling time This filter is suitable for most measurement tasks and is used by default The available Gaussian 3dB sweep filters are listed in the R amp S FSW data sheet Channel filters Channel filters are fairly steep but require a long settling time they are useful for pulse measurements in the time domain ____L_L_L_LLLL a a User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 365 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings 6 5 1 7 6 5 1 8 6 5 1 9 Bandwidth Filter and Sweep Configuration RRC filters Root raised cosine filters are similar in shape to channel filters and are required by some measurement standards 5 Pole filters 5 Pole filters are very broad and allow for a large bandwidth to pass How Long the Data is Measured Sweep Time Each filter has a settling time that must be awaited in order to obtain correct results Since the resolution bandwidth and video bandwidth define the filter the smaller of the two determines the minimum sweep tim
140. REV RIS95c1 CDMA2000 S2CDma TD SCDMA FWD FTCDma TD SCDMA REV TRCDma WLAN 802 11A AWLAN WLAN 802 11B BWLAN WIMAX WIMax WIBRO WIBRo GSM GSM RFID 14443 RFID14443 TETRA TETRa PDC PDC PHS PHS CDPD CDPD APCO 25 P2 PAPCo25 User Standard USER Customized Standard lt string gt For the R amp S FSW the channel spacing is defined as the distance between the center frequency of the adjacent channel and the center frequency of the transmission channel The definition of the adjacent channel spacing in standards IS95C and CDMA 2000 is different These standards define the adjacent channel spacing from the center of the transmission channel to the closest border of the adjacent channel This definition is also used by the R amp S FSW for the standards marked with an asterisk 5 3 Carrier to Noise Measurements The R amp S FSW can easily determine the carrier to noise ratio also normalized to a 1 Hz bandwidth About he MGASUPEMIEN Eo icici eck ces ecctecek aida cate eadecsdeascdedeavscadadesceatiauecdventd 155 e Carrier to Noise RESUItS ccccccceccscseccceeeeescesseeeeeeeceseeeeesueseeeuaceesauaeeauaeueauaeeeeaas 155 e Carrier to Noise Configuration ccccccceessccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesesneaeeeeeetseeeaaees 156 e How to Determine the Carrier to Noise Ratio ccccccccccccseeeesesseeesseeeeeeeeseaeeeaes 158 SST User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 154 R amp S FSW Measurements 8 E Carrier to Noise Me
141. RLEVel on page 775 Shifting the Display Offset Reference Level Defines an arithmetic level offset This offset is added to the measured level irrespective of the selected unit The scaling of the y axis is changed accordingly Define an offset if the signal is attenuated or amplified before it is fed into the R amp S FSW so the application shows correct power results All displayed power level results will be shifted by this value Note however that the Reference Level value ignores the Reference Level Offset It is important to know the actual power level the R amp S FSW must handle To determine the required offset consider the external attenuation or gain applied to the input signal A positive value indicates that an attenuation took place R amp S FSW increa ses the displayed power values a negative value indicates an external gain R amp S FSW decreases the displayed power values The setting range is 200 dB in 0 01 dB steps Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet on page 775 E SS MN User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 356 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings b SSS SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSHHSSHHHKSHHSSHHSSHHSSHHHSGSHHKHHHSqaae Sy Amplitude and Vertical Axis Configuration Unit Reference Level The R amp S FSW measures the signal voltage at the RF input In the default state the level is displayed at a power of 1 mW dBm Via the known input impe
142. Rack STATe on page 766 Tracking Bandwidth Signal Tracking Defines the search bandwidth for signal tracking around the center frequency Remote command CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion STRack BANDwidth on page 766 Tracking Threshold Signal Tracking Defines the threshold value for signal tracking If the signal level does not pass the threshold the center frequency is not changed Remote command CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion STRack THReshold on page 767 Signal Track Trace Signal Tracking Defines the trace to be tracked Remote command CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion STRack TRACe on page 767 How To Define the Frequency Range The following step by step instructions demonstrate how to configure the frequency and span settings For details on individual functions and settings see chapter 6 3 2 Fre quency and Span Settings on page 347 The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in chapter 11 7 1 Defining the Frequency and Span on page 761 To configure the frequency and span Frequency and span settings can be configured via the Frequency dialog box Signal tracking is configured in the Signal Tracking tab of this dialog box 1 To display the Frequency dialog box do one of the following E a N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 351 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings E eE gt gt gt hh _ _ gt gt SSSS gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt S S S S S
143. Ref 3 840 MHz 0 93 dBm 0 93 dBm Upper 66 60 dB 67 88 dB 69 82 dB 69 35 dB Fig 5 8 Measuring the relative adjacent channel power on a W CDMA uplink signal The R amp S FSW measures the power of the individual channels with zero span A root raised cosine filter with the parameters a 0 22 and chip rate 3 84 Mcps receive filter for W CDMA is used as channel filter Optimum Level Setting for ACLR Measurements on W CDMA Signals The dynamic range for ACLR measurements is limited by the thermal noise floor the phase noise and the intermodulation spectral regrowth of the signal analyzer The power values produced by the R amp S FSW due to these factors accumulate linearly They depend on the applied level at the input mixer The three factors are shown in the figure below for the adjacent channel 5 MHz carrier offset __L L_L_L_LLL_ ES MN User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 150 R amp S FSW Measurements Channel Power and Adjacent Channel Power ACLR Measurement Noise Floor S R Phase Noise ACLR Dynamic Fig 5 9 Dynamic range for ACLR measurements on W CDMA uplink signals as a function of the mixer level The level of the W CDMA signal at the input mixer is shown on the horizontal axis i e the measured signal level minus the selected RF attenuation The individual components which contribute to the power in the adjacent channel and the resulting relative level total ACPR in t
144. Relative Relative Relative 13 dBm 13 dBm 13 dBm 13 dBm 13 dBm Abs Limit Stop 1 13 dBm 13 dBm 13 dBm 13 dBm 13 dBm Rel Limit Start 1 50 dBc 50 dBc 300 dBc 50 dBc 50 dBc Rel Limit Stop 1 50 dBc 50 dBe 300 dBc 50 dBc 50 dBc Ror Delete Symetrical Setup Range Range on E Fig 5 11 Sweep list using Fast SEM mode In figure 5 11 a sweep list is shown for which Fast SEM is activated The formerly 5 separately defined ranges are combined to 2 sweep ranges internally 5 5 4 4 Multi Standard Radio MSR SEM Measurements Multi standard radio MSR measurements allow you to perform SEM tests on signals with multiple carriers using different digital standards MSR measurements are described in the specification 3GPP TS 37 141 Various typical combinations of standards for base station tests are described e g LTE FDD and W CDMA carriers By performing an MSR SEM measurement you can determine if or how the different carriers affect each other i e if unwanted emissions occur On the R amp S FSW the MSR SEM measurement is a standard measurement as for single carriers The MSR settings merely provide a con venient way of configuring the sweep list for all required ranges according to the speci fication very quickly User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 172 R amp S FSW Measurements 5 5 5 5 5 5 1 Spectrum Emission Mask SEM Measurement SEM Configuration SEM measurements are selected via the Spectrum Emission Mask bu
145. Restores the settings that were used during source calibration This can be useful if instrument settings were changed after calibration e g center frequency frequency deviation reference level etc Remote command SENSe CORRection RECal1 on page 822 Save As Trd Factor Uses the normalized measurement data to generate a transducer factor The trace data is converted to a transducer with unit dB and stored in a file with the specified name and the suffix trd under c r_s instr trd The frequency points are allocated in equidistant steps between start and stop frequency The generated transducer factor can be further adapted using the Transducer softkey in the SETUP menu For more information on transducers see chapter 9 2 Basics on Transducer Factors on page 513 This function is only available if Source Calibration Normalize is switched on Note Note that the normalized measurement data is used not the reference trace Thus if you store the normalized trace directly after calibration without changing any settings the transducer factor will be 0 dB for the entire span by definition of the normalized trace Remote command SENSe CORRection TRANsducer GENerator on page 823 Reference Position Defines the position of the Result Frequency Stop in percent of the total y axis range The top of the diagram is 100 the bottom is 0 By default the 0 dB line is displayed at the top of the diagram 100 T
146. SENSe ESPectrum HighSPeed on page 676 Filter Type Sets the filter type for this range E LS M User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 174 Spectrum Emission Mask SEM Measurement For details on filter types see chapter 6 5 1 6 Which Data May Pass Filter Types on page 365 Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt FILTer TYPE on page 677 RBW Sets the RBW value for this range For details on the RBW see chapter 6 5 1 1 Separating Signals by Selecting an Appro priate Resolution Bandwidth on page 362 Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt BANDwidth RESolution on page 676 VBW Sets the VBW value for this range For details on the VBW see chapter 6 5 1 2 Smoothing the Trace Using the Video Bandwidth on page 363 Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt BANDwidth VIDeo on page 676 Sweep Time Mode Activates or deactivates the auto mode for the sweep time For details on the sweep time mode see chapter 6 5 1 7 How Long the Data is Mea sured Sweep Time on page 366 Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt SWEep TIME AUTO on page 687 Sweep Time Sets the sweep time value for the range For details on the sweep time see chapter 6 5 1 7 How Long the Data is Measured Sweep Time on page 366 Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt SWEep TIME on page
147. SN Control Settings on page 265 Output settings can be configured via the INPUT OUTPUT key or in the Outputs dialog box E a A User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 341 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output Poutoun gt Output Digital IQ IF Video Output Video IF Out Frequency Noise Source Trigger 2 Trigger 3 Arde yo 010 61 0 E E TE T E E 342 I Wide Out FPEQUONGY iissa usisa a AEEA EATA AEE ES 342 Noise SOUE eoii i a a 343 E 21 gee A E A A E A A E EN 343 Di T e E E E A edad Narpatncalad anon 343 PM hi a A uals ant nto 344 L Pulse Lengai iaiia iania e araa A i a aE 344 b San Toge nie aa a a Na i 344 IF Video Output Defines the type of signal sent to the IF VIDEO DEMOD connector on the rear panel of the R amp S FSW For restrictions and additional information see chapter 6 2 1 6 IF and Video Signal Out put on page 278 F Sends the measured IF value at the frequency defined in IF Wide Out Frequency on page 342 to the IF VIDEO DEMOD output connector VIDEO Sends the displayed video signal i e the filtered and detected IF signal to the IF VIDEO DEMOD output connector This setting is required to send demodulated audio frequencies to the output Remote command OUTP IF VID see OUTPut IF SOURce on page 836 IF Wide Out Frequency Defines the frequency at which the IF signal level is sent to the IF VIDEO DEMOD con nector if F Video Output is set to
148. SS a a gs a ee Channel Power and Adjacent Channel Power ACLR Measurement IBW method When measuring the channel power the R amp S FSW integrates the linear power which corresponds to the levels of the measurement points within the selected channel The signal analyzer uses a resolution bandwidth which is far smaller than the channel band width When sweeping over the channel the channel filter is formed by the passband characteristics of the resolution bandwidth Resolution filter Channel bandwith Fig 5 1 Approximating the channel filter by sweeping with a small resolution bandwidth The following steps are performed 1 The linear power of all the trace points within the channel is calculated P 1 Q Li 10 where P power of the trace pixel i L displayed level of trace point i 2 The powers of all trace points within the channel are summed up and the sum is divided by the number of trace points in the channel 3 The result is multiplied by the quotient of the selected channel bandwidth and the noise bandwidth of the resolution filter RBW Since the power calculation is performed by integrating the trace within the channel bandwidth this method is called the IBW method Integration Bandwidth method Fast ACLR The integrated bandwidth method IBW calculates channel power and ACLR from the trace data obtained during a continuous sweep over the selected span Most parts of this sweep are neither part of the
149. Settings In the Spectrum Emission Mask measurements a range defines a segment for which you can define the following parameters separately e Start and stop frequency e RBW e VBW e Sweep time e Sweep points e Reference level e Attenuator settings e Preamplifier settings e Transducer settings e Limit values Via the sweep list you define the ranges and their settings For details on settings refer to chapter 5 5 5 1 Sweep List on page 173 For details on defining the limits masks see chapter 5 5 4 2 Limit Lines in SEM Meas urements on page 169 SST User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 167 R amp S FSW Measurements a 8 es Spectrum Emission Mask SEM Measurement For details on defining the limits masks see the base unit description Working with Lines in SEM Range definition After a preset the sweep list contains a set of default ranges and parameters For each range you can change the parameters listed above You can insert or delete ranges The changes of the sweep list are only kept until you load another parameter set by pressing PRESET or by loading an XML file If you want a parameter set to be available permanently create an XML file for this configuration for details refer to How to save a user defined SEM settings file on page 187 If you load one of the provided XML files the sweep list contains ranges and parameters according to the selected standard Reference range The range
150. Setup dialog box see Optimized Settings Adjust Settings on page 125 You can set the RBW manually in the Bandwidth configuration dialog box see RBVV on page 264 E a G User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 114 R amp SEFSW Measurements L_a a a Ss Channel Power and Adjacent Channel Power ACLR Measurement With the exception of the IS95 CDMA standards the Adjust Settings function sets the resolution bandwidth RBW as a function of the channel bandwidth RBW lt 1 40 of channel bandwidth The maximum possible resolution bandwidth with respect to the requirement RBW lt 1 40 resulting from the available RBW steps 1 3 is selected Video Bandwidth VBW For a correct power measurement the video signal must not be limited in bandwidth A restricted bandwidth of the logarithmic video signal would cause signal averaging and thus result in a too low indication of the power 2 51 dB at very low video bandwidths The video bandwidth should therefore be selected at least three times the resolution bandwidth VBW 2 3 x RBW The video bandwidth for the defined channel settings can be optimized using the Adjust Settings function in the Ch Power menu or the General Settings tab of the ACLR Setup dialog box see Optimized Settings Adjust Settings on page 125 You can set the VBW manually in the Bandwidth configuration dialog box see VBW on page 369 The video bandwidth VBW is set as a function of the c
151. TO menu to optimize the scaling 4 To determine a precise level at a specific point in the signal e Reduce the Range of the y axis to a small area around the required level If necessary change the Ref Level Position so the required range remains visible e Select Linear Unit scaling Now you can set a marker at the point in question and read the result 5 To detect a spurious signal close to the noise floor e Set the RF attenuation to Manual mode and reduce the Value to lower the noise floor e Select Relative Logarithmic scaling Now you can determine if any spurious levels of a certain size are visible 6 5 Bandwidth Filter and Sweep Configuration The basic bandwidth filter and sweep settings that apply to most measurements are described here These parameters define how the data is measured how much data is collected internally and which filters are used SSS R User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 361 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings 6 5 1 6 5 1 1 Bandwidth Filter and Sweep Configuration e Impact of the Bandwidth Filter and Sweep SettingS ccccccceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 362 e Bandwidth Filter and Sweep SettingS cccccccccccceccececeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeseees 367 e Reference List of Available RRC and Channel Filters ccccsscceesseeeeeeeeeees 375 Impact of the Bandwidth Filter and Sweep Settings The bandwidth filter and sweep settings
152. TYPe on page 790 Level Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines whether a constant high 1 or low 0 signal is sent to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 790 Pulse Length Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines the length of the pulse sent as a trigger to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe LENGth on page 791 Send Trigger Output Type Trigger 2 3 Sends a user defined trigger to the output connector immediately Note that the trigger pulse level is always opposite to the constant signal level defined by the output Level setting e g for Level High a constant high signal is output to the connector until the Send Trigger button is selected Then a low pulse is sent Which pulse level will be sent is indicated by a graphic on the button Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe IMMediate on page 791 Frequency and Span Configuration The frequency and span settings define the scope of the signal and spectrum to be ana lyzed with the R amp S FSW e Impact of the Frequency and Span Settings eeeccceeeeceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeaaeees 344 Frequency and Span Settings eraris iiien vated saddest 347 How To Define the Frequency Range esrsssseeririnirirnnnssreinnndrrsnnninenirrrreiiannnnaa 351 e How to Move the Center Frequency through the Frequency Range 352 e How to Keep the Center Frequency Stable
153. a Input and Output SeeoGs Cle ee Power Sensor Ena Fig 6 2 Connecting a power sensor using the POWER SENSOR interface The R amp S FSW receives an external trigger signal when the defined trigger level is mea sured by the power sensor Power measurement results are provided as usual The Gate Mode Level is not supported for R amp S power sensors The signal sent by these sensors merely reflects the instant the level is first exceeded rather than a time period However only time periods can be used for gating in level mode Thus the trigger impulse from the sensors is not long enough for a fully gated measurement the measurement cannot be completed For details on gating see chapter 6 6 1 2 Gated Measure ments on page 379 For details see How to Configure a Power Sensor as an External PSE Trigger on page 291 6 2 3 2 Power Sensor Settings Power sensor settings are available in the Power Sensor tab of the Input dialog box Each sensor is configured on a separate tab User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 284 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output Input Source Power Sensor State Continuous Update ni an Borers Select F Auto Sensor2 a Zeroing Power Sensor Meas gt Ref Sensor3 m Frequency Manual Reference Value 67 19 dBm Sensor4 eal Frequency Coupling Use Ref Level Offset Unit Scale om Number of Readings Meas Time Average Duty Cycle External Powe
154. a user defined standard Number of adjacent channels Channel bandwidth of transmission Tx adjacent Adj and alternate Alt channels Channel spacings Weighting filters Resolution bandwidth Video bandwidth Detector ACLR limits and their state Sweep time and sweep time coupling Trace and power mode MSR only subblock and gap channel definition User defined standards are managed in the Manage dialog box which is displayed when you select the Manage User Standards button in the General Settings tab of the CP ACLR Setup dialog box In the Manage dialog box you can save the current measurement settings as a user defined standard or load a stored measurement configuration Furthermore you can delete an existing configuration file E N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 122 R amp S FSW Measurements eT Eee eee eee Channel Power and Adjacent Channel Power ACLR Measurement For details see chapter 5 2 6 4 How to Manage User Defined Configurations on page 146 Remote command To query all available standards CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer STANdard CATalog on page 644 To load a standard CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer PRESet on page 643 To save a standard CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer STANdard SAVE on page 644 To delet
155. abled the frequency range is not restricted by the band limits RF Start and RF Stop In this case the full LO range of the selected harmonics is used Remote command SENSe MIXer RFOVerrange STATe on page 805 Preset Band Restores the presettings for the selected band Note changes to the band and mixer settings are maintained even after using the PRESET function This function allows you to restore the original band settings Remote command SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND PRESet on page 802 Mixer Type The R amp S FSW option B21 supports the following external mixer types 2 Port LO and IF data use the same port 3 Port LO and IF data use separate ports Remote command SENSe MIXer PORTs on page 805 Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration The harmonics configuration determines the frequency range for user defined bands see Band on page 328 LSS SSS SSS SSS User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 328 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings SSS SSSSSSSSS S S S S SS SS _ S SS S S S _ S S _S S S S _ S _ S SS FE EEE ESS Say Data Input and Output Harmonic Type Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration Defines if only even only odd or even and odd harmonics can be used for conversion Depending on this selection the order of harmonic to be used for conversion changes see Harmonic Order on page 329 Which harmonics are supported depends on th
156. aeetadeeesdeteledandentintaasy 301 External Generator Connections The external generator is controlled either via a LAN connection or via the EXT GEN CONTROL GPIB interface of the R amp S FSW supplied with the R amp S FSW B10 option For more information on configuring interfaces see chapter 10 1 1 Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols on page 554 TTL synchronization In addition TTL synchronization can be used with some Rohde amp Schwarz generators connected via GPIB The TTL interface is included in the AUX CONTROL connector of the R amp S FSW B10 option Using the TTL interface allows for considerably higher measurement rates than pure GPIB control because the frequency stepping of the R amp S FSW is directly coupled with the frequency stepping of the generator For details see Coupling the Frequencies on page 299 D User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 292 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output In figure 6 3 the TTL connection is illustrated using an SMU generator for example BNC Blank BNC Trigger SMU Fig 6 3 TTL connection for an SMU generator The external generator can be used to calibrate the data source by performing either transmission or reflection measurements Transmission Measurement This measurement yields the transmission characteristics of a two port network The external generator is used as a signal source It is connected to the input connector of the DUT T
157. aiinatsboutuniausianuisiosnus 384 THQ GSR S CUNO S faeces ee ee che cae eee aa ETE eas E E E EO 384 E sO E E adnan E ina nenanceistndale 384 L Free RUM ecccccccsessscscscecssscssescscscscesesssseessseesesessssueseusesavevensnsusevevenenens 385 L Extemal Tigger V23 niini ia 385 E o P E E A mnnteelinede 385 l E e E E EA 386 L Baseband POWE cccccccsessesssssescececssessesesssesesssssceeesecssetesauseeeseveseeens 386 e E e nett anc E OE 386 L Power SONSOF cccccccsccssesessessssssesssessssusececscseseesevacsusetesavensusesesesseesens 387 DMM ease kn ed Nini lense E Gye oe 387 L Trigger E 387 L Repetition MPMI aia ace cstessaudsasdeoieadesaicswecddvsndicadeadensbioadubedtaldenileatandwe 387 L Drop OUt TIME erarnan aE E cestode enced AE 388 L Trigger Offset aenieei a ee E E EE EEEE 388 EE e E R E EE EEE E E A E 388 Me BY Haldo aoteana a N 388 Ee A E E 389 TROI e a E E aN 389 MON Te eena a ra a ae 389 e EE A E 389 L Pulse LEng i ceren E 390 L Send MOJE na a a 390 Gate I E E E A EA SE 390 eei ee E ceca czsh sien ane andvoundv avs sechin ra uiedeoonsaleutwban ils daeaddexyaia Reva 390 MN a cetacean dee T 390 L Gate Dolay ese caso eel avant te salad iaa a aa aaa 390 L Gate Length aenn ari e a EA a EEA TRE EEA EE 391 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 383 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings Trigger and Gate Configuration Preview The preview diagram displays a zero span measurement at the center frequency with the defined RBW and s
158. ais eels eddiawehncchad A EEE et anes avineeas 177 SY NUIT UCI SS GUD erea est oletds da petescdns pen evseded NOAS 177 Range Start Range Stop Sets the start frequency stop frequency of the selected range In order to change the start stop frequency of the first or last range respectively select the appropriate span with the SPAN key If you set a span that is smaller than the overall span of the ranges the measurement includes only the ranges that lie within the defined span and have a minimum span of 20 Hz The first and last ranges are adapted to the given span as long as the minimum span of 20 Hz is not violated Frequency values for each range have to be defined relative to the center frequency The reference range has to be centered on the center frequency The minimum span of the reference range is given by the current Channel Power Settings Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt FREQuency STARt on page 678 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt FREQuency STOP on page 678 Fast SEM Activates Fast SEM mode for all ranges in the sweep list For details see chapter 5 5 4 3 Fast SEM Measurements on page 171 Note If Fast SEM mode is deactivated while Symmetrical Setup mode is on Sym metrical Setup mode is automatically also deactivated If Fast SEM mode is activated while Symmetrical Setup mode is on not all range settings can be set automatically Remote command
159. al generator type to be controlled by the R amp S FSW a generator setup file must be configured and stored on the R amp S FSW The setup file defines the frequency and power ranges supported by the generator as well as information required for com munication For the signal generators listed in Overview of Generators Supported by the R amp S FSW B10 Option on page 294 default setup files are provided If necessary these files can be edited or duplicated for varying measurement setups or other instruments E a SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSS _ SSSSSS55qQ_ SS_ User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 295 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings EE EE _ gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt E gt E gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt SSSSSSSS_____ E _ _ ES Sy Data Input and Output The existing setup files can be displayed in an editor in read only mode directly from the External Generator configuration dialog box They must be saved under a different name using File gt SaveAs To add a new generator to the selection list in the Interface Configuration edit the setup file for an existing generator as required then save the file with the extension gen After you close the configuration dialog and re open it the new generator is available in the Generator Type list with the name of the saved setup file Be careful however to adhere to
160. amp Schwarz available at the time of delivery The XML files from the Cc R_S instr sem_backup folder are copied to the C R_S instr sem_std folder Note that this function will overwrite customized standards that have the same name as predefined standards Remote command SENSe ESPectrum PRESet RESTore on page 674 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 183 R amp S FSW Measurements a a Spectrum Emission Mask SEM Measurement 5 5 5 6 List Evaluation In the List Evaluation dialog box which is displayed when you select the Evalua tions button in the Overview or the List Evaluation softkey in the SEMAsk menu you configure the contents and display of the result list List Evaluation State Settings Show Peaks off on Margin 200 0 dB e Evaluation List Decimal Seperator POINT COMMA List Evaluation State Activates or deactivates the list evaluation Remote command CALCulate lt n gt ESPectrum PSEarch PEAKsearch AUTO on page 695 TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 853 Show Peaks If activated all peaks that have been detected during an active list evaluation are marked with blue squares in the diagram Remote command CALCulate lt n gt ESPectrum PSEarch PEAKsearch PSHow on page 696 Margin Although a margin functionality is not available for the limit check a margin threshold for the peak values to be displayed in the evaluation list and
161. an immediate final measurement is that it eliminates the risk of measurement errors based on frequency drifts of the disturbance signal __L_L_L_L LLLL a N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 258 R amp S FSW Measurements Electromagnetic Interference EMI Measurement R amp S FSW K54 The final measurement at the marker frequency may have a different detector than during the initial peak search Thus the final measurement consumes much less time because detectors with a long measurement time are needed only at the critical frequency The R amp S FSW EMI measurement also allows you to use multiple detectors for the final measurement The advantage of multiple detection is that you only need one test run to see if the results comply with the limits specified in a standard The detectors for the final EMI tests are defined in the marker configuration as opposed to the trace detector which is used for the initial peak search The results of the final measurement are shown in the Result Summary see chap ter 5 13 2 EMI Measurement Results on page 250 Defining a Dwell Time for the Final Measurement EMC tests often require a specific dwell time for an EMI measurement The dwell time defines how long the R amp S FSW measures the signal at the frequencies of the marker positions The dwell time is identical for all EMI final measurements and is thus defined in the EMI measurement configuration Select a dwell time according to the chara
162. an sweeps at the center frequency and at each harmonic i e at frequencies that are a multiple of the center fre quency As a result the zero span sweeps on all harmonics are shown as well as the RMS values and the total harmonic distortion THD User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 227 R amp S FSW Measurements MM a eed Harmonic Distortion Measurement 5 9 2 Harmonic Distortion Basics Measuring the harmonics of a signal is a frequent problem which can be solved best using a signal analyzer In general every signal contains harmonics Harmonics are generated by nonlinear characteristics which add frequencies to a pure sinewave They can often be reduced by low pass filters Since the signal analyzer itself has a nonlinear charac teristic for example in its first mixer measures must be taken to ensure that harmonics produced in the signal analyzer do not cause spurious results If necessary the funda mental wave must be attenuated selectively with respect to the other harmonics with a high pass filter Harmonics are particularly critical regarding high power transmitters such as transceivers because large harmonics can interfere with other radio services Harmonic distortion can be determined as the level of the individual components or as the root mean square of all components together the total harmonic distortion THD The THD is set in relation to the power of the fundamental frequency center frequency Obtainable dyna
163. annel SBLock lt sb gt NAME CHANnel lt ch gt on page 662 Tx Center Frequency Tx Channel Definition Defines the absolute center frequency of an MSR Tx channel Each Tx channel is defined independantly of the others automatic spacing as in common ACLR measure ments is not performed Note that the position of the first Tx channel in the first subblock and the last Tx channel in the last subblock also affect the position of the adjacent channels Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock lt sb gt CENTer CHANnel lt ch gt on page 661 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 137 R amp S FSW Measurements 5 2 5 3 Channel Power and Adjacent Channel Power ACLR Measurement Technology Used for Transmission Tx Channel Definition The technology used for transmission by the individual channel can be defined for each channel The required channel bandwidth and use of a weighting filter are preconfigured automatically according to the selected technology standard GSM Transmission according to GSM standard W CDMA Transmission according to W CDMA standard LTE_1_40 LTE_3_ 00 LTE_5 00 LTE_10_00 LTE_15 O00 LTE_20 00 Transmission according to LTE standard for different channel band widths USER User defined transmission no automatic preconfiguration possible Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock lt sb gt TECHnology CHANnel lt ch gt on page 663 Tx Channel Bandwidth
164. annels for a specific subblock lie outside the subblock s defined frequency range or if transmit and CACLR channels overlap 5 2 4 Channel Power Configuration Channel Power CP and Adjacent Channel Power ACLR measurements are selected via the Channel Power ACLR button in the Select Measurement dialog box The measurement is started immediately with the default settings It can be configured via the MEAS CONFIG key or in the ACLR Setup dialog box which is displayed when you select the CP ACLR Config softkey from the CH Power menu If the Multi Standard Radio standard is selected see Standard on page 121 the ACLR Setup dialog box is replaced by the MSR ACLR Setup dialog box See chap ter 5 2 5 MSR ACLR Configuration on page 129 for a description of these settings N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 119 R amp S FSW Measurements a SS a a a Channel Power and Adjacent Channel Power ACLR Measurement General Settings Channel Settings Standard Channel Count EUTRA LTE Square TX 1 Manage User Standards ADJ OAAS MAX POWER TX CHANNEL ACLR Mode as E Noise Correction r cere i Power Unit Abs Hz Fast ACLR Power Mode CiRW Selected Trace Set CP Reference Adjust Settings The easiest way to configure a measurement is using the configuration Overview see chapter 6 1 Configuration Overview on page 273 The remote commands required to perform these tasks are
165. ant to consider the required frequencies for calibra tion in advance The frequencies and levels supported by the connected signal generator are provided for reference with the interface configuration Two different methods are available to define the frequencies for calibration that is to couple the frequencies of the R amp S FSW with those of the signal generator e Manual coupling a single frequency is defined e Automatic coupling a series of frequencies is defined one for each sweep point based on the current frequency at the RF input of the R amp S FSW the RF frequency range covers the currently defined span of the R amp S FSW unless limited by the range of the signal generator Automatic coupling If automatic coupling is used the output frequency of the generator source frequency is calculated as follows Source Freq RF Numerator Offset Denominator Output frequency of the generator 6 1 where User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 299 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings bo Data Input and Output F Generator OUtput frequency of the generator Fanalyzer Current frequency at the RF input of the R amp S FSW Numerator multiplication factor for the current analyzer frequency Denominator division factor for the current analyzer frequency Foriset frequency offset for the current analyzer frequency for example for frequency converting measurements or harmonics measurements The value range for
166. anual 1173 9411 02 13 104 R amp S FSW Measurements ae SS SSS aa Available Measurement Functions CCDF Measures the complementary cumulative distribution function CCDF and opens a sub menu to configure the measurement For details see chapter 5 7 Statistical Measurements APD CCDF on page 208 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt STATistics CCDF STATe on page 712 Results CALCulate lt n gt STATistics CCDF X lt t gt on page 718 CALCulate STATistics RESult lt t gt on page 719 Time Domain Power Measures the power in zero span and opens a submenu to configure the measurement For details see chapter 5 12 Basic Measurements on page 245 A time domain power measurement is only possible for zero span Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion SUMMary STATe on page 722 chapter 11 5 9 Measuring the Time Domain Power on page 721 TOI Measures the third order intercept point and opens a submenu to configure the mea surement For details see chapter 5 10 Third Order Intercept TOI Measurement on page 233 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion TOI STATe on page 733 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion TOI RESult on page 733 chapter 11 5 11 Measuring the Third Order Intercept Point on page 732 AM Mod Depth Measures the AM modulation depth and opens a submenu to configure the measure ment An AM modulated carrier is required in the wi
167. apter 5 5 5 1 Sweep List on page 173 Filter Type RBW VBW Sweep Time Mode Reference Level Rf Attenuation Mode RF Attenuation Preamplificiation Activating Fast SEM mode Fast SEM mode is activated in the sweep list see chapter 5 5 5 1 Sweep List on page 173 or using a remote command Activating the mode for one range automat ically activates it for all ranges in the sweep list Remote command SENSe ESPectrum HighSPeed on page 676 Consequences When the Fast SEM mode is activated the ranges for which these criteria apply are displayed as one single range The sweep time is defined as the sum of the individual sweep times initially but can be changed E a T User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 171 R amp S FSW Measurements Spectrum Emission Mask SEM Measurement If Symmetrical Setup mode is active when Fast SEM mode is activated not all sweep list settings can be configured symmetrically automatically see also Symmetric Setup on page 177 Any other changes to the sweep settings of the combined range are applied to each included range and remain changed even after deactivating Fast SEM mode Example Sweep List Reference Range Power Classes Standard Files Range Start Range Stop AHz Channel 30 kHz 3 MHZ Sweep Time 37 5 ms Ref Level 0 dBm Auto RF Attenuator 10 dB Transducer None None None None Relative Relative
168. ard defined limits A relative or absolute limit can be defined or both for each individual adjacent channel Both limit types are considered regardless whether the measured levels are absolute or relative values The check of both limit values can be activated independently If any active limit value is exceeded the mea sured value is displayed in red and marked by a preceding asterisk in the result table Note that in addition to activating limit checking for individual channels limit checking must also be activated globally for the MSR ACLR measurement see Limit Checking on page 139 2 Result Summary Multi Standard Radio Channel Bandwidth Frequency Power 80 44 dBm 29 15 dBm Channel Bandwidth Offset cower Upper 49 76 dB 50 37 dB Remote command CALCulate LIMit ACPower STATe on page 655 CALCulate LIMit ACPower ACHannel ABSolute STATe on page 652 CALCulate LIMit ACPower ACHannel ABSolute on page 651 CALCulate LIMit ACPower ACHannel RELative STATe on page 653 CALCulate LIMit ACPower ACHannel RELative on page 652 CALCulate LIMit ACPower ALTernate lt ch gt ABSolute STATe on page 653 CALCulate LIMit ACPower ALTernate lt ch gt ABSolute on page 653 CALCulate LIMit ACPower ALTernate lt ch gt RELative STATe on page 654 CALCulate LIMit ACPower ALTernate lt ch gt RELative on page 654 CALCulate LIMit ACPower ACHannel RESult on page 652
169. are specified in the data sheet Numeric input is always rounded to the nearest possible bandwidth If AUTO is selected the resolution bandwidth is coupled to the selected span for span gt 0 If the span is changed the resolution bandwidth is automatically adjusted If the resolution bandwidth is defined manually a green bullet is displayed next to the RBW display in the channel bar For more information see chapter 6 5 1 1 Separating Signals by Selecting an Appro priate Resolution Bandwidth on page 362 For measurements on Q data in the frequency domain the maximum RBW is 1 MHz For EMI measurements using the quasipeak detector the 1 MHz RBW filter is not avail able see chapter 5 13 3 1 Resolution Bandwidth and Filter Types on page 252 Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth ESolution on page 767 ESolution AUTO on page 768 aw Automatic Peak Search If activated a peak search is performed automatically for all active markers after each sweep If Auto peak search and limit lines are active the active markers are set to the peak delta values between the measured signal and the limit lines Note The general search functions Auto Max Min Peak Search are not available for EMI measurements Remote command CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion FMEasurement PSEarch PEAKsearch AUTO on page 739 Dwell Time Sets the dwell time for the EMI marker measurement For mo
170. armonic Since the frequency axis scaling is based on the 2nd order the mixer product or the resulting diagram of the IF filter is compressed by a factor of 2 3 The signal recorded in the reference sweep was generated by mixing with the fundamental of the LO signal Since the frequency axis scaling is based on the 2nd order the mixer product or the resulting diagram of the IF filter is expanded by a factor of 2 Automatic identification with a large span is not possible since the two mixer products are displayed at the same frequency The diagram shown in figure 6 18 is obtained when examining products with a narrow span using the Auto ID function You can easily rec ognize unwanted mixer products in the diagram obtained using one of the automatic detection functions SSS SSS User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 325 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output BW 100 kHz TII TEES PEELE LLL ee ee amp REW 30 kHz Center 813403 GHz k Span 200 Fig 6 18 Unwanted mixer products displayed for small span 6 2 5 2 External Mixer Settings The external mixer is configured in the External Mixer tab of the Input dialog box which is available when you do one of the following if the R amp S FSW B21 option is installed e Press the INPUT OUTPUT key then select the External Mixer Config softkey e From the Overview select Input then switch to the External Mixer tab under Input Source Note that
171. ary CDMA 2000 Channel Bandwidth Offset Power T Ref 1 229 MHz 28 86 dBm Tota 28 86 dBm Channel Bandwidth Offset Lower Upper Adj 30 000 kHz 75 kHz 68 32 dB 68 47 dB Iti 0 000 kHz 1 980 MH2 68 38 dB 68 50 dB Fig 5 2 Measuring the channel power and adjacent channel power ratio for CDMA2000 signals with zero span Fast ACLR Measurement Repeatability The repeatability of the results especially in the narrow adjacent channels strongly depends on the measurement time for a given resolution bandwidth A longer sweep time may increase the probability that the measured value converges to the true value of the adjacent channel power but obviously increases measurement time Assuming a measurement with five channels 1 channel plus 2 lower and 2 upper adja cent channels and a sweep time of 100 ms a measurement time per channel of 20 ms is required The number of effective samples taken into account for power calculation in one channel is the product of sweep time in channel times the selected resolution band width Assuming a sweep time of 100 ms there are 30 kHz 4 19 MHz 100 ms 10 kHz 7 samples Whereas in Fast ACLR mode there are 100 ms 5 30 kHz 600 samples Comparing these numbers explains the increase of repeatability with a 95 confidence level 25 from 2 8 dB to 0 34 dB for a sweep time of 100 ms For the same repeatability the sweep time would have to be set to 8 5 s with the inte gration method The f
172. asurements 5 3 1 About the Measurement The largest signal in the frequency span is the carrier It is searched when the C N or C NO function is activated and is marked using a fixed reference marker FXD To determine the noise power a channel with a defined bandwidth at the defined center frequency is analyzed The power within this channel is integrated to obtain the noise power level If the carrier is within this channel an extra step is required to determine the correct noise power level see below The noise power of the channel is subtracted from the maximum carrier signal level and in the case of a C No measurement it is referred to a 1 Hz bandwidth For this measurement the RMS detector is activated The carrier to noise measurements are only available in the frequency domain span gt 0 Measurement process Depending on whether the carrier is inside or outside the analyzed channel the mea surement process for the carrier to noise ratio varies e The carrier is outside the analyzed channel In this case it is sufficient to switch on the desired measurement function and to set the channel bandwidth The carrier noise ratio is displayed on the screen e The carrier is inside the analyzed channel In this case the measurement must be performed in two steps First perform the reference measurement by switching on either the C N or the C NO measurement and waiting for the end of the next measurement run The fi
173. ay contain multiple signals for different communication stand ards Anew measurement standard is provided for the R amp S FSW ACLR measurement that allows you to measure such MSR signals including non contiguous setups Multiple also non contiguous transmit channels can be specified at absolute frequencies inde pendant from the common center frequency selected for display Signal structure Up to 18 transmit channels can be grouped in a maximum of 5 subblocks Between two subblocks two gaps are defined a lower gap and an upper gap Each gap in turn contains 2 channels The channels in the upper gap are identical to those in the lower gap but inverted To either side of the outermost transmit channels lower and upper adjacent channels can be defined as in common ACLR measurement setups User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 116 R amp S FSW Measurements i anM Channel Power and Adjacent Channel Power ACLR Measurement CF 1 0 GHz 6 67 MHz Span 66 7 MHz AGap2 AGap2 Fig 5 5 MSR signal structure Subblock and channel definition The subblocks are defined by a specified center frequency RF bandwidth and number of transmit channels CF GF Tx1 Tx2 Fig 5 6 Subblock definition As opposed to common ACLR channel definitions the Tx channels are defined at abso lute frequencies rather than by a spacing relative to the common center frequency Each transmit channel can be assigned a different technology used to predefin
174. ayed in the status bar Reverse Sweep via min Ext Gen erator Frequency Example Example for reverse sweep via minimum frequency Fanalyzerstat 100 MHz Fanalyzerstop 200 MHz Fotiset 150 MHz F min 20 MHz Numerator Denominator 1 gt F Generatorstart 50 MHz gt F GeneratorStop 50 MHz via Fmin Displayed Information and Errors Channel bar If external generator control is active some additional information is displayed in the channel bar Label Description EXT TG lt source power gt External generator active signal sent with lt source power gt level LVL Power Offset see Source Offset on page 306 FRQ Frequency Offset see Automatic Source Frequency Numerator Denomi nator Offset on page 306 NOR Normalization on No difference between reference setting and measurement _L gt _L_L_ L LLL_ SSS User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 301 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output Label Description APX approximation Normalization on Deviation from the reference setting occurs Aborted normalization or no calibration performed yet Error and status messages The following status and error messages may occur during external generator control Message Description Ext Generator GPIB Handshake Error Ext Generator TCPIP Handshake Error Ext Generator TTL Handshake Error Connection to the g
175. ays rounded to the nearest possible bandwidth If AUTO is selected the resolution bandwidth is coupled to the selected span for span gt 0 If the span is changed the resolution bandwidth is automatically adjusted If the resolution bandwidth is defined manually a green bullet is displayed next to the RBW display in the channel bar For more information see chapter 6 5 1 1 Separating Signals by Selecting an Appro priate Resolution Bandwidth on page 362 For measurements on Q data in the frequency domain the maximum RBW is 1 MHz For EMI measurements using the quasipeak detector the 1 MHz RBW filter is not avail able see chapter 5 13 3 1 Resolution Bandwidth and Filter Types on page 252 Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution on page 767 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution AUTO on page 768 VBW Defines the video bandwidth automatically or manually For more information see chapter 6 5 1 2 Smoothing the Trace Using the Video Band width on page 363 Auto The video bandwidth is coupled to the resolution bandwidth If the res olution bandwidth is changed the video bandwidth is automatically adjusted Manual For manual mode define the bandwidth value The available video bandwidths are specified in the data sheet Numeric input is always rounded to the nearest possible bandwidth If the video bandwidth is defined manually a green bullet is displayed next to the VBW di
176. bsolute Signal is checked against absolute limit values None No limit check is performed Remote command SENSe LIST RANGe LIMit STATe on page 706 CALCulate LIMit lt k gt FAIL on page 905 Abs Limit Start Stop Sets an absolute limit value at the start or stop frequency of the range dBm Remote command SENSe LIST RANGe lt range gt LIMit STARt on page 705 SENSe LIST RANGe lt range gt LIMit STOP on page 706 Insert before after Range Inserts a new range to the left of the currently focused range before or to the right after The range numbers of the currently focused range and all higher ranges are increased accordingly The maximum number of ranges is 30 Delete Range Deletes the currently focused range The range numbers are updated accordingly Adjusting the X Axis to the Range Definitions The frequency axis of the measurement diagram can be adjusted automatically so that the span of all sweep list ranges corresponds to the displayed span Thus the x axis E a a User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 203 R amp S FSW Measurements 5 6 4 3 Spurious Emissions Measurement range is set from the start frequency of the first sweep range to the stop frequency of the last sweep range List Evaluation In the List Evaluation dialog box which is displayed when you select the Evalua tions button in the Overview or the List Evaluation softkey in the Spurious Emis sions
177. by the Select setting on each tab However the general setting overrides the individual settings Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt STATe on page 832 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 285 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output Continuous Value Update If activated the power sensor data is updated continuously during a sweep with a long sweep time and even after a single sweep has completed This function cannot be activated for individual sensors If the power sensor is being used as a trigger See Using the power sensor as an external trigger on page 288 continuous update is not possible this setting is ignored Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt UPDate STATe on page 832 Select Selects the individual power sensor for usage if power measurement is generally activa ted State function The detected serial numbers of the power sensors connected to the instrument are provided in a selection list For each of the four available power sensor indexes Power Sensor 1 Power Sensor 4 which correspond to the tabs in the configuration dialog one of the detected serial numbers can be assigned The physical sensor is thus assigned to the configuration setting for the selected power sensor index By default serial numbers not yet assigned are automatically assigned to the next free power sensor index for which Auto Assignment is selected Alternatively you can assign
178. by red display lines This provides a very good overview of the measurement MultiView Ref Level 1 Att 1 Harmonic CF 799 99997502 MHz 10 tpts 79 5 ms 2 Result Summary 1st Harmonic Freq 799 9999750 MHz THD 0 67 43 50 dB N Frequency Power No Frequency Power 1 79 iHz 12 35 dBm 4 800000 GHz 10 MHz 64 70 dBc 43 91 dBc GHz 65 12 dBc 57 16 dBc 8 3Hz 65 98 dBc 65 47 dBc 9 GHz 65 26 dBc 66 08 dBc 10 8 000000 GHz 10 MHz 64 40 dBc In addition a result table is displayed providing the following information e First harmonic frequency e THD total harmonic distortion relative and absolute values e For each detected harmonic Frequency RBW Power E SSS User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 230 R amp S FSW Measurements 5 9 4 Harmonic Distortion Measurement Remote commands The results can also be queried using remote commands The first harmonic frequency can be read out via the general center frequency command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CENTer on page 762 THD CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion HARMonics DISTortion on page 731 List of harmonics CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion HARMonics LIST on page 731 Harmonic Distortion Configuration Harmonic Distortion measurements are selected via the Harmonic Distortion button in the Select Measurement dialog box The measurement is started immediately with the default settings It can be co
179. case the probe must be connected to the BASEBAND INPUT connector and the input is redirected to the RF input path see chapter 6 2 1 2 RF Input from the Analog Baseband Connector on page 275 As opposed to common RF input processing a transducer is activated before the common process to compensate for the additional path of the redirected signal Probe signals that are redirected to the RF input path can also be analyzed in the Spectrum application of the R amp S FSW base unit Then you can perform RF measurements measurements in the time or frequency domain on the input from a probe N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 276 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings 6 2 1 4 6 2 1 5 Data Input and Output Microbutton action You can define an action to be performed by the R amp S FSW when the probe s microbutton if available is pressed Currently a single data acquisition via the probe can be per formed simply by pressing the microbutton Impedance and attenuation The measured signal from the probe is attenuated internally by the probe s specific attenuation For probe signals that are redirected to the RF path the attenuation is com pensated using a transducer see Frequency sweep measurements on probe input on page 276 The reference level is adjusted automatically For analog baseband input the attenuation is compensated without a transducer In this case higher levels are available for the fullscale level
180. cccceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeenaes 395 Resetting the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Auto 395 Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual 0cee 395 Upper Level FYSICKSSIS niiina aa a a a aa aa aaa a a 395 Lower Level Hysteresis oeccrcrccnccnconiitii anii E E EEEE 396 Adjusting all Determinable Settings Automatically Auto All Activates all automatic adjustment functions for the current measurement settings This includes E MN User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 394 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings SSS EES SSSS EEEEEE _ as Adjusting Settings Automatically e Auto Frequency e Auto Level Remote command SENSe ADJust ALL on page 792 Adjusting the Center Frequency Automatically Auto Freq This function adjusts the center frequency automatically The optimum center frequency can be determined as the highest frequency level in the frequency span As this function uses the signal counter it is intended for use with sinus oidal signals Remote command SENSe ADJust FREQuency on page 794 Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level Automatically determines the optimal reference level for the current input data At the same time the internal attenuators and the preamplifier for analog baseband input the fullscale level are adjusted so the signal to noise ratio is optimized while signal com pression clipping
181. centered around the center frequency is defined as the reference range for all other ranges in the sweep list All range limits are defined in relation to the reference range Power levels in the result table are also calculated in relation to the reference range You can define whether the power used for reference is the peak power level or the integrated power of the reference range In the Sweep List the reference range is highlighted in blue and cannot be deleted Rules The following rules apply to ranges e The minimum span of a range is 20 Hz e The individual ranges must not overlap but may have gaps e The maximum number of ranges is 30 in frimware versions lt 1 60 20 ranges e The minimum number of ranges is 3 e The reference range cannot be deleted e The reference range has to be centered on the center frequency e The minimum span of the reference range is given by the current TX Bandwidth e Frequency values for each range have to be defined relative to the center frequency In order to change the start frequency of the first range or the stop frequency of the last range select the appropriate span with the SPAN key If you set a span that is smaller than the overall span of the ranges the measurement includes only the ranges that lie within the defined span and have a minimum span of 20 Hz The first and last ranges are adapted to the given span as long as the minimum span of 20 Hz is not violated Symmetrical ra
182. cer see chapter 4 5 1 The Sequencer Concept on page 96 Remote command INITiate CONTinuous on page 634 Continue Single Sweep After triggering repeats the number of sweeps set in Sweep Count without deleting the trace of the last measurement While the measurement is running the Continue Single Sweep softkey and the RUN SINGLE key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the highlighted softkey or key again Remote command INITiate CONMeas on page 634 __L_L_L__L_LL___ ee SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSaaSSSL _ _aS_aa_ 5 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 373 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings ee Bandwidth Filter and Sweep Configuration Spectrogram Frames These settings are only available if spectrogram display is active see chapter 7 3 3 2 How to Display and Configure a Spectrogram on page 430 Select frame Spectrogram Frames Selects a specific frame and loads the corresponding trace from the memory Note that activating a marker or changing the position of the active marker automatically selects the frame that belongs to that marker This function is available in single sweep mode or if the sweep is stopped The most recent frame is number 0 all previous frames have a negative number For more information see Time Frames on page 413 Remote command CALCulate SGRam FRAMe SELect on page 846 Continue Frame Spectrogram Frames Determines whether the re
183. cer on page 687 Limit Check 1 4 Sets the type of limit check for all ranges For details on limit checks see chapter 5 5 4 2 Limit Lines in SEM Measurements on page 169 The limit state affects the availability of all limit settings Depending on the number of active power classes see chapter 5 5 5 3 Power Classes on page 179 the number of limits that can be set varies Up to four limits are possible The sweep list is extended accordingly Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe LIMit lt PClass gt STATe on page 685 CALCulate LIMit lt k gt FAIL on page 905 Abs Limit Start Stop Sets an absolute limit value at the start or stop frequency of the range dBm Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt LIMit lt PClass gt ABSolute STARt on page 681 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt LIMit lt PClass gt ABSolute STOP on page 681 Rel Limit Start Stop Sets a relative limit value at the start or stop frequency of the range dBc E a N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 176 R amp S FSW Measurements Spectrum Emission Mask SEM Measurement By default this value is a fixed relative level i e no function is defined To define a function for the relative limit tap the input field for Rel Limit Start or Rel Limit Stop and select the f x icon that appears Function for Lim p s 50 0 dBc 13 0 dBm If the function is set to MAX
184. ct Amplitude from the Overview e Select Input Frontend from the Overview and then switch to the Amplitude tab e Select the AMPT key and then the Amplitude Config softkey The remote commands required to define these settings are described in chap ter 11 7 3 1 Amplitude Settings on page 774 Amplitude Reference Level Input Settings Value 0 0 dBm a Offset 0 0 dB Input Coupling Unit I d Auto Level ga Mechanical Attenuation Electronic Attenuation State Mode Mode 10 0 dB Value User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 355 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings EE EE _ gt gt x _ gt EE_E gt gt E gt _E _E_ __ S S SS _ _ S E E E m Sy Amplitude and Vertical Axis Configuration Reference OVS sc veiccacacevavacscdescvsstascdcccenvstaticeccusnts dudeceudhtelacccendatadacesendgtatadeeertrteiadeees 356 L Shifting the Display RI 0525 sascnyerstisa Manca ansenaacdedssnansaaeveransve tan dledanes 356 PAN catia cheer nex E eae roan atime E 357 L Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto LeVel cccccesccsesceesneees 357 RFAAI ssa facta casas nacddeseptvtaddetesebvlidaedaceveeddadecaisa AAN N 357 L Attenuation Mode ValUC cccccssescscsessscscesesescssseseseseececsnssessseseseseseecseseeceees 357 Using Electronic Attenuation Option B25 cc cc cceeecesiscneeesecasipenscescieaeeevecssieeneeestes 358
185. ct Generator Type SMU06 Select Reference External to synchronize the analyzer with the generator Switch to the Measurement Configuration sub tab Set the Source State to On Define the generator output level as the Source Power 20 dBm 10 Set the Coupling State to Auto The Result Frequency Start value for the generator is indicated as 100 0 MHz The Result Frequency Stop value is indicated as 300 0 MHz 11 Switch to the Source Calibration sub tab 12 Select the Source Calibration Type Transmission to perform a calibration sweep and store a reference trace for the measurement setup MultiView Spectrum Ref Level 0 00 dBm Att 4 Ext TG 20 1 Frequency Swe 100 0 MHz 1001 pts 20 0 MHz 300 0 MHz Fig 6 7 Measurement results from generator analyzer and connecting cables 13 Select Source Calibration Normalize On to set the measurement results for the current setup to 0 thus eliminating all effects from the generator the analyzer and User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 313 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings bo 3 Data Input and Output the connecting cables from subsequent measurements with the band elimination fil ter The reference line is displayed at 0 dB at the top of the diagram 100 MultiView 38 Spectrum Ref Level 0 0 RBW 2 MHz Att SWT Sms VBW 2MHz Mode Auto Sweep m NOR Ex 1 Frequency Sweep 100 0 MHz 1001 pts 20 0 MHz 300 0 MHZ Fig 6
186. cteris tics of the measured signal See also chapter 5 13 3 2 Detectors and Dwell Time on page 252 5 13 3 8 Limit Checks General limit line functionality is provided by the R amp S FSW base unit The base unit also provides various predefined limit lines that you can use for various applications The R amp S FSW EMI measurement adds further predefined limit lines designed in compliance with several EMC standards When using limit lines in combination with EMI measurements the marker levels from the initial measurement are compared to the limit line values The result of the limit line check is displayed in the diagram as usual In the EMI Result Summary the limit check is based on the results of the final test Since the marker may be determined using a different detector than the final test results the two limit check results may differ The difference between the limit line and the measured value is colored to indicate the following states e green does not exceed limit e yellow within margin e red exceeds limit For more information on using limit lines see chapter 7 5 2 Basics on Limit Lines on page 475 5 13 4 EMI Measurement Configuration On the R amp S FSW EMI measurement configuration consists of the following settings most of which are accessible from the main EMI menu This menu is displayed when you select the EMI measurement and then press the MEAS CONFIG key User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 259 R amp
187. ctions can be switched on at a time When a statistic function is switched on the R amp S FSW is set into zero span mode automatically The R amp S FSW measures the statistics of the signal applied to the RF input with the defined analysis bandwidth To avoid affecting the peak amplitudes the video bandwidth is auto matically set to 10 times the analysis bandwidth The sample detector is used for detect ing the video voltage User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 208 R amp S FSW Measurements Statistical Measurements APD CCDF Statistic measurements on pulsed signals can be performed using a gated trigger For details see chapter 5 7 4 APD and CCDF Basics Gated Triggering on page 212 5 7 2 Typical Applications Digital modulated signals are similar to white noise within the transmit channel but are different in their amplitude distribution In order to transmit the modulated signal without distortion all amplitudes of the signal have to be transmitted linearly from the output power amplifier Most critical are the peak amplitude values Degradation in transmit quality caused by a transmitter two port network is dependent on the amplitude of the peak values as well as on their probability If modulation types are used that do not have a constant envelope in zero span the transmitter has to handle peak amplitudes that are greater than the average power This includes all modulation types that involve amplitude modulation QPSK for examp
188. cy of the signal The allowed range of values for the center frequency depends on the frequency span span gt 0 Spanmin 2 s foenter lt fmax T Spanmin 2 zero span 0 HZ lt foenter S fmax fmax and SpanNmin are specified in the data sheet Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 762 Span Defines the frequency span The center frequency is kept constant The following range is allowed User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 348 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings w 5 5 8 Frequency and Span Configuration span 0 0 Hz span gt 0 Spanmin f span f max fmax and span i are specified in the data sheet For more information see chapter 6 3 1 1 Defining the Scope of the Measurement Frequency Range on page 345 Remote command SENSe FREQuency SPAN on page 765 Start Stop Defines the start and stop frequencies The following range of values is allowed fmin fstart fmax Span min fmin T SPanmin s fstop s fmax fmin fmax aNd SpanNmin are Specified in the data sheet Remote command SENSe FREQuency STARt on page 765 SENSe FREQuency STOP on page 765 Frequency Axis Scaling Switches between linear and logarithmic scaling for the frequency axis By default the frequency axis has linear scaling Logarithmic scaling of the frequency axis however is common for EMI measurements over large frequency ranges as it enhances the resolution of the lower frequenc
189. d Adjacent Channel Power ACLR Measurement MultiView Spectrum Ref Level 40 00 dBm x 0dB SWT ise CF 1 0 GHZ 2 Result Summary Channel Bandwidth Tx Tota Sweep Time 250 0 kHz Span 2 5 MHz Power 90 84 dBm 90 84 dBm Fig 5 10 Measurement of the R amp S FSW s intrinsic noise power in a 1 23 MHz channel bandwidth 5 2 8 Reference Predefined CP ACLR Standards When using predefined standards for ACLR measurement the test parameters for the channel and adjacent channel measurements are configured automatically You can select a predefined standard via the CP ACLR Standard softkey in the Ch Power menu or the selection list in the General Settings tab of the ACLR Setup dialog box see Standard on page 121 Table 5 2 Predefined CP ACLR standards with remote command parameters Standard Remote parameter None NONE Multi Standard Radio MSR EUTRA LTE Square EUTRa EUTRA LTE Square RRC REUTra W CDMA 3GPP FWD FW3Gppcdma W CDMA 3GPP REV RW3Gppcdma CDMA IS95A FWD F8CDma CDMA IS95A REV R8 amp CDma CDMA IS95C Class 0 FWD FIS95cO CDMA IS95C Class 0 REV RIS95cO CDMA J STD008 FWD F19Cdma CDMA J STD008 REV R19Cdma User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 153 R amp S FSW Measurements a a ed Carrier to Noise Measurements Standard Remote parameter CDMA IS95C Class 1 FWD FIS95c1 CDMA IS95C Class 1
190. d is calculated as follows channel power density channel power log channel bandwidth Thus you can measure the signal noise power density for example or use the additional functions Absolute and Relative Values ACLR Mode and Reference Channel to obtain the signal to noise ratio Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer RESult PHZ on page 665 N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 134 R amp S FSW Measurements 5 2 5 2 Channel Power and Adjacent Channel Power ACLR Measurement Power Mode The measured power values can be displayed directly for each trace Clear Write or only the maximum values over a series of measurements can be displayed Max Hold In the latter case the power values are calculated from the current trace and compared with the previous power value using a maximum algorithm The higher value is retained If Max Hold mode is activated Pwr Max is indicated in the table header Note that the trace mode remains unaffected by this setting Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer MODE on page 639 Optimized Settings Adjust Settings All instrument settings for the selected channel setup channel bandwidth channel spac ing can be optimized automatically The adjustment is carried out only once If necessary the instrument settings can be changed later The following settings are optimized by Adjust Settings Frequency Span
191. d the drop out time Defining a dropout time helps you stabilize triggering when the analyzer is triggering on undesired events vy T Drop Out Fig 6 25 Effect of the trigger drop out time See Drop Out Time on page 388 Trigger Holdoff The trigger holdoff defines a waiting period before the next trigger after the current one will be recognized Frame 1 Frame 2 Holdoff Fig 6 26 Effect of the trigger holdoff See Trigger Holdoff on page 388 Gated Measurements Like a gate provides an opening in a fence a gated measurement lets data from the input signal pass in defined areas only The gate controls exactly when data is included in the measurement results and when not The gate is opened by the trigger source which is also the gate source Gates can be used in two different modes p S User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 379 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings e a e Trigger and Gate Configuration e Level The gate opens and the measurement starts when a defined level in the gate source is exceeded and stops when the gate source drops below the Gate Level Using a pulsed gate signal in level mode the following behaviour can be achieved When the gate source signal is active the input signal data is collected when the gate signal is inactive the input signal is ignored e Edge The gate opens and the measurement starts when a defined level in the gate source is
192. d used for precise power measurement as a trigger or both All power sensors can be activated and deactivated individually The following procedure describes in detail how to configure and activate power sensors 1 To display the Power Sensor tab of the Input dialog box do one of the following e Select Input from the Overview e Select the INPUT OUTPUT key and then the Power Sensor Config softkey 2 Select the tab for the power sensor index you want to configure e g Sensor 1 _L_L_L LLL a N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 289 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings 10 11 12 Data Input and Output Press Select to analyze the power sensor data according to the current configura tion when power measurement is activated From the selection list with serial numbers of connected power sensors select the sensor you want to configure To have newly connected power sensors assigned to a tab automatically default select Auto Define the frequency of the signal whose power you want to measure a To define the frequency manually select Frequency Manual and enter a fre quency b Todetermine the frequency automatically select Frequency Coupling and then either Center to use the center frequency or Marker to use the frequency defined by marker 1 Select the unit for the power result display Select the measurement time for which the average is calculated or define the num be
193. dance 50 Q or 75 Q see Impedance on page 280 conversion to other units is possible The following units are available and directly convertible dBm dBmvV dBuV dBA dBpW Volt Ampere Watt Remote command INPut IMPedance on page 797 CALCulate lt n gt UNIT POWer on page 775 Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level Reference Level Automatically determines the optimal reference level for the current input data At the same time the internal attenuators and the preamplifier for analog baseband input the fullscale level are adjusted so the signal to noise ratio is optimized while signal com pression clipping and overload conditions are minimized In order to do so a level measurement is performed to determine the optimal reference level You can change the measurement time for the level measurement if necessary see Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual on page 395 Remote command SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 795 RF Attenuation Defines the attenuation applied to the RF input Attenuation Mode Value RF Attenuation The RF attenuation can be set automatically as a function of the selected reference level Auto mode This ensures that the optimum RF attenuation is always used It is the default setting By default and when Using Electronic Attenuation Option B25 is not available mechanical attenuation is applied In Manual mode you can set the RF attenuation i
194. dards To keep measurement times brief the R amp S FSW performs a final measurement only on frequencies you have marked with a marker or delta marker You can assign a different detector to every marker and thus test a particular frequency easily for compliance Optionally you can activate continuous demodulation of the signal during the initial mea surement and at the peak marker positions during the final test After the final measurement you can check the signal levels against specified limits EMI Measurement Results As the result of an R amp S FSW EMI measurement the measured signal levels and active markers are displayed in a Spectrum diagram L L CF 13 25 GHz 1001 pts 2 65 GHz Span 26 5 GHz 2 Result Summary h Type Rer Trace Value V Valiie Final Test tine Name ALimit Final Resutt 13 197 GHz 25 87 dBm ISPF J _ 7 17 221 GHz 47 77 dBm 5 255 GHz 75 28 dBm 21 192 GHz 75 42 dBm ISF 25 587 GHz 94 15 dBm cist 3 Marker Table Type Rer Tre Kvale v valiie Function Finetion Result Mi 1 13 197 GHz 25 87 dBm 17 221 GHz 47 77 dBm 5 255 GHz 75 28 dBm 21 192 GHz 75 42 dBm 25 587 GHz 94 15 dBm Fig 5 23 EMI measurement results E SS MN User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 250 R amp S FSW Measurements 5 13 3 Electromagnetic Interference EMI Measurement R amp S FSW K54 Initial peak search results Marker Table As a result of the initial peak search the active markers are set to the positive peaks of the
195. defined using limit lines Limit lines allow you to check the measured data against specified limit values Generally it is pos sible to define limit lines for any measurement in the Spectrum application using the LINES key For SEM measurements however special limit lines are available via the Sweep List and it is strongly recommended that you use only these limit line definitions In the Sweep List you can define a limit line for each power class that varies its level according to the specified frequency ranges Distinguished limit lines _SEM_LINE_ABS lt 0 3 gt SEM_LINE_REL lt 0 3 gt are automatically defined for each power class according to the current Sweep List settings every time the settings change The limit line defined for the currently used power class is indicated by a red line in the display and the result of the limit check is indicated at the top of the diagram Note that only Pass or Fail is indicated a margin function as for general limit lines is not avail able MultiView Spectrum Ref Level 41 00 m Offset 40 00 dB Mode Auto Sweep 1 Spectrum Emission Mask CF 2 1 GHz 1001 pts 2 55 MHz 2 Result Summary Tx Power 30 54 dBm Tx Bandwidth 3 840 MHz RBW 1 000 MHz Range Low Range Up RBW Frequency Power Abs Power Rel Altimit 12 Hz 8 000 MHz 00 MHz 2 09053 GHz 40 68 dBm 71 22 dB 17 18 dB 2 09268 GHz 40 13 dBm 70 67 dB 20 63 dB 2 09647 GHz 52 60 dBm 83 14 dB 20 10 dB 2 09652 GHz 54 30 dBm
196. deviation from the TX channel power are displayed Values that exceed the limit are indicated in red and by an asterisk W CDMA 3GPP 31 39 dBm DL RBW 1 000 MHz Power Rel ALimit A2 Spectrum Emission Mask T 28 10 dBm Range Up 3 840 MH Frequency Tx Power Tx Bandwidth Power Abs REW User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 170 R amp S FSW Measurements Spectrum Emission Mask SEM Measurement 5 5 4 3 Although a margin functionality is not available for the limit check a margin threshold for the peak values to be displayed in the evaluation list can be defined in the list evalu ation settings For details see chapter 5 5 5 6 List Evaluation on page 184 Fast SEM Measurements In order to improve the performance of the R amp S FSW for spectrum emission mask meas urements a Fast SEM mode is available If this mode is activated several consecutive ranges with identical sweep settings are combined to one sweep internally which makes the measurement considerably more efficient The displayed results remain unchanged and still consist of several ranges Thus measurement settings that apply only to the results such as limits or transducer factors can nevertheless be defined individually for each range Prerequisites Fast SEM mode is available if the following criteria apply e The frequency ranges are consecutive without frequency gaps e The following sweep settings are identical for details see ch
197. diagram if activated can be defined Only peaks that exceed the margin value are displayed Remote command CALCulate lt n gt ESPectrum PSEarch PEAKsearch MARGin on page 695 Saving the Evaluation List Exports the evaluation list of the SEM measurement to an ASCII file for evaluation in an external application If necessary change the decimal separator for evaluation in other languages e UUM User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 184 R amp S FSW Measurements 5 5 6 Spectrum Emission Mask SEM Measurement Define the file name and storage location in the file selection dialog box that is displayed when you select the Save function For details see chapter 5 5 7 2 ASCII File Export Format Spectrum Emission Mask on page 194 Remote command MMEMory STORe LIST on page 926 FORMat DEXPort DSEParator on page 906 How to Perform a Spectrum Emission Mask Measurement SEM measurements can be performed according to a specific standard or freely config ured Configuration for signals with a very regular channel definition can be configured very quickly and easily Selecting the SEM measurement is a prerequisite for all other tasks For multi standard radio SEM measurements configuration for specified scenarios can be done automatically The following tasks are described e To select an SEM measurement on page 185 e To perform an SEM measurement according to a standard on page 185 e To configure a
198. djacent channels are of interest Up to 18 carrier channels and up to 12 adjacent channels can be defined When a measurement standard is selected in the Ch Power menu or the ACLR Setup dialog box all settings including the channel bandwidths and channel spacings are set according to the selected standard and can be adjusted afterwards Channel setup consists of the following settings The number of transmission Tx and adjacent channels The bandwidth of each channel For multicarrier ACLR measurements which Tx channel is used as a reference The spacing between the individual channels Optionally the names of the channels displayed in the diagram and result table Optionally the influence of individual channels on the total measurement result Weighting Filter Optionally limits for a limit check on the measured power levels Changes to an existing standard can be stored as a user defined standard see chap ter 5 2 6 4 How to Manage User Defined Configurations on page 146 gt In the Ch Power menu select the CP ACLR Config softkey then select the Channel Settings tab to configure the channels in the ACLR Setup dialog box independant of the defined number of used Tx or adjacent channels In the Channel Setup dialog box you can define the channel settings for all channels To define channel spacings Channel spacings are normally defined by the selected standard but can be changed gt In
199. ducer To change the unit Press the AMPT key then select the Amplitude Config softkey and in the Ampli tude dialog box select the required unit To select a transducer a Press the SETUP key b Select the Transducer softkey c Inthe Transducer dialog box set the View Filter to Show compatible to determine the available transducers for the current EMI measurement setup d Select a transducer line in the overview and select the Active setting for it Press the RUN SINGLE key to start a new EMI measurement If activated a peak search is performed For each active marker a final measurement is performed using the specified detector for the specified dwell time If activated the signal is demodulated at the active marker positions The specified traces to be checked are compared with the active limit lines The status of the limit check for the final measurement is indicated in the Result Summary 5 13 7 Measurement Example Measuring Radio Frequency Interference A common measurement task that you can do with the R amp S FSW EMI measurement is to detect radio frequency interference RFI or electromagnetic interferences EMI The measurement shows signal levels over a particular frequency range A typical fre quency range for EMI measurements is 150 kHz to 1 GHz As the captured signal char acteristics will most likely be unknown the best way to start the measurement is to preset the R amp S FSW and perform a
200. e Values on the y axis are normalized which means that the maximum value is 1 0 The minimum value must be in the range 1E 9 lt Y Min lt 0 1 The distance between Y max and Y min must be at least one decade Remote command CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe Y UPPer on page 718 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe Y LOWer on page 717 Default Settings Resets the x and y axis scalings to their preset values User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 218 R amp S FSW Measurements 5 7 6 Statistical Measurements APD CCDF x axis ref level 10 dBm x axis range APD 100 dB x axis range CCDF 20 dB y axis upper limit 1 0 y axis lower limit 1E 6 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt STATistics PRESet on page 716 Adjust Settings Adjusts the level settings according to the measured difference between peak and min imum power for APD measurement or peak and mean power for CCDF measurement in order to obtain maximum power resolution Adjusts the reference level to the current input signal Remote command CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe AUTO ONCE on page 716 How to Perform an APD or CCDF Measurement To start a basic statistic measurement 1 2 Press the MEAS key then select the APD or CCDF measurement Start a sweep As soon as the defined number of samples have been measured the statistical eval uation is displayed To perform a statistic measurement using gate ranges
201. e mixer type Remote command SENSe MIXer HARMonic TYPE on page 803 Range 1 2 Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration Enables the use of a second harmonic to cover the band s frequency range For each range you can define which harmonic to use and how the Conversion loss is handled Remote command SENSe MIXer HARMonic HIGH STATe on page 803 Harmonic Order Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration Defines which of the available harmonic orders of the LO is used to cover the frequency range By default the lowest order of the specified harmonic type is selected that allows con version of input signals in the whole band If due to the LO frequency the conversion is not possible using one harmonic the band is split For the band USER the order of harmonic is defined by the user The order of harmonic can be between 2 and 61 the lowest usable frequency being 26 5 GHz Remote command SENSe MIXer HARMonic LOW on page 804 SENSe MIXer HARMonic HIGH VALue on page 803 Conversion loss Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration Defines how the conversion loss is handled The following methods are available Average Defines the average conversion loss for the entire range in dB _ SL a N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 329 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output Table Defines the conversion loss via the table selected from the list Prede fined conversi
202. e the result can be displayed in any of the traces 1 to 3 Unwanted mixer products are suppressed in this calculated trace Note that automatic signal identification is only available for measurements that perform frequency sweeps not in vector signal analysis or the I Q Analyzer for instance See also Automatic Signal Identification on page 322 Remote command SENSe MIXer SIGNal on page 800 Auto ID Threshold Defines the maximum permissible level difference between test sweep and reference sweep to be corrected during automatic comparison Auto ID on page 331 function The input range is between 0 1 dB and 100 cB Values of about 10 dB i e default setting generally yield satisfactory results See also Automatic Signal Identification on page 322 Remote command SENSe MIXer THReshold on page 800 Bias Settings Define the bias current for each range which is required to set the mixer to its optimum operating point It corresponds to the short circuit current The bias current can range from 10 mA to 10 mA The actual bias current is lower because of the forward voltage of the mixer diode s E SSS User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 331 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings a a SS eS ee ee Data Input and Output The trace is adapted to the settings immediately so you can check the results To store the bias setting in the currently selected conversion loss table select the Write to lt CVL tabl
203. e transmission channel If more than one Tx channel is defined you must select which one is to be used as a reference channel Tx Channel 1 Transmission channel 1 is used Not available for MSR ACLR Min Power Tx Channel The transmission channel with the lowest power is used as a reference channel Max Power Tx Channel The transmission channel with the highest power is used as a reference channel Default Lowest amp Highest The outer left hand transmission channel is the reference channel for the lower Channel adjacent channels the outer right hand transmission channel that for the upper adjacent channels Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence TXCHannel MANual on page 650 SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence TXCHannel AUTO on page 650 Noise cancellation The results can be corrected by the instrument s inherent noise which increases the dynamic range In this case a reference measurement of the instrument s inherent noise is carried out The measured noise power is then subtracted from the power in the channel that is being analyzed first active trace only LSS a M User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 133 R amp S FSW Measurements a SS SS a a Channel Power and Adjacent Channel Power ACLR Measurement The inherent noise of the instrument depends on the selected center frequency resolu tion bandwidth and level setting Therefore the correction function is disabled whe
204. e R amp S FSW can measure the next sweep point For generators with a TTL interface the R amp S FSW sends a list of the frequencies to be set to the generator before the beginning of the first sweep Then the R amp S FSW starts the sweep and the next frequency point is selected by both the R amp S FSW and the gen erator using the TTL handshake line TRIGGER The R amp S FSW can only measure a value when the generator signals the end of the setting procedure via the BLANK signal Using the TTL interface allows for considerably higher measurement rates than pure GPIB control because the frequency stepping of the R amp S FSW is directly coupled with the frequency stepping of the generator _L_L_L_L_L LLLL_LE E User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 300 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output Reverse sweep The frequency offset for automatic coupling can be used to sweep in the reverse direction To do so define a negative offset in the external generator measurement configuration Note that the frequency is defined as the unsigned value of the equation thus a negative frequency is not possible Example Example for reverse sweep FanalyzerStat 100 MHz F analyzerStop 200 MHz Fofiset 300 MHz Numerator Denominator 1 gt F GeneratorStartt 200 MHz gt F Generatorstop 100 MHz If the offset is adjusted so that the sweep of the generator crosses the minimum generator frequency a message is displ
205. e Sequencer activates that channel and only for a channel defined sequence In this case a channel in single sweep mode is swept only once by the Sequencer Furthermore the RUN SINGLE key on the front panel controls the Sequencer not indi vidual sweeps RUN SINGLE starts the Sequencer in single mode If the Sequencer is off only the evaluation for the currently displayed measurement channel is updated For details on the Sequencer see chapter 4 5 1 The Sequencer Concept on page 96 Remote command INITiate IMMediate on page 635 Continuous Sweep RUN CONT After triggering starts the sweep and repeats it continuously until stopped This is the default setting While the measurement is running the Continuous Sweep softkey and the RUN CONT key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the highlighted softkey or key again The results are not deleted until a new measurement is started Note Sequencer If the Sequencer is active the Continuous Sweep softkey only con trols the sweep mode for the currently selected channel however the sweep mode only has an effect the next time the Sequencer activates that channel and only for a channel defined sequence In this case a channel in continuous sweep mode is swept repeatedly Furthermore the RUN CONT key on the front panel controls the Sequencer not individ ual sweeps RUN CONT starts the Sequencer in continuous mode For details on the Sequen
206. e a standard CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer STANdard DELete on page 644 Number of Channels Tx ADJ Up to 18 carrier channels and up to 12 adjacent channels can be defined Results are provided for the Tx channel and the number of defined adjacent channels above and below the Tx channel If more than one Tx channel is defined the carrier channel to which the relative adjacent channel power values should be referenced must be defined see Reference Channel on page 123 Note If several carriers Tx channels are activated for the measurement the number of sweep points is increased to ensure that adjacent channel powers are measured with adequate accuracy For more information on how the number of channels affects the measured powers see chapter 5 2 2 Channel Power Results on page 107 Remote command Number of Tx channels SENSe POWer ACHannel TXCHannel COUNt on page 648 Number of Adjacent channels SENSe POWer ACHannel ACPairs on page 645 Reference Channel The measured power values in the adjacent channels can be displayed relative to the transmission channel If more than one Tx channel is defined you must select which one is to be used as a reference channel Tx Channel 1 Transmission channel 1 is used Not available for MSR ACLR Min Power Tx Channel The transmission channel with the lowest power is used as a reference channel Max Power Tx Channel T
207. e name gt button Remote command SENSe MIXer BIAS LOW on page 799 SENSe MIXer BIAS HIGH on page 799 Write to lt CVL table name gt lt Bias Settings Stores the bias setting in the currently selected Conversion loss table for the range see Managing Conversion Loss Tables on page 332 If no conversion loss table is selected yet this function is not available CVL Table not selected Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL BIAS on page 806 Managing Conversion Loss Tables In this tab you configure and manage conversion loss tables Conversion loss tables consist of value pairs that describe the correction values for conversion loss at certain frequencies The correction values for frequencies between the reference points are obtained via interpolation The currently selected table for each range is displayed at the top of the dialog box All conversion loss tables found in the instrument s C r_s instr user cvl directory are listed in the Modify Tables list Frequency Basic Settings Mixer Settings Conversion Loss Table External Mixer Digital IQ Modify Tables NENT Ea NE E E S LO 333 Edit Taea nea a N a A aaa M aa A a Mens tauealene 333 PASIS 0 E a a ee en ee AON 333 Impor TaD ccetccssssce ceeds Wayasacee daatedeseccssaqunctuncsaayanaceaucnave dace edsaadandeuccssaadnchawdnetaadedsddgens 333 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 332 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings Data In
208. e normalized trace in the display The normalized reference trace is also displayed in the spectrum diagram by default at the top of the diagram 100 of the window height It is indicated by a red line labeled NOR followed by the current reference value However it can be shifted vertically to reflect an attenuation or gain caused by the measured DUT see also Shifting the ref erence line and normalized trace on page 298 Restoring the calibration settings If the measurement settings no longer match the instrument settings with which the cal ibration was performed indicated by the APX or no label next to Ext TG in the channel bar you can restore the calibration settings which are stored with the reference dataset on the R amp S FSW Storing the normalized reference trace as a transducer factor The inverse normalized reference trace can also be stored as a transducer factor for use in other R amp S FSW applications that do not support external generator control The DN User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 297 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings EE eEeE gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt E gt E gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt SSSSSSSSS___ _ ____E E E EEE ES sy Data Input and Output normalized trace data is converted to a transducer with unit dB and stored in a file with the specified name and the suffix trd under c r_s instr trd The frequenc
209. e required for the measurement Allowed values depend on the ratio of span to RBW and RBW to VBW If the selected sweep time is too short for the selected bandwidth and span level mea surement errors will occur In this case the R amp S FSW displays the error message Sweep time too low and marks the indicated sweep time with a red bullet Furthermore a status bit indicates an error see STATus QUEStionable TIMe Register on page 582 The sweep time can be coupled to the span not zero span video bandwidth VBW and resolution bandwidth RBW automatically If the span resolution bandwidth or video bandwidth is changed the sweep time is automatically adjusted How Much Data is Measured Sweep Points and Sweep Count By default 1001 data points are determined in a single sweep During the next sweep 1001 new data points are collected and so on The number of sweep points defines how much of the entire span is covered by a single data point By increasing the number of sweep points you can increase the reliability of the individual data points and thus the accuracy of the analyzed results However these data points are all stored on the instru ment occupying a large amount of memory and each sweep point increases the overall measurement time Up to 200 000 points can be swept at once The number of sweeps to be performed in single sweep mode is defined by the Sweep Count Values from 0 to 32767 are allowed If the values 0 or 1 are
210. e signal applied to one of the TRIGGER INPUT con nectors or the internal IF power detector controls the sweep of the analyzer Gate Mode lt Gate Settings Sets the gate mode For more information see chapter 6 6 1 2 Gated Measurements on page 379 Edge The gate opens and the measurement starts when a defined level in the gate source is exceeded and stops when the defined Gate Length is reached Lvl The gate opens and the measurement starts when a defined level in the gate source is exceeded and stops when the gate source drops below the Trigger Level This mode is not supported when using R amp S Power Sensors as power triggers Trg Gate Source Power Sensor or External Remote command SENSe SWEep EGATe TYPE on page 789 Gate Delay Gate Settings Defines the delay time between the gate signal and the continuation of the measurement The delay position on the time axis in relation to the sweep is indicated by a line labeled GD As a common input signal is used for both trigger and gate when selecting the Exter nal or IF Power trigger source changes to the gate delay will affect the trigger delay Trigger Offset as well E a N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 390 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings Trigger and Gate Configuration For more information see chapter 6 6 1 2 Gated Measurements on page 379 Remote command SENSe SWEep EGATe HOLDoff on page 787
211. e sweep mode for a slightly smaller mea surement range Remote command SENSe SWEep OPTimize on page 771 Sweep Type Defines the sweep type Auto Automatically sets the fastest available sweep type for the current mea surement Frequency or FFT Auto mode is set by default FFT The FFT sweep samples on a defined frequency value and transforms it to the spectrum by fast Fourier transformation FFT see also Opti mization on page 372 FFT is not available in the following cases e when using 5 Pole filters Channel filters or RRC filters e when using the Quasi peak detector e when an external generator option B10 is active In these cases frequency sweep is used Remote command SENSe SWEep TYPE on page 773 D User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 372 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings SS SSS a a a Bandwidth Filter and Sweep Configuration Single Sweep RUN SINGLE After triggering starts the number of sweeps set in Sweep Count The measurement stops after the defined number of sweeps has been performed While the measurement is running the Single Sweep softkey and the RUN SINGLE key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the highligh ted softkey or key again Note Sequencer If the Sequencer is active the Single Sweep softkey only controls the sweep mode for the currently selected channel however the sweep mode only has an effect the next time th
212. e the required bandwidth User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 117 R amp S FSW Measurements SS SS a a a a aa a a a Channel Power and Adjacent Channel Power ACLR Measurement CACLR channels If two or more subblocks are defined the power in the gaps between the subblocks must also be measured referred to as the Cumulative Adjacent Channel Leakage Ratio CACLR power According to the MSR standard the CACLR is measured in the two channels for the upper and lower gap thus referred to as CACLR channels The power in the CACLR channels is then set in relation to the power of the two closest transmission channels to either side of the gap CACLR channels are defined using bandwidths and spacings relative to the outer edges of the surrounding subblocks Since the upper and lower CACLR channels are identical only two channels must be configured The required spacing can be determined accord ing to the following formula indicated for lower channels Spacing CF of the gap channel left subblock center RF bandwidth of left sub block 2 Adjacent channels Adjacent channels are defined as in common ACLR measurements using bandwidths and spacings however relative to the start and stop frequency of the total block of trans mit channels e The spacing of the lower adjacent channels refers to the CF of the first Tx channel in the first subblock e The spacing of the upper adjacent channels refers to the CF of the last Tx
213. e the required order A remote command example for defining parameters and ranges in Spurious Emissions measurements is described in chapter 11 5 7 6 Programming Example Spurious Emis sions Measurement on page 709 5 6 3 2 Limit Lines in Spurious Measurements Limit lines allow you to check the measured data against specified limit values Generally it is possible to define limit lines for any measurement in the Spectrum application using the LINES key For Spurious measurements however a special limit line is available via the Sweep List and it is strongly recommended that you use only this limit line definition In the Sweep List you can define a limit line that varies its level according to the specified frequency ranges A distinguished limit line _SPURIOUS_LINE_ ABS is automatically defined according to the current Sweep List settings every time the settings change If a limit check is activated in the Sweep List the SPURIOUS _LINE ABS limit line is indicated by a red line in the display and the result of the limit check is indicated at the top of the diagram Note that only Pass or Fail is indicated a margin function as for general limit lines is not available Also only absolute limits can be checked not relative ones E N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 198 R amp S FSW Measurements SSS eel S SESESE __ EE _E E_ _ _ _______ TT Spurious Emissions Measurement
214. ea sured Sweep Time on page 366 Remote command SENSe LIST RANGe lt range gt SWEep TIME AUTO on page 707 Sweep Time Sets the sweep time value for the range User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 201 R amp S FSW Measurements a SS SS es ee ee a ea Spurious Emissions Measurement For details on the sweep time see chapter 6 5 1 7 How Long the Data is Measured Sweep Time on page 366 Remote command SENSe LIST RANGe lt range gt SWEep TIME on page 707 Detector Sets the detector for the range For details refer to chapter 7 3 1 1 Mapping Samples to Sweep Points with the Trace Detector on page 406 Remote command SENSe LIST RANGe lt range gt DETector on page 702 Ref Level Sets the reference level for the range For details on the reference level see chapter 6 4 1 1 Reference Level on page 353 Remote command SENSe LIST RANGe lt range gt RLEVel on page 706 RF Att Mode Activates or deactivates the auto mode for RF attenuation For details on attenuation see chapter 6 4 1 2 RF Attenuation on page 354 Remote command SENSe LIST RANGe lt range gt INPut ATTenuation AUTO on page 704 RF Attenuator Sets the attenuation value for that range For details on attenuation see chapter 6 4 1 2 RF Attenuation on page 354 Remote command SENSe LIST RANGe lt range gt INPut ATTenuation on page 704 Preamp Switches t
215. eck the Result Summary to detect exceeded limit values Zoom into the diagram at the conspicuous frequency for more details If necessary decrease the span to the area in which irregular values occurred and repeat the measurement Optimizing and Troubleshooting EMI Measurements If the results do not meet your expectations try the following methods to optimize the measurement Number of sweep points The resolution bandwidth should cover at least one sweep point more is better If this condition is not met signals or interferences could be missed during refined measure ment of narrowband interferers See chapter 5 13 3 3 Frequency Resolution Sweep Points and Scaling on page 255 If the distance between two sweep points is larger than RBW 3 a warning is displayed in the status bar Increase sweep points or RBW __L_L_L_L_LLLLLSS_ M User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 271 Electromagnetic Interference EMI Measurement R amp S FSW K54 Dwell time Consider the following when defining the dwell time Unknown signals select a dwell time of at least 1 second to ensure that pulses down to a frequency of 5 Hz are weighted correctly Pulsed signals or signals that fluctuate slowly the dwell time must cover at least the time until the first signal peak is measured can require long dwell time unmodulated signals or signals with a high modulation frequency the dwell time must cover at least the time until the firs
216. ect the OBW measurement function from the Select Measurement dialog box Set the percentage of power to 99 Set the channel bandwidth to 21 kHz as specified by the PDC standard N OQ a e N Optimize the settings for the selected channel configuration by selecting Adjust Set tings 8 Adjust the reference level to the measured total power by selecting the Auto Level softkey in the AUTO SET menu 9 The PDC standard requires the peak detector for OBW measurement In the Traces configuration dialog set the trace detector to Positive Peak 10 Start a sweep The result is displayed as OBW in the marker results 5 5 Spectrum Emission Mask SEM Measurement The R amp S FSW supports Spectrum Emission Mask SEM measurements About the Measurement cccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeecesaeeaeeeeceeeeeeeeeeedeeeeeeaaeeeaeeeeeees 164 TYPICAl AP PUCBUOMNS sni ieena rdi andaina a ae saauadeaadashanadadaweanns 165 SEM ROSUNG coronna a a A A a Sa 165 SEM BASICS esc isn scansinastaatccavenceadvcsvesubdaddnsnncaade a aaa aaea aeaa 167 SEM Configuration 82a dee akties ents iaia aa 173 e How to Perform a Spectrum Emission Mask Measurement 2 0 ceceeeeeeeees 185 e Reference SEM File Descriptions ccccccccecceceeeeeeeeceeeeaaneeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeess 189 5 5 1 About the Measurement The Spectrum Emission Mask SEM measurement defines a measurement that moni tors compliance w
217. ed to a file which can be exported to another application for further analysis for example 1 Configure and perform an Spurious Emissions measurement as described in chap ter 5 6 5 How to Perform a Spurious Emissions Measurement on page 205 2 Select the Evaluations button in the Overview 3 If necessary change the Decimal Separator to COMMA for evaluation in other languages 4 Select the Save button 5 In the file selection dialog box select a storage location and file name for the result file 6 Select the Save button The file with the specified name and the extension dat is stored in the defined storage location 5 6 6 Reference ASCII Export File Format Spurious The file has a header containing important parameters for scaling several data sections containing the sweep settings per range and a data section containing the peak list __L_LL_L___L_LLS__ N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 206 R amp S FSW Measurements i a Spurious Emissions Measurement The header data is made up of three columns separated by with the syntax parameter name numeric value basic unit File contents Explanation File header Type FSW 26 Model Version 1 00 Firmware version Date 31 Mar 11 Storage date of data set Mode ANALYZER SPURIOUS Operating mode and measurement function Center Freq 13250000000 000000 Hz X axis settings Freq Offset 0 000000 Hz Span 264
218. eeded edyvdusile atengiel ented codcadhcite penncudienaines cedpidiseae T 136 L Subblock Center Frequency scccccccccccccsecesesescsesesesesesesesesesensseseeeseneees 137 sects cin ects eee ees 137 L Number of Tx Channels TX COunt cscscscsescecsescecseecsescecsescecsescecaescecseeeeeas 137 TX Channel Demmi i 2 i ci eicecee dent eeadeclect eens dace tay ce seeded nannini tances 137 EF Center aa ii casa natives aa e a aid 137 L Technology Used for Transmission ccssssssssssscscscecsescsesescseseetetsceecsneess 138 L Tx Channel Bandwidth canteen casineataicaa sac dadsdenatoaetspaceaonuuaaae 138 L Weighting FIHSrS ocni a i n 138 Subblock Definition Subblocks are groups of transmit channels in an MSR signal Up to 5 subblocks can be defined They are defined as an RF bandwidth around a center frequency with a specific number of transmit channels max 18 Subblocks are named A B C D E and are indicated by a slim blue bar along the frequency axis User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 136 R amp S FSW Measurements a SS SS SSS a Channel Power and Adjacent Channel Power ACLR Measurement Subblock Center Frequency Subblock Definition Defines the center of an MSR subblock Note that the position of the subblock also affects the position of the adjacent gap channels CACLR Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock lt sb gt FREQuency CENTer on page 662 RF Bandwidth Subblock Definition
219. eeeeeeeeees 225 Measurement EXAM Gi isani a des aavaveaece snandeadectiea iaaa 226 5 8 1 About the Measurement Using the Time Domain Power measurement function the R amp S FSW determines the power of the signal in zero span by summing up the power at the individual measurement points and dividing the result by the number of measurement points Thus it is possible to measure the power of TDMA signals during transmission for example or during the muting phase Both the mean power and the RMS power can be measured For this measurement the sample detector is activated 5 8 2 Time Domain Power Results Several different power results can be determined simultaneously Mode Description Peak Peak value from the points of the displayed trace or a segment thereof RMS RMS value from the points of the displayed trace or a segment thereof Mean Mean value from the points of the displayed trace or a segment thereof The linear mean value of the equivalent voltages is calculated For example to measure the mean power during a GSM burst Std Dev The standard deviation of the measurement points from the mean value The result is displayed in the marker results indicated by Power and the selected power mode e g RMS The measured values are updated after each sweep or averaged over a user defined number of sweeps trace averaging MultiView Spectrum Ref Level 0 00 dBm RBW 10 Att 10 dB SWT 640s VBW 10 TR
220. eep TiMe ccc eeecceceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeetseeaaeees 366 e How Much Data is Measured Sweep Points and Sweep Count eeee 366 e How Often Data is Measured Sweep MOde c cecceeeeeeeeeneeccecaeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 366 Separating Signals by Selecting an Appropriate Resolution Bandwidth The resolution bandwidth defines the 3 dB bandwidth of the resolution filter to be used An RF sinusoidal signal is displayed according to the passband characteristic of the res olution filter RBW i e the signal display reflects the shape of the filter A basic feature of a signal analyzer is being able to separate the spectral components of a mixture of signals The resolution at which the individual components can be separated is determined by the resolution bandwidth Selecting a resolution bandwidth that is too large may make it impossible to distinguish between spectral components i e they are displayed as a single component Smaller resolution bandwidths however increase the required measurement time E a A User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 362 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings 6 5 1 2 Bandwidth Filter and Sweep Configuration Two signals with the same amplitude can be resolved if the resolution bandwidth is smaller than or equal to the frequency spacing of the signal If the resolution bandwidth is equal to the frequency spacing the spectrum display screen shows a level drop of 3 dB precisely in the c
221. eiving Data Input and Providing Data Output eee eeeeceeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeees 275 Input Source Settings 2 cc cccei cscs cecaeeeninieeinaaseeneicealetieeteeatedennaas 279 POWOF SONSONS ensena e deste N NS 282 e External Generator Control Option R amp S FSW B10 essssssesseeirrssssessennnnssses 291 External Mixer Option R amp S FSW B21 sssssesssrrressessrnnnnnnrssnnnnaaaraennnnanannennnnaane 318 DUPUE SONNE cenres EE E R 341 6 2 1 Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output The R amp S FSW can analyze signals from different input sources and provide various types of output such as noise or trigger signals 6 2 1 1 RF Input Protection The RF input connector of the R amp S FSW must be protected against signal levels that exceed the ranges specified in the data sheet Therefore the R amp S FSW is equipped with an overload protection mechanism This mechanism becomes active as soon as the power at the input mixer exceeds the specified limit It ensures that the connection between RF input and input mixer is cut off When the overload protection is activated an error message is displayed in the status bar INPUT OVLD and a message box informs you that the RF Input was disconnec ted Furthermore a status bit bit 3 in the STAT QUES POW status register is set In this case you must decrease the level at the RF input connector and then close the message box Then measurement is possible again Reactivating the
222. el Power and Adjacent Channel Power ACLR Measurement can set the detector manually in the Traces configuration dialog box see Detector on page 419 Trace Averaging Averaging which is often performed to stabilize the measurement results leads to a level indication that is too low and should therefore be avoided The reduction in the displayed power depends on the number of averages and the signal characteristics in the channel to be measured The Adjust Settings function switches off trace averaging You can deactivate the trace averaging manually in the Traces configuration dialog box see Average Mode on page 420 Reference Level To achieve an optimum dynamic range the reference level has to be set such that the signal is as close to the reference level as possible without forcing an overload message or limiting the dynamic range by an S N ratio that is too small Since the measurement bandwidth for channel power measurements is significantly smaller than the signal band width the signal path may be overloaded although the trace is still significantly below the reference level automatic setting adjustment The reference level can be set automatically using the The reference level is not influenced by the selection of a predefined standard or by the Auto Level function in the AUTO SET menu or manually in the Amplitude menu 5 2 3 4 Measurement on Multi Standard Radio MSR Signals Modern base stations m
223. elect Measure ment dialog box The calculated AM Modulation Depth is indicated in the marker information The markers required for calculation are displayed in the marker table If the signal changes significantly during or after the AM Modulation Depth measure ment use the Search Signals function to start a new peak search automatically and restart the calculation of the AM Modulation Depth 5 12 Basic Measurements Basic measurements are common sweeps in the time or frequency domain which provide an overview of the basic input signal characteristics If no other measurement function is selected or if all measurement functions are switched off the R amp S FSW performs a basic frequency or time sweep After a preset a frequency sweep is performed Use the general measurement settings to configure the measurement e g via the Overview see chapter 6 Common Measurement Settings on page 273 5 12 1 How to Perform a Basic Sweep Measurement To perform one or more single sweeps 1 Configure the frequency and span to be measured Frequency dialog box see chapter 6 3 Frequency and Span Configuration on page 344 Configure the number of sweeps to be performed in a single measurement Sweep Config dialog box see Sweep Average Count on page 371 If necessary configure how the signal is processed internally Bandwidth dialog box see Sweep Type on page 372 If necessary configure a trigger for the meas
224. enerator is not possible e g due to a cable damage or loose connection or wrong address Ext Generator Limits Exceeded The allowed frequency or power ranges for the generator were exceeded Reverse Sweep via min Ext Generator Fre quency Reverse sweep is performed frequencies are reduced to the minimum frequency then increased again see Reverse sweep on page 301 Ext Generator File Syntax Error Syntax error in the generator setup file see Generator Setup Files on page 295 Ext Generator Command Error Missing or wrong command in the generator setup file see Generator Setup Files on page 295 Ext Generator Visa Error Error with Visa driver provided with installation very unlikely Overloading At a reference level of 10 dBm and at a external generator output level of the same value the R amp S FSW operates without overrange reserve That means the R amp S FSW is in dan ger of being overloaded if a signal is applied whose amplitude is higher than the reference line In this case either the message RF OVLD for overload or IF OVLD for exceeded display range clipping of the trace at the upper diagram border overrange is displayed in the status line Overloading can be avoided as follows e Reducing the output level of the external generator Source Power on page 306 in External Generator gt Measurement Configuration e Increasing the reference le
225. ent settings are changed again Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe AUTO ONCE on page 779 Scaling Defines the scaling method for the y axis User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 360 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings EEEEeE E Bandwidth Filter and Sweep Configuration For more information see chapter 6 4 1 3 Scaling on page 354 Logarithmic Logarithmic scaling only available for logarithmic units dB Linear Unit Linear scaling in the unit of the measured signal Linear Per Linear scaling in percentages from 0 to 100 cent Absolute The labeling of the level lines refers to the absolute value of the refer ence level not available for Linear Percent Relative The scaling is in dB relative to the reference level only available for logarithmic units dB The upper line of the grid reference level is always at 0 dB Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SPACing on page 780 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe MODE on page 780 6 4 4 How to Optimize the Amplitude Display This section gives you some advice on how to optimize the display of the measured signal amplitudes depending on the required evaluation 1 Perform a measurement with the default settings to get an impression of the values to be expected 2 Use the Auto Level function AUTO menu to optimize the reference level 3 Use the Auto Scale function AU
226. enter of the two signals Decreasing the resolution bandwidth makes the level drop larger which thus makes the individual signals clearer The highest sensitivity is obtained at the smallest bandwidth 1 Hz If the bandwidth is increased the reduction in sensitivity is proportional to the change in bandwidth Increas ing the bandwidth by a factor of 3 increases the displayed noise by approx 5 dB 4 77 dB precisely If the bandwidth is increased by a factor of 10 the displayed noise increa ses by a factor of 10 i e 10 dB If there are large level differences between signals the resolution is determined by selec tivity as well as by the resolution bandwidth that has been selected The measure of selectivity used for signal analyzers is the ratio of the 60 dB bandwidth to the 3 dB band width shape factor For the R amp S FSW the shape factor for bandwidths is lt 5 i e the 60 dB bandwidth of the 30 kHz filter is lt 150 kHz The higher spectral resolution with smaller bandwidths is won by longer sweep times for the same span The sweep time has to allow the resolution filters to settle during a sweep at all signal levels and frequencies to be displayed If the RBW is too large signal parts that are very far away e g from a different signal are considered in the measurement and distort the results The noise increases If the RBW is too small parts of the signal are lost As the displayed signal always reflects the shape of
227. ep Frequency Sweep Ref Level Center Source Input Level Offset Span Level Power Sensor Att Freq Offset Gated Trigger a z Ez Input Amplitude Frequency Trigger Gate E E EN Output Bandwidth Analysis Display Config Trai De or Dig BB Out Video Out Trigger Out S Marker 1 Limits Lines In addition to the main measurement settings the Overview provides quick access to the main settings dialog boxes Thus you can easily configure an entire measurement channel from input over processing to output and analysis by stepping through the dialog boxes as indicated in the Overview In particular the Overview provides quick access to the following configuration dialog boxes listed in the recommended order of processing 1 Select Measurement User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 273 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings SSS eee E Configuration Overview See chapter 5 1 Available Measurement Functions on page 101 2 Input See chapter 6 2 2 Input Source Settings on page 279 3 Amplitude See chapter 6 4 Amplitude and Vertical Axis Configuration on page 353 4 Frequency See chapter 6 3 Frequency and Span Configuration on page 344 5 Optionally Trigger Gate See chapter 6 6 Trigger and Gate Configuration on page 377 6 Bandwidth See chapter 6 5 2 Bandwidth Filter and Sweep Settings on page 367 For SEM measurements SEM Setup see chapter 5 5 5 SEM Configuration on pa
228. equency Stepsize The step size can be coupled to the span span gt 0 or the resolution bandwidth span 0 or it can be manually set to a fixed value For more details see chapter 6 3 1 2 Stepping Through the Frequency Range Center Frequency Stepsize on page 345 0 1 Span Sets the step size for the center frequency to 10 of the span RBW RBW This is the default setting 0 5 Span Sets the step size for the center frequency to 50 of the span RBW RBW X Span Sets the step size for the center frequency to a manually defined factor RBW of the span RBW The X Factor defines the percentage of the span RBW Values between 1 and 100 in steps of 1 are allowed The default setting is 10 Center Sets the step size to the value of the center frequency and removes the coupling of the step size to span or resolution bandwidth The used value is indicated in the Value field Marker This setting is only available if a marker is active Sets the step size to the value of the current marker and removes the coupling of the step size to span or resolution bandwidth The used value is indicated in the Value field Manual Defines a fixed step size for the center frequency Enter the step size in the Value field Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK on page 764 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK FACTor on page 764 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP on page 763
229. er Trigger Source Trigger Settings Defines triggering of the measurement via signals which are outside the displayed mea surement range For this purpose the instrument uses a level detector at the first intermediate frequency The input signal must be in the frequency range between 500 MHz and 8 GHz The resulting trigger level at the RF input depends on the RF attenuation and preamplification For details on available trigger levels see the data sheet Note If the input signal contains frequencies outside of this range e g for fullspan measurements the sweep may be aborted and a message indicating the allowed input frequencies is displayed in the status bar User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 386 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings a M ee ee a Trigger and Gate Configuration A Trigger Offset Trigger Polarity and Trigger Holdoff to improve the trigger stability can be defined for the RF trigger but no Hysteresis Remote command TRIG SOUR RFP see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 785 SWE EGAT SOUR RFP for gated triggering see SENSe SWEep EGATe SOURce on page 788 Power Sensor Trigger Source Trigger Settings Uses an external power sensor as a trigger source This option is only available if a power sensor is connected and configured See chapter 6 2 3 3 How to Work With a Power Sensor on page 289 If a power sensor is selected as the trigger mode the fol
230. er s input connector Never theless we are only interested in the effects of the DUT not those of the additional pro tective attenuator Thus we will compensate these effects in the result display on the R amp S FSW by moving the reference line 1 Connect a 3 dB attenuator between the band elimination filter output and the RF INPUT connector on the R amp S FSW The measurement results are now 3 dB lower MultiView 2 Spectrum Ref Level RBW 2 MHz Att SWT 3ms VBW 2MHz Mode Auto Sweep NOR Ext TG 1 Frequency Sweep 100 0 MHz 1001 pts 20 0 MHz 300 0 MHz Fig 6 11 Measurement results with additional attenuator 2 In the Source Calibration tab enter Reference Value 3 dB The reference line is shifted down by 3 dB so that the measurement trace is displayed on the reference line again At the same time the scaling of the y axis is changed 3 dB are now shown at 50 of the diagram the range is 53 dB to 47 dB User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 316 R amp S FSW MultiView Spectrum Ref Level RBW 2 MHz Att 10c8 SWT Sms VBW 2 Mhz NOR 20 00 dBm Mode Auto Sweep 100 0 MHz 1001 pts Common Measurement Settings 20 0 MHz 300 0 MHz Fig 6 12 Reference line with an offset of 3 dB and shifted to middle of diagram 50 After the reference trace has been shifted you can zoom into the measured trace to determine the offsets to the reference line which represent the effects of the band eliminati
231. erator control is active see Source State on page 305 ionut Spectrum k A i Input Source Power Sensor Tracking Generator 4 Measurement Configuration Interface Configuration Source Calibration Calibrate Transmission neiaa ie anae aa a a a a a 308 Calibrate Reflection SHOM is cccccecaceisevcaadecsisivedsnecessevdscvaseevepenesdneaievepvevsanduedsinewasaveres 308 Calibrate Reflection Ope Mersi a aa iaai ea 308 Source Calibration Normalize sicicciesaaaicsseoesccdasaaavciewescccanassaccdedecsaareasasetededaavaaccededcasas 308 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 307 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output ETETE OA dunia cana A PEE RT ALE E R PEE EAE ET EEA E E E E E EN tatters 309 Save As Trd Facto rra a a a a aaa Aa 309 Reference POSION e oiiciec d sind edinedsaaadedesaciaacissateaactacsusvaasticdenunteveduasiacianaedaeedtenatauariecies 309 Reference Vallees e a aaa a aaa aiaiai 309 Calibrate Transmission Starts a transmission type measurement to determine a reference trace This trace is used to calculate the difference for the normalized values For details see Calibration Mechanism on page 296 Remote command SENSe CORRection METHod on page 822 Calibrate Reflection Short Starts a short circuit reflection type measurement to determine a reference trace for cal ibration If both calibrations open circuit short circuit are carried out the calibration trace
232. erefore it makes no difference whether the setting is performed by an open circuit voltage or by a short circuit current ADC return path is ensured via the 66 Q resistor which is an advantage in some mixers Conversion Loss Tables Conversion loss tables consist of value pairs that describe the correction values for con version loss at certain frequencies Correction values for frequencies between the refer ence values are obtained by interpolation Linear interpolation is performed if the table contains only two values If it contains more than two reference values spline interpola tion is carried out Outside the frequency range covered by the table the conversion loss is assumed to be the same as that for the first and last reference value see figure 6 15 gt Frequency Conversion loss outside the range covered by the table Ha 1 ail S y Bottom imit qf ta ie_ LL Top fmt ot tabt Conversion loss q Fig 6 15 Conversion loss outside the band s frequency range Predefined conversion loss tables are often provided with the external mixer and can be imported to the R amp S FSW Alternatively you can define your own conversion loss tables Conversion loss tables are configured and managed in the Conversion loss Table Set tings tab of the External Mixer Configuration dialog box see Managing Conversion Loss Tables on page 332 Importing CVL tables The conversion loss table to be used for a particular ran
233. ettings In this element only the ReferencePower child node has any effects on the measurement itself The other attributes and child nodes are used to display information about the Spectrum Emission Mask Standard on the measurement screen The child nodes and attributes of this element are shown in table 5 4 E SS N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 189 R amp SEFSW Measurements SS a aM a ee eed Spectrum Emission Mask SEM Measurement Example In the sample file PowerClass_ 39 43 xml under C r_s instr sem_std WCDMA 3GPP these attributes are defined as follows e Standard W CDMA 3GPP e LinkDirection DL e PowerClass 39 43 dBm The PowerClass element It is embedded in the BaseFormat element and contains settings information about the power classes Up to four different power classes can be defined For details refer to chapter 5 5 5 3 Power Classes on page 179 The child nodes and attributes of this element are shown in table 5 5 The Range element This element is embedded in the PowerClass element It contains the settings infor mation of the range There have to be at least three defined ranges one reference range and at least one range to either side of the reference range The maximum number of ranges is 30 Note that the R amp S FSW uses the same ranges in each power class There fore the contents of the ranges of each defined power class have to be identical to the first power class An exception a
234. exceeded and stops when the defined Gate Length is reached The Gate Mode Level is not supported for R amp S power sensors The signal sent by these sensors merely reflects the instant the level is first exceeded rather than a time period However only time periods can be used for gating in level mode Thus the trigger impulse from the sensors is not long enough for a fully gated measurement the measurement cannot be completed For details on power sensors see Using a Power Sensor as an External Power Trigger on page 283 Additionally a delay time can be defined so that the first few measurement points after the gate opening are ignored Gate Mode LEVEL Gate Mode EDGE RF Ext Gate Meas active Delay Delay Length Fig 6 27 Effects of Gate mode Gate delay and Gate length LSS a N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 380 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings Trigger and Gate Configuration Example By using a gate in sweep mode and stopping the measurement while the gate signal is inactive the spectrum for pulsed RF carriers can be displayed without the superposition of frequency components generated during switching Similarly the spectrum can also be analyzed for an inactive carrier The sweep can be controlled by an external gate or by the internal power trigger MultiView Spectrum Ref Level 0 00 dBm e RBW 30 kHz Att 10 dB SWT 10ms VBW 30k Hz Mode Auto FFT TRG EXT1 1 Frequency Sweep e TAP Cirw
235. f the number of transmission channels the transmission channel spacing the adjacent channel spacing and the bandwidth of one of adjacent channels ADJ ALT1 or ALT2 whichever is furthest away from the transmission channels No of transmission channels 1 x transmission channel spacing 2 x adjacent channel spacing adjacent channel bandwidth measurement margin The measurement margin is approx 10 of the value obtained by adding the channel spacing and the channel bandwidth Resolution Bandwidth RBW To ensure both acceptable measurement speed and the required selection to suppress spectral components outside the channel to be measured especially of the adjacent channels the resolution bandwidth must not be selected too small or too large As a general approach the resolution bandwidth is to be set to values between 1 and 4 of the channel bandwidth A larger resolution bandwidth can be selected if the spectrum within the channel to be measured and around it has a flat characteristic In the standard setting e g for standard IS95A REV at an adjacent channel bandwidth of 30 kHz a resolution bandwidth of 30 kHz is used This yields correct results since the spectrum in the neighborhood of the adjacent channels normally has a constant level The resolution bandwidth for the defined channel settings can be optimized using the Adjust Settings function in the Ch Power menu or the General Settings tab of the ACLR
236. fault settings It can be configured via the MEAS CONFIG key or in the Time Domain Power dialog box which is displayed as a tab in the Analysis dialog box or when you select the Time Dom Power Config softkey from the Time Dom Pwr menu The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in chapter 11 5 9 Measuring the Time Domain Power on page 721 PRES UES iunea hevadeavhadanditeds baguaddvadaan ana discdane sanbtuvnadasaeea aA 224 PUES URS conna E tac A AE cae EA A EEE EAE 225 Left Limit ROMEL nassi N N 225 Results Activates the power results to be evaluated from the displayed trace or a limited area of the trace Peak Peak power over several measurements uses trace averaging Max Hold RMS RMS value from the points of the displayed trace or a segment thereof Mean Mean value from the points of the displayed trace or a segment thereof The linear mean value of the equivalent voltages is calculated User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 224 R amp S FSW Measurements 5 8 5 Time Domain Power Measurement Std Dev The standard deviation of the measurement points from the mean value The measurement of the mean power is automatically switched on at the same time Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion SUMMary PPEak STATe on page 723 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion SUMMary PPEak RESult on page 725 CALCulate lt n gt
237. ference sweep at the frequency of this mixer product is always within limits even if the signal occurs in one of the sweeps only Such mixer products cannot be identified by the Auto ID function It is therefore recommended that you perform a visual comparison of the test sweep and reference sweep using the Signal ID function Examining unwanted mixer products with small span With large spans in which non modulated sinewave signals are represented as single lines unwanted mixer products are generally completely blanked out However if you examine the frequency range containing a blanked signal in detail using a small span e g an image frequency response part of the signal may nevertheless be displayed This happens when the displayed components of a blanked signal have a level difference which is smaller than the user defined threshold when compared with the noise floor These components are therefore not blanked out An unwanted signal with a S N ratio that corresponds approximately to the user defined threshold may not be blanked out permanently Due to the fact that the noise display varies from one sweep to another the S N ratio changes and thus the level difference between the test sweep and reference sweep measured at a frequency changes as well As a result the criterion for detecting unwanted signals is not fulfilled To blank out unwanted signals permanently an almost constant noise indication is therefore required This can be achie
238. ffset An offset can be defined to delay the measurement after the trigger event or to include data before the actual trigger event in time domain measurements pre trigger offset Pre trigger offsets are possible because the R amp S FSW captures data continuously in the time domain even before the trigger occurs See Trigger Offset on page 388 Trigger Hysteresis Setting a hysteresis for the trigger helps avoid unwanted trigger events caused by noise for example The hysteresis is a threshold to the trigger level that the signal must fall below on arising slope or rise above on a falling slope before another trigger event occurs Example In the following example the second possible trigger event is ignored as the signal does not exceed the hysteresis threshold before it reaches the trigger level again on the rising edge On the falling edge however two trigger events occur as the signal exceeds the hysteresis before it falls to the trigger level the second time Trigger level Fig 6 24 Effects of the trigger hysteresis See Hysteresis on page 388 LL M User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 378 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings 6 6 1 2 Trigger and Gate Configuration Trigger Drop Out Time If a modulated signal is instable and produces occassional drop outs during a burst you can define a minimum duration that the input signal must stay below the trigger level before triggering again This is calle
239. fter the mixer Thus high attenu ation values cause the inherent noise i e the noise floor to rise and the sensitivity of the analyzer decreases The sensitivity of a signal analyzer is directly influenced by the selected RF attenuation The highest sensitivity is obtained at an RF attenuation of 0 dB Each additional 10 dB step reduces the sensitivity by 10 dB i e the displayed noise is increased by 10 dB To measure a signal with an improved signal to noise ratio decrease the RF attenuation oO For ideal sinusoidal signals the displayed signal level is independant of the RF attenu ation Depending on the type of measurement evaluation that is required a compromise must be found between a low noise floor and high intermodulation levels and protecting the instrument from high input levels This is best done by letting the R amp S FSW determine the optimum level automatically see Attenuation Mode Value on page 357 Electronic attenuation If option R amp S FSW B25 is installed you can also activate an electronic attenuator For details see Using Electronic Attenuation Option B25 on page 358 6 4 1 3 Scaling In a linear display the measurement values are distributed linearly throughout the grid That means the entire range of measured values is divided by the number of rows in the grid 10 and each row corresponds to 1 10 of the total range Linear scaling is useful to determine precise levels for a small
240. g ger on page 283 Fig 6 1 Power sensor support standard test setup D User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 282 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output Using the power sensor with several applications The power sensor cannot be used from the R amp S FSW firmware and the R amp S Power Viewer Plus virtual power meter for displaying results of the R amp S NRP power sensors simultaneously Result display The results of the power sensor measurements are displayed in the marker table For each power sensor a row is inserted The sensor index is indicated in the Type column MultiView Spectrum Ref Level 0 00 dBm RBW 3 Att 10dB SWT 40 8ms VBW 3 1 Frequency Sweep 1001 pts i 1 36 GHz i Span 13 6 GHz Stimul s R sponse Function Function Result 72 20 dBm PWR100057 NRP Z1i1 60 79 dBm PWR100393 NRP Z81 Using a Power Sensor as an External Power Trigger Power sensors can be used to trigger a measurement at a specified power level e g from a signal generator e R amp S NRP Z81 e R amp S NRP Z85 e R amp S NRP Z86 D Currently only the following power sensors are supported as power triggers With the R amp S FSW the power sensors can be connected to the Power Sensor interface directly and no further cables are required They can then be configured as an external power sensor trigger User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 283 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings Dat
241. g Statistic measurements on pulsed signals can be performed using a gated trigger An external frame trigger is required as a time frame reference The gate ranges define the part of the measured data taken into account for the statistics calculation These ranges are defined relative to a reference point T 0 The gate interval is repeated for each period until the end of the capture buffer The reference point T 0 is defined by the external trigger event and the instrument s trigger offset For each trace you can define up to 3 separate ranges of a single period to be traced LSS a User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 212 R amp S FSW Measurements Statistical Measurements APD CCDF Input Signal Ext Trigger 4 l 5 Period 7 Period Period Trigger Offset i Te t gt or H i ee i Ss T 0 Range 1 Range 2 Start Stop Start Stop 5 7 5 APD and CCDF Configuration Configuration consists of the following settings BASIC SQUINGS icici ides dee ei eee 213 e Gate Range Definition for APD and CCDF ccccceccceeseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeneaaeeees 215 e Scaling for Statistics DiagraMs eeceecceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeaaeaeeeeeeeteseeaaaees 217 5 7 5 1 Basic Settings APD measurements are selected via the APD button in the Select Measurement dia log box CCDF measurements are selected via the CCDF button in the Select Mea surement dialog box The measurements are
242. g box b Switch on the limits by setting the Limit State to On The limit lines S1 and S2 are displayed c Define the left limit limit line S1 the right limit S2 or both T User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 225 R amp S FSW Measurements a SE a es ed Time Domain Power Measurement 4 Start a sweep The measured powers are displayed in the marker results 5 8 6 Measurement Example This measurement example demonstrates the time domain power calculation fora GSM burst Test setup Signal generator settings e g R amp S FSW SMU Frequency 1 8 GHz Level 10 dBm Modulation GSM EDGE Procedure 1 Preset the R amp S FSW Set the center frequency to 7 8 GHz Set the RBW to 100 kHz Set the sweep time to 640 ys Set the trigger source to IF Power Define a trigger offset of 50 ps N Oo a FF O N Select the Time Domain Power measurement function from the Select Measure ment dialog box In the Time Domain Power configuration dialog box set all four results to ON 9 Set the Limit State to ON 10 Define the left limit at 326 us and the right limit at 538 ps This range corresponds to the useful part of the GSM burst The mean power of the useful part of the GSM burst is calculated to be 13 dBm SS User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 226 R amp S FSW Measurements 5 9 5 9 1 Harmonic Distortion Measurement MultiView Spectrum Ref Level 0 00 dBm
243. ge 173 For Spurious measurements Spurious Setup see chapter 5 6 4 Spurious Emis sions Measurement Configuration on page 199 7 Optionally Outputs See chapter 6 2 6 Output Settings on page 341 8 Analysis See chapter 7 Common Analysis and Display Functions on page 397 9 Display See chapter 7 1 Result Display Configuration on page 397 To configure settings gt Select any button to open the corresponding dialog box To configure a particular setting displayed in the Overview simply select the setting on the touch screen The corresponding dialog box is opened with the focus on the selected setting Preset Channel Select the Preset Channel button in the lower lefthand corner of the Overview to restore all measurement settings in the current channel to their default values Note that the PRESET key on the front panel restores all measurements in all mea surement channels on the R amp S FSW to their default values For details see chapter 8 1 Restoring the Default Instrument Configuration Preset on page 489 Remote command SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXECute on page 918 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 274 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output 6 2 Data Input and Output The R amp S FSW can analyze signals from different input sources Such as RF power sen sors etc and provide various types of output such as video or trigger signals e Rec
244. ge 797 High Pass Filter 1 3 GHz Activates an additional internal high pass filter for RF input signals from 1 GHz to 3 GHz This filter is used to remove the harmonics of the R amp S FSW in order to measure the harmonics for a DUT for example This function requires option R amp S FSW B13 Note for RF input signals outside the specified range the high pass filter has no effect For signals with a frequency of approximately 4 GHz upwards the harmonics are sup pressed sufficiently by the YIG filter Remote command INPut FILTer HPASs STATe on page 796 YIG Preselector Activates or deactivates the YlG preselector An internal YlG preselector at the input of the R amp S FSW ensures that image frequencies are rejected However this is only possible for a restricted bandwidth In order to use the maximum bandwidth for signal analysis you can deactivate the YlG preselector at the input of the R amp S FSW which may lead to image frequency display E M User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 280 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings 6 2 2 2 Data Input and Output Note that the YlG preselector is active only on frequencies greater than 8 GHz Therefore switching the YlG preselector on or off has no effect if the frequency is below that value Note For the following measurements the YlG Preselector is off by default if available e 1 Q Analyzer and thus in all applications in MSRA operating mode e Multi Carrier Gr
245. ge is also defined in the External Mixer Configuration dialog box All tables stored on the instrument in the C r_s instr user cv1 directory are offered for selection A validation check is then performed on the selected table to ensure that it complies with the settings In par ticular the following is checked e the assigned band name e the harmonic order e the mixer type SS SST User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 321 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings bo SS Data Input and Output e the table must contain at least one frequency that lies within the frequency range for the band Reference level The maximum possible reference level depends on the maximum used conversion loss value Thus the reference level can be adjusted for each range according to the used conversion loss table or average conversion loss value If a conversion loss value is used which exceeds the maximum reference level the reference level is adjusted to the max imum value permitted by the firmware Automatic Signal Identification Automatic signal identification allows you to compare the upper and lower band results of the mixer thus detecting unwanted mixer products due to conversion Note that automatic signal identification is only available for measurements that perform frequency sweeps not in vector signal analysis or the I Q Analyzer for instance Signal ID function Two sweeps are performed alternately Trace 1 shows the trace measured on
246. ger and Gate dialog box switch on Show Preview A zero span measurement for the currently defined center frequency is displayed 2 Set the Frequency RBW and Sweep Time such that the relevant part of the signal is displayed for example a complete burst 3 Determine the parameters you want to use to define the trigger and gate conditions from the preview diagram for example the length of a burst or slot the upper or lower power level of a pulse the maximum noise level the power level or time at which a certain incident occurs User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 391 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings Trigger and Gate Configuration Try out different trigger and gate settings as described in How to Configure a Trig gered Measurement and How to Configure a Gated Measurement then select Update Main Diagram to see the effect of the current settings on the main mea surement in the background If the results are as expected close the dialog box to keep the changes permanently Otherwise correct the settings as necessary 6 6 3 2 How to Configure a Triggered Measurement To define a time trigger 1 2 In the Trigger and Gate dialog box define the Trigger Source Time Define the Repetition Interval the time after which a new measurement is started To define an external trigger 1 4 Connect an external device that will provide the trigger signal to one of the TRIGGER INPUT connec
247. gnal Source PSE The R amp S FSW is configured to trigger when the defined conditions for the power sensor occur Power measurement results are provided as usual External Generator Control Option R amp S FSW B10 If the R amp S FSW External Generator Control R amp S FSW B10 is installed you can operate various commercially available generators as an external generator with the R amp S FSW Thus scalar network analysis with the R amp S FSW is possible About External Generator Control ccccccccccsesseceeecessseeeeeceeeesceeteeeeuseeeeeseaseeeeeeeas 292 Basics on External Generator Comntrol cccccccccscsesesecsecsenscsssssseseseseceeanereneness 292 External Generator Control Setun S1 0e0 jcdecieesis steccceeivdesieecieaiestuacateedeistiees 302 How to Work With External Generator Control ccccccccccescsseseseseseeeeecaaeeeseseees 310 Measurement Example Calibration with an External Generatov 00 312 D User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 291 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings 6 2 4 1 6 2 4 2 Data Input and Output About External Generator Control A common measurement setup includes a signal generator a device under test DUT and a signal and spectrum analyzer for example the R amp S FSW In this setup the signal analyzer can control which signal the generator is to send which is in turn measured by the analyzer This process is referred to as external generator con
248. gning the Marker to a Trace on page 261 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer SELect on page 641 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion POWer RESult on page 639 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer STATe on page 641 C No Switches the measurement of the carrier noise ratio with reference to a 1 Hz bandwidth on or off If no marker is active marker 1 is activated The measurement is performed on the trace that marker 1 is assigned to To shift marker 1 and measure another trace use the Marker to Trace softkey in the Marker menu see Assigning the Marker to a Trace on page 261 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer SELect on page 641 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion POWer RESult on page 639 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer STATe on page 641 Channel Bandwidth Defines the measurement channel bandwidth The default setting is 14 kHz Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth CHANnel lt ch gt on page 646 Adjust Settings Enables the RMS detector and adjusts the span to the selected channel bandwidth according to 4 x channel bandwidth measurement margin The adjustment is performed once if necessary the setting can be changed later on Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESet on page 642 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 157 R amp S FSW Measurements Occupied Bandwidth Measurement OBW
249. h A comment is assigned that includes the type name and serial number of the detected probe The transducer is deleted as soon as the probe is disconnected For details on transducers see chapter 9 2 Basics on Transducer Factors on page 513 For information on using probes for input see chapter 6 2 1 3 Using Probes on page 276 Using Probes As an alternative means of input to the R amp S FSW active probes from Rohde amp Schwarz can be connected to the optional BASEBAND INPUT connectors if the Analog Baseband Interface option R amp S FSW B71 is installed These probes allow you to perform voltage measurements very flexibly and precisely on all sorts of devices to be tested without interfering with the signal Connecting probes Probes are automatically detected when you plug them into the upper BASEBAND INPUT connectors on the front panel of the R amp S FSW The detected information on the probe is displayed in the Probes tab of the Input dialog box individually for each con nector Availability of probe input Analog baseband input from connected probes can only be analyzed in applications that support I Q data processing and the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 such as the I Q Analyzer the Analog Demodulation application or one of the optional appli cations Frequency sweep measurements with probes Probes can also be used as an alternative method of providing RF input to the R amp S FSW In this
250. h the existing setup files are displayed in read only mode in the editor they can be saved under a different name using File gt SaveAs _ _ L_LL_ L_L_L_LzLzLL a User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 304 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output Be careful however to adhere to the required syntax and commands Errors will only be detected and displayed when you try to use the new generator see also Displayed Information and Errors on page 301 For details see Generator Setup Files on page 295 Frequency Min Frequency Max For reference only Lower and upper frequency limit for the generator Level Min Level Max For reference only Lower and upper power limit for the generator Measurement Settings The measurement settings for external generator control are configured in the Mea surement Configuration subtab of the External Generator tab Ew i Spectrum 7 i p Input Source Power Sensor Tracking Generator Measurement Configuration Measurement Configuration 3 Interface gt Source Power 20 0 dBm Source Offset 0 0 dB Configuration L J L J Source Calibration Frequency Coupling coura Sate tT fe Source Freq RF Paroma fo Result Frequency Start Result Frequency Stop SOURCE SUMS 8 0582 sensed ited ceeSevsnded EE T OS 305 MOUS POW aa chia O E A O casa vaauocate N E 306 SOURCE QSL iiaa EANAN eens 306 Source Frequency Coupling scientist audit iid
251. hannel bandwidth see formula above and the smallest possible VBW with regard to the available step size is selected Detector The RMS detector correctly indicates the power irrespective of the characteristics of the signal to be measured The whole IF envelope is used to calculate the power for each measurement point The IF envelope is digitized using a sampling frequency which is at least five times the resolution bandwidth which has been selected Based on the sample values the power is calculated for each measurement point using the following formula Pee l Sis RMS N i where si linear digitized video voltage at the output of the A D converter N number of A D converter values per measurement point Prmus power represented by a measurement point When the power has been calculated the power units are converted into decibels and the value is displayed as a measurement point In principle the sample detector would be possible as well Due to the limited number of measurement points used to calculate the power in the channel the sample detector would yield less stable results The RMS detector can be set for the defined channel settings automatically using the Adjust Settings function in the Ch Power menu or the General Settings tab of the ACLR Setup dialog box see Optimized Settings Adjust Settings on page 125 You I User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 115 R amp S FSW Measurements SS SS SS a a Ss Chann
252. he EMI measurement features e EMI marker functionality e Marker demodulation e Measurement bandwidths and detectors for EMI measurements e Logarithmic scaling of the frequency axis e Additional predefined limit lines for EMC standards e Predefined transducer factors e LISN control T User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 249 R amp S FSW Measurements 5 13 1 5 13 2 Electromagnetic Interference EMI Measurement R amp S FSW K54 About the EMI Measurement EMI measurements can be very time consuming especially if weighting detectors are required for the measurement In addition EMC testing often requires various procedures to locate local EMI maxima Such procedures are for example movements of an absorb ing clamp variations in the height of the test antenna or the rotation of the DUT Covering all test setups with one of the slow EMI weighting detectors over the required frequency range would lead to very high measurement times Splitting the measurement procedure into several stages however can eliminate this problem The first stage or peak search is used to get a rough idea about the location of peak levels that may indicate interference over the required frequency range You can use a detector that allows for a fast sweep time e g the peak detector During the second stage or final test the R amp S FSW performs the actual EMC test a refined measurement with detectors designed for and required by EMC stan
253. he adjacent channel are displayed on the vertical axis The optimum mixer level is 12 dBm The relative adjacent channel power ACPR at an optimum mixer level is 77 dBc Since at a given signal level the mixer level is set in 1 dB steps with the 1 dB RF attenuator the optimum range spreads from 10 dBm to 14 dBm To set the attenuation parameter manually the following method is recommended gt Set the RF attenuation so that the mixer level measured channel power RF attenuation is between 10 dBm and 14 dBm This method is automated with the Auto Level function Especially in remote control mode e g in production environments it is best to correctly set the attenuation param eters prior to the measurement as the time required for automatic setting can be saved To measure the R amp S FSW s intrinsic dynamic range for W CDMA adjacent channel power measurements a filter which suppresses the adjacent channel power is required at the output of the transmitter A SAW filter with a bandwidth of 4 MHz for example can be used User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 151 R amp S FSW Measurements SS re ee Channel Power and Adjacent Channel Power ACLR Measurement 5 2 7 3 Measurement Example 3 Measuring the Intrinsic Noise of the R amp S FSW with the Channel Power Function Noise in any bandwidth can be measured with the channel power measurement func tions Thus the noise power in a communication channel can be determ
254. he input of the R amp S FSW is fed from the output of the DUT A calibration can be carried out to compensate for the effects of the test setup e g frequency response of connecting cables GEN OUTPUT DUT RF INPUT Fig 6 4 Test setup for transmission measurement Reflection Measurement Scalar reflection measurements can be carried out using a reflection coefficient mea surement bridge E a N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 293 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings GEN OUTPUT RF INPUT DUT Data Input and Output Fig 6 5 Test setup for reflection measurement Generated signal input In order to use the functions of the external generator an appropriate generator must be connected and configured correctly In particular the generator output must be connected to the RF input of the R amp S FSW External reference frequency In order to enhance measurement accuracy a common reference frequency should be used for both the R amp S FSW and the generator If no independent 10 MHz reference frequency is available it is recommended that you connect the reference output of the generator with the reference input of the R amp S FSW and that you enable usage of the external reference on the R amp S FSW via SETUP gt Reference gt External Refer ence For more information on external references see Reference Frequency Input on page 516 Connection errors If no external generator is connected if the GPIB or TCP
255. he preamplifier on or off For details on the preamplifier see Preamplifier option B24 on page 358 Remote command SENSe LIST RANGe lt range gt INPut GAIN STATe on page 705 Sweep Points Sets the number of sweep points for the specified range For details on sweep points see chapter 6 5 1 8 How Much Data is Measured Sweep Points and Sweep Count on page 366 Remote command SENSe LIST RANGe lt range gt POINts on page 706 Stop After Sweep This command configures the sweep behavior User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 202 R amp S FSW Measurements 5 6 4 2 Spurious Emissions Measurement ON The R amp S FSW stops after one range is swept and continues only if you confirm a message box is displayed OFF The R amp S FSW sweeps all ranges in one go Remote command SENSe LIST RANGe BREak on page 701 Transducer Sets a transducer for the specified range You can only choose a transducer that fulfills the following conditions e The transducer overlaps or equals the span of the range e The x axis is linear e The unit is dB For details on transducers see chapter 9 2 Basics on Transducer Factors on page 513 Remote command SENSe LIST RANGe lt range gt TRANsducer on page 707 Limit Check Activates or deactivates the limit check for all ranges For details on limit checks see chapter 5 6 3 2 Limit Lines in Spurious Measure ments on page 198 A
256. he stored refer ence trace will no longer be identical to the new measurement results However if the measurement settings do not deviate too much the measurement results can still be normalized approximately using the stored reference trace This is indicated by the APX label in the channel bar instead of NOR This is the case if one or more of the following values deviate from the calibration settings e coupling RBW VBW SWT e reference level RF attenuation e start or stop frequency e output level of external generator e detector max peak min peak sample etc e frequency deviation at a maximum of 1001 points within the set sweep limits corre sponds to a doubling of the span Differences in level settings between the reference trace and the current instrument set tings are taken into account automatically If the span is reduced a linear interpolation of the intermediate values is applied If the span increases the values at the left or right border of the reference dataset are extrapolated to the current start or stop frequency i e the reference dataset is extended by constant values Thus the instrument settings can be changed in a wide area without giving up normali zation This reduces the necessity to carry out a new normalization to a minimum If approximation becomes too poor however normalization is aborted and an error mes sage is displayed see Displayed Information and Errors on page 301 Th
257. he transmission channel with the highest power is used as a reference channel Default Lowest amp Highest The outer left hand transmission channel is the reference channel for the lower Channel adjacent channels the outer right hand transmission channel that for the upper adjacent channels Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence TXCHannel MANual on page 650 SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence TXCHannel AUTO on page 650 T User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 123 R amp S FSW Measurements n a ea a a ae eel Channel Power and Adjacent Channel Power ACLR Measurement Noise cancellation The results can be corrected by the instrument s inherent noise which increases the dynamic range In this case a reference measurement of the instrument s inherent noise is carried out The measured noise power is then subtracted from the power in the channel that is being analyzed first active trace only The inherent noise of the instrument depends on the selected center frequency resolu tion bandwidth and level setting Therefore the correction function is disabled whenever one of these parameters is changed A disable message is displayed on the screen To enable the correction function after changing one of these settings activate it again A new reference measurement is carried out Noise cancellation is also available in zero span Currently noise cancellation is only available for the following
258. he true ampli tude distribution of the signal therefore cannot be determined 1 Preset the R amp S FSW 2 Set the reference level to 60 dBm The R amp S FSW s intrinsic noise is displayed at the top of the screen 3 Select the APD measurement function from the Select Measurement dialog box The R amp S FSW sets the frequency span to 0 Hz and measures the amplitude proba bility distribution APD The number of uncorrelated level measurements used for the measurement is 100000 The mean power and the peak power are displayed in dBm The crest factor peak power mean power is output as well MultiView Spectrum 9 10 dB RBW 3 MHz Att OdB AQT 1 5ms 1 APD CF 13 25 GHz Ref 60 00 dBm 2 Result Summary Samples 100000 Crest Mean Peak Trace 1 88 68 dBm 77 57 dBm 11 10 dB Fig 5 12 Amplitude probability distribution of white noise L____L_LL_LLL_ T User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 221 R amp S FSW Measurements SSS ee ed Time Domain Power Measurement 4 Now select the CCDF measurement function from the Select Measurement dialog box MultiView Spectrum Ref Level 60 00 dBm 2 RBW 3 MHz Att OdB AQT 1 5ms 1 CCDF CF 13 25 GHz Mean Pwr 20 00 dB 2 Result Summary Samples 100000 10 1 0 1 0 01 70 dB 6 70 8 42 dB 9 42 dB Mean Peak Trace 1 88 65 dBm 78 87 dBm Fig 5 13 CCDF of white noise The CCDF trace indicates the probability that a level will exceed the mean power The level
259. hey are spread over a wider area Logarith mic scaling is useful for overview measurements when a large span must be displayed in one diagram However with logarithmic scaling the frequency resolution between two sweep points deteriorates with higher frequencies ee a ee ee ee ee ee a a O 1Hz 1MHz 1 GHz Fig 6 21 Logarithmic x axis scaling the distance between sweep points is variable In the spectrum from 10 Hz to 100 Hz the distance is a few Hz Between 100 MHz and 1 GHz the distance is several MHz Thus for logarithmic x axis scaling the number of sweep points must be sufficiently high in order to distinguish high frequencies precisely The resolution bandwidth should cover at least one sweep point that means the distance between two sweep points should not exceed the RBW If this condition is not met signals or interferences could be missed especially narrowband interferences User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 346 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings n ee Frequency and Span Configuration tm e a Insuficient sweep points Resolution filter bandwidth Resolution fitter bandwidth Filter may miss a signal covers one sweep point covers several sweep points 6 3 2 Frequency and Span Settings Frequency and span settings can be configured via the Frequency dialog box Signal tracking is configured in the Signal Tracking tab of this dialog box For details see chapter 6 3 3 How To Define the Frequency Range o
260. hin a measurement For details on the connectors see the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual External trigger as input If the trigger signal for the R amp S FSW is provided by an external reference the reference signal source must be connected to the R amp S FSW and the trigger source must be defined as External on the R amp S FSW LSS M User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 277 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output Trigger output The R amp S FSW can send output to another device either to pass on the internal trigger signal or to indicate that the R amp S FSW itself is ready to trigger The trigger signal can be output by the R amp S FSW automatically or manually by the user If it is sent automatically a high signal is output when the R amp S FSW has triggered due to a sweep start Device Triggered or when the R amp S FSW is ready to receive a trigger signal after a sweep start Trigger Armed Manual triggering If the trigger output signal is initiated manually the length and level high low of the trigger pulse is also user definable Note however that the trigger pulse level is always opposite to the constant signal level defined by the output Level setting e g for Level High a constant high signal is output to the connector until the Send Trigger button is selected Then a low pulse is sent Providing trigger signals as output is described in detail in the R amp S FSW User
261. his setting is only available if normalization is on see Source Calibration Normalize on page 308 The reference line defined by the reference value and reference position is similar to the Reference Level defined in the Amplitude settings However this reference line only affects the y axis scaling in the diagram it has no effect on the expected input power level or the hardware settings The normalized trace 0 dB directly after calibration is displayed on this reference line indicated by a red line in the diagram If you shift the reference line the normalized trace is shifted as well Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe RPOSition on page 780 Reference Value Defines the reference value to be displayed at the specified Result Frequency Start This setting can be used to shift the reference line and thus the normalized trace similar to the Shifting the Display Offset defined in the Amplitude settings shifts the reference level in the display __LL_L_____ Se I User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 309 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output Shifting the normalized trace is useful for example to reflect an attenuation or gain caused by the measured DUT If you then zoom into the diagram around the normalized trace the measured trace still remains fully visible Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe RVALue on page 821 6 2 4 4 How to Work With
262. ic in relation to the funda mental is indicated in the result table D User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 232 R amp S FSW Measurements 5 10 5 10 1 5 10 2 Third Order Intercept TOI Measurement 4 Ifthe signal changes significantly during or after the harmonics measurement use the Adjust Settings function to adjust the settings automatically and restart the measurement Third Order Intercept TOI Measurement The third order intercept point of the R amp S FSW can be determined if a two tone signal with equal carrier levels is applied to the input e About the TOI Measurement cccccccccccecee cee eeeeceeceeeeceeeceeeeee eed eesteeseaeaeeeeeeeeeeeees 233 VO BaSS oosina na aaa aa aaia a 233 TO RESURS ici a E a a A ded 237 TO COnfiguUration eerreriiairrni innad Aania nnna aa 238 e How to Determine the Third Order Intercept c eeeceeeecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 239 e Measurement Example Measuring the R amp S FSW s Intrinsic Intermodulation About the TOI Measurement If several signals are applied to a transmission two port device with nonlinear character istic intermodulation products appear at its output at the sums and differences of the signals The nonlinear characteristic produces harmonics of the useful signals which intermodulate at the characteristic The intermodulation products of lower order have a special effect since their level is largest and they are near the useful
263. ic of useful signal Py2 and signal Py Tthe intermodulation product at f is generated by mixing the 2nd harmonic of useful signal Py and signal Pyp fa 2 x fur fuz 1 fiz 2 x fu fur 2 Dependency on level of useful signals The level of the intermodulation products depends on the level of the useful signals If the two useful signals are increased by 1 dB the level of the intermodulation products increases by 3 dB which means that the spacing ap between intermodulation signals and useful signals is reduced by 2 dB This is illustrated in figure 5 16 R amp S FSW Measurements Third Order Intercept TOI Measurement Output level Intercept point 7 Compression 7 Intermodulation product Useful signal Input level Fig 5 16 Dependency of intermodulation products on level of useful signals The useful signals at the two port output increase proportionally with the input level as long as the two port is in the linear range A level change of 1 dB at the input causes a level change of 1 dB at the output Beyond a certain input level the two port goes into compression and the output level stops increasing The intermodulation products of the third order increase three times as quickly as the useful signals The intercept point is the fictitious level where the two lines intersect It cannot be measured directly since the useful level is previously limited by the maximum two port output power
264. idth video bandwidth and detector are selected automatically to give correct results To obtain stable results especially in the adjacent channels 30 kHz bandwidth which are narrow in comparison with the transmission channel bandwidth 1 23 MHz the RMS detector is used 7 Set the optimal reference level and RF attenuation for the applied signal level using the Auto Level function in the AUTO SET menu 8 Activate Fast ACLR mode in the ACLR Setup dialog box to increase the repeat ability of results The R amp S FSW sets the optimal RF attenuation and the reference level based on the transmission channel power to obtain the maximum dynamic range The figure 5 7 shows the result of the measurement De User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 148 R amp S FSW Measurements i a a a a ee ee ee Channel Power and Adjacent Channel Power ACLR Measurement MultiView Spectrum Ref Level 7 36 d8m RBW 10 kHz Att 17 dB SWT 100 ms e VBW 300 kHz Mode A 1 ACLR CF 850 0 MHz 1001 pts 419 0 kHz Span 4 19 MHz 2 Result Summary CDMA 000 Channel Bandwidth Offset Power T f MHz 0 86 dBm 0 86 dBm Upper 79 59 dB 80 34 dB 85 04 dB 83 85 dB Fig 5 7 Adjacent channel power measurement on a CDMA2000 1x signal 5 2 7 2 Measurement Example 2 Measuring Adjacent Channel Power of a W CDMA Uplink Signal Test setup Signal generator settings e g R amp S FSW SMU Frequency 1950 MHz Level 4 dBm
265. ies On the other hand high frequencies get more crowded and become harder to distinguish For more information see chapter 6 3 1 4 Coping with Large Frequency Ranges Log arithmic Scaling on page 346 Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe X SPACing on page 762 Full Span Sets the span to the full frequency range of the R amp S FSW specified in the data sheet This setting is useful for overview measurements Remote command SENSe FREQuency SPAN FULL on page 765 Zero Span Sets the span to 0 Hz zero span The x axis becomes the time axis with the grid lines corresponding to 1 10 of the current sweep time SWT For details see chapter 5 12 Basic Measurements on page 245 Remote command FREQ SPAN OHz see SENSe FREQuency SPAN FULL on page 765 TE N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 349 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings Ee EeSE SS __ a92D2 7AAA LDAE hAPaaaESS Frequency and Span Configuration Last Span Sets the span to the previous value With this function you can switch between an over view measurement and a detailed measurement quickly Remote command SENSe FREQuency SPAN on page 765 Center Frequency Stepsize Defines the step size by which the center frequency is increased or decreased when the arrow keys are pressed When you use the rotary knob the center frequency changes in steps of only 1 10 of the Center Fr
266. ification using the Auto ID function see also Automatic Signal Identification on page 322 Select Basic Settings gt Auto ID On to activate automatic signal identification Adapt the tolerance limit by selecting Basic Settings gt Auto ID Threshold The tol erance limit is set to 5 dB in this example To take into account the cable loss in the IF path On performing level correction the conversion loss of the mixer and also the insertion loss a of the cable used to tap off the IF signal are to be taken into account This additional loss is frequency dependent 1 Determine the insertion of the cable at the used intermediate frequency 2 Increase each reference value in the conversion loss table by the insertion loss ao a Select INPUT gt Input Source Config gt External Mixer gt Conversion Loss Table b Select the assigned conversion loss table c Select Edit Table d Select Shift y and enter the insertion loss value lt a gt to shift all y values in the table by this value 3 Select Save Output Settings The R amp S FSW can provide output to special connectors for other devices For details on connectors refer to the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual Front Rear Panel View chapters Providing trigger signals as output is described in chapter 6 6 4 How to Output a Trigger Signal on page 393 Providing output for LISN control in EMI measurements is described in chapter 5 13 4 3 LI
267. ignal If no external mixers are con nected to the R amp S FSW cover the two front connectors LO OUT IF IN and IF IN with the SMA caps supplied 1 Connect the LO OUT IF IN output of the R amp S FSW to the LO port of the external mixer 2 Connect the IF IN input of the R amp S FSW to the IF port of the external mixer 3 Feed the signal to be measured to the RF input of the external mixer R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output To connect a two port mixer External Mixer RF INPUT 1 1 Connect the LO OUT IF IN output of the R amp S FSW to the LO IF port of the external mixer The nominal LO level is 15 5 dBm Because of the diplexer contained in the R amp S FSW the IF signal can be tapped from the line which is used to feed the LO signal to the mixer 2 Feed the signal to be measured to the RF input of the external mixer To activate and configure the external mixer 1 Select INPUT gt Input Source Config gt External Mixer ON to activate the external mixer for the current application 2 Select Mixer Settings gt Band to define the required frequency range 3 From the Band selection list select the required band 4 Inthe Mixer Settings select Conversion Loss Table for Range 1 to define fre quency dependent level correction 5 From the selection list select a conversion loss table stored on the instrument No further settings are necessary since the selected fi
268. igure 5 3 shows the standard deviation of the results as a function of the sweep time LSS a N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 111 R amp S FSW Measurements E _ _ __ _ _ __ SES ee Channel Power and Adjacent Channel Power ACLR Measurement ACLR Repeatability CDMA2000 1X IBW Method 8 TX channel F lower Adj 4 upper Adj lt lower Alt upper Alt 10 10 10 Sweeptime ms Fig 5 3 Repeatability of adjacent channel power measurement on CDMA2000 standard signals if the integration bandwidth method is used The figure 5 4 shows the repeatability of power measurements in the transmit channel and of relative power measurements in the adjacent channels as a function of sweep time The standard deviation of measurement results is calculated from 100 consecutive measurements Take scaling into account if comparing power values ACLR Repeatability CDMA2000 1X Fast ACLR Method 0 5 TX channel F lower Adj 4 upper Adj lower Alt upper Alt o dB Sweeptime ms Fig 5 4 Repeatability of adjacent channel power measurements on CDMA2000 signals in the fast ACLR mode 5 2 3 3 Recommended Common Measurement Parameters The following sections provide recommendations on the most important measurement parameters for channel power measurements User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 112 R amp S FSW Measurements Channel Power
269. iles Range 1 12 75 MHz ESERE 2 515 MHz 2 515 MHz ATELE 12 75 MHz oft ott ott Normal 3dB Cem Normal s 30 kHz 30 k iz 30 khz 3 MHz 3 MHz 3 MHz Auto Auto Auto 140 ps 140 ps 140 ps 0 d m 0 dBm 0 dim Auto Auto Auto 10 dB 10 dB 10 dB oft off None None Relative Relative Abs Limit Start 1 13 dBm 13 dBm Abs Limit Stop 1 13 d m 13 dBm Rel Limit Start1 MAX 50d6c 13d6m 300 dBc Rel Limit Stop 1 50 dBc 300 dBc Symetrical Setup on ca User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 173 R amp S FSW Measurements L aaan EEE Spectrum Emission Mask SEM Measurement Range Stan Range SOP oc cece cadens cinder oe aed cescseidieedeensiesla tiie eigdedasenameteneese 174 Fo SEM eana A A 174 Fiter paeen EEA RAE AEE 174 RBW ccvcisccncassteens a A a EE E 175 VEW eoin a N a N N a a 175 Sweep nme ModE ccnn a a aa a E EE eat 175 EE WMO E E E E E T 175 RELEE E A A ASEE TEE E civ tonne N E E T A one oct 175 RF AW MOB inian aa EE EANA AEE AEEA AAA 175 RF PRU OR inienn a a a dau AET EEE ENESES 176 Proa MD isaisa i i a aaa aadi 176 VARIG FACIO cancia a a a aa aaaea a a 176 C TVG R Tihe E bee tueeevekevs taateeaetot eaten 176 Abs Limit Sta SO eons ve cena ocd ceanacccevenedensvactannrcdeunwanaecaduaunnaundanadsabannsanededsseasmncseaddedeanes 176 Rel Limit SAY SlOP e ananin acc beeyssandsedsexaiuaceaseees ssatdendesssabuatdeassteeatideees 176 insert beloreialter Ranganna ANNAE EANA E EATER 177 Delete RINGO 2s ceicisccecsseeereectetagia eet cate
270. imum peak values of each sweep point The result of this comparison is displayed in trace 3 if Signal ID is active at the same time If Signal ID is not active the result can be displayed in any of the traces 1 to 3 Unwanted mixer products are suppressed in this calculated trace Test sweep and reference sweep traces Depending on which of the automatic signal identification functions are used the traces are used to display either the test sweep the upper side band sweep or the reference sweep lower side band sweep Function Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Signal ID Signal ID upper side band Signal ID lower side band Auto ID Auto ID Signal ID Auto ID Signal ID upper side band Signal ID lower side band Auto ID Tolerance for the comparison of test sweep and reference Since the LO frequency is displaced downwards in the reference sweep the conversion loss of the mixer may differ from that of the test sweep This is due to the fact that the LO output power of the R amp S FSW varies with the frequency and also due to the non ideal characteristics of the mixer A certain tolerance should therefore be permitted for the comparison of the signal levels in the test sweep and reference sweep A user defined threshold is used to determine deviations Auto ID detection threshold Real input signals are displayed at the same frequency in the test and reference sweeps i e theoretically identical signal levels are ex
271. ine a power class a Select the Overview softkey then select the SEM Setup button and swtich to the Power Classes tab b Add a power class by selecting the Add button c Enter the start and stop power levels to define the class d Select the power classes to be used for the current measurement either a specific class or all classes to have the required class selected automatically according to the input level measured in the reference range Select the Sweep List tab of the Spectrum Emission Mask dialog box Insert the required ranges using the Insert before Range and Insert after Range buttons which refer to the currently selected range the reference range by default If the signal trace is symmetric to the center frequency activate the Sym Setup option to make setup easier and quicker Define the measurement parameters for each range as required If symmetrical setup is activated you only have to configure the ranges to one side of the center range In particular define the limits for each range of the signal i e the area in which the signal level may deviate without failing the limit check If several power classes were defined see step 3 define limits for each power class a Define the type of limit check i e whether absolute values or relative values are to be checked or both The type of limit check is identical for all power classes b Define the limit start and stop values If the sweep list
272. ined for example If the noise spectrum within the channel bandwidth is flat the noise marker can be used to determine the noise power in the channel by considering the channel bandwidth If however phase noise and noise that normally increases towards the carrier is dominant in the channel to be measured or if there are discrete spurious signals in the channel the channel power measurement method must be used to obtain correct measurement results Test setup gt Leave the RF input of the R amp S FSW open circuited or terminate it with 50 Q Procedure 1 Preset the R amp S FSW 2 Set the center frequency to 1 GHz and the span to 7 MHz 3 To obtain maximum sensitivity set RF attenuation to 0 dB and the reference level to 40 dBm 4 Select the Channel Power ACLR measurement function from the Select Measure ment dialog box 5 Inthe ACLR Setup dialog box set up a single Tx channel with the channel band width 1 23 MHz 6 Select the Adjust Settings softkey The settings for the frequency span the bandwidth RBW and VBW and the detector are automatically set to the optimum values required for the measurement 7 Stabilize the measurement result by increasing the sweep time Set the sweep time to 7 s The trace becomes much smoother because of the RMS detector and the channel power measurement display is much more stable UUU User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 152 R amp S FSW Measurements Channel Power an
273. is amplified by about 30 dB Remote command INPut GAIN STATe on page 778 INPut GAIN VALue on page 778 E SS M User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 358 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings 6 4 3 Amplitude and Vertical Axis Configuration Noise cancellation The results can be corrected by the instrument s inherent noise which increases the dynamic range In this case a reference measurement of the instrument s inherent noise is carried out The measured noise power is then subtracted from the power in the channel that is being analyzed first active trace only The inherent noise of the instrument depends on the selected center frequency resolu tion bandwidth and level setting Therefore the correction function is disabled whenever one of these parameters is changed A disable message is displayed on the screen To enable the correction function after changing one of these settings activate it again A new reference measurement is carried out Noise cancellation is also available in zero span Currently noise cancellation is only available for the following trace detectors see Detector on page 419 e RMS e Average e Sample e Positive Peak Remote command SENSe POWer NCORrection on page 776 Scaling the Y Axis The individual scaling settings that affect the vertical axis are described here To configure the y axis scaling settings Vertical Axis settings can be configured via the AMPT key or in
274. is cal culated by averaging the two measurements The order of the two calibration measure ments is irrelevant Remote command SENSe CORRection METHod on page 822 Selects the reflection method SENSe CORRection COLLect ACQuire on page 821 Starts the sweep for short circuit calibration Calibrate Reflection Open Starts an open circuit reflection type measurement to determine a reference trace for calibration If both reflection type calibrations open circuit short circuit are carried out the reference trace is calculated by averaging the two measurements The order of the two calibration measurements is irrelevant Remote command SENSe CORRection METHod on page 822 Selects the reflection method SENSe CORRection COLLect ACQuire on page 821 Starts the sweep for open circuit calibration Source Calibration Normalize Switches the normalization of measurement results on or off This function is only avail able if the memory contains a reference trace that is after a calibration has been per formed For details on normalization see Normalization on page 296 Remote command SENSe CORRection STATe on page 822 _ _L_LL_L L L_LzLzLzL_ a SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSS SSSSSSSSSSSSq User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 308 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings LESSEE SSH_ _ EE EEE E E _ ST Data Input and Output Recall
275. is defined with either the Meas gt Ref setting or the Reference Value setting Remote command UNIT lt n gt PMETer lt p gt POWer on page 832 UNIT lt n gt PMETer lt p gt POWer RATio on page 833 Meas Time Average Selects the measurement time or switches to manual averaging mode In general results are more precise with longer measurement times The following settings are recommen ded for different signal types to obtain stable and precise results Short Stationary signals with high power gt 40dBm because they require only a short measurement time and short measurement time provides the highest repetition rates Normal Signals with lower power or modulated signals Long Signals at the lower end of the measurement range lt 50 dBm or Signals with lower power to minimize the influence of noise Manual Manual averaging mode The average count is set with the Average Count Number of Readings setting Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt MTIMe on page 830 SENSe PMETer lt p gt MTIMe AVERage STATe on page 831 Setting the Reference Level from the Measurement Meas gt Ref Sets the currently measured power as a reference value for the relative display The reference value can also be set manually via the Reference Value setting Remote command CALCulate lt n gt PMETer lt p gt RELative MAGNitude AUTO ONCE on page 827 Reference Value Defines the reference value for rela
276. is exclusively generated by the signal analyzer the level of the harmonic is reduced by 20 dB or is lost in noise If both the DUT and the signal analyzer contribute to the harmonic the reduction in the harmonic level is correspondingly smaller High sensitivity harmonics measurements If harmonics have very small levels the resolution bandwidth required to measure them must be reduced considerably The sweep time is therefore also increased considera User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 229 R amp S FSW Measurements 5 9 3 Harmonic Distortion Measurement bly In this case the measurement of individual harmonics is carried out with the R amp S FSW set to a small span Only the frequency range around the harmonics will then be measured with a small resolution bandwidth Required measurement time During the harmonics measurement zero span sweeps are performed at the center fre quency and at each harmonic The duration of each sweep Harmonic Sweep Time SWT and the Number of Harmonics n are defined in the Harmonic Distortion con figuration dialog box Thus the required measurement time for the harmonic distortion measurement Cumulated Measurement Time CMT is CMT n SWT The required measurement time is indicated as CMT in the channel bar Harmonic Distortion Results As aresult of the harmonics distortion measurement the zero span sweeps of all detected harmonics are shown in the diagram separated
277. is stored internally as a table of value pairs frequency level one for each sweep point The measured offsets can then be used as calibration factors for subsequent measurement results The calibration can be performed using either transmission or reflection measurements The selected type of measurement used to determine the reference trace is included in the reference dataset Normalization Once the measurement setup has been calibrated and the reference trace is available subsequent measurement results can be corrected according to the calibration factors if necessary This is done by subtracting the reference trace from the measurement results This process is referred to as normalization and can be activated or deactivated as required If normalization is activated NOR is displayed in the channel bar next to the indication that an external generator is being used Ext Gen The normalized trace from the calibration sweep is a constant 0 dB line as lt calibration trace gt lt reference trace gt 0 E a N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 296 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output As long as the same settings are used for measurement as for calibration the normalized measurement results should not contain any inherent frequency or power distortions Thus the measured DUT values are very accurate Approximate normalization As soon as any of the calibration measurement settings are changed t
278. ith a spectral mask The mask is defined with reference to the input signal power The R amp S FSW allows for a flexible definition of all parameters in the SEM measurement The analyzer performs measurements in predefined frequency ranges with settings that can be specified individually for each of these ranges SEM measurement configurations can be saved to an xml file which can then be exported to another application or loaded on the R amp S FSW again at a later time Some predefined XML files are provided that contain ranges and parameters according to the selected standard In order to improve the performance of the R amp S FSW for spectrum emission mask meas urements a Fast SEM mode is available User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 164 R amp S FSW Measurements 5 5 2 5 5 3 Spectrum Emission Mask SEM Measurement Monitoring compliance of the spectrum is supported by a special limit check for SEM measurements Typical Applications Spectrum Emission Mask measurements are typically performed to ensure that modu lated signals remain within the valid signal level ranges defined by a particular transmis sion standard both in the transmission channel and neighboring channels Any violations of the mask may interfere with other transmissions The 3GPP TS 34 122 standard for example defines a mask for emissions outside the transmission channel This mask is defined relative to the input signal power Three fre quency ranges
279. ittering signal TGS H SOU asc sre retract cans a tata ede E dances Soa T 377 UMQUSH ONSET iina a Aa ENE 378 TROJET HYSTE TOSS iiaia iaaa aa iaaa sont cede a araa d Ea aaa Naaa 378 Angger Drop OUr TIME cri recat cede cietni eniten cenite tude sutensit adesencetit wecenatatetenty 379 Thgget Holdoff sdrisgia aaa anaa a aa a a a A aa 379 Trigger Source The trigger source defines which source must fulfill the condition that triggers the mea surement Basically this can be e Time the measurement is repeated in a regular interval S User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 377 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings EeE eEeEE gt gt gt gt gt gt gt E gt gt E gt E gt E gt E gt EE gt EE gt E gt E gt EE gt E gt gt gt E E EEE _ _ _E E E E E sy Trigger and Gate Configuration e Power an input signal is checked for a defined power level The trigger signal can be an internal one the input signal at one of various stages in the signal analysis process before or after the input mixer after the video filter etc or it may come from an external device via one of the TRIGGER INPUT connectors on the front or rear panel of the instrument A power sensor can also provide an external trigger see Using a Power Sensor as an External Power Trigger on page 283 For details on the available trigger sources see Trigger Source on page 384 Trigger O
280. ix traces simultaneously with a different weighting detector for each trace In this case the R amp S FSW searches for peaks on all traces separately provided that you have assigned at least one marker to each trace A typical selection for EMI measurement is to use the peak and the average detector After initial measurement search for peaks on the peak trace and the average trace separately so that the distribution of narrowband and wideband sources of interference can be taken into account Example e Inthe initial measurement determine the peak on one trace using the average detec tor by assigning a marker to that trace For the marker frequency perform a refined measurement using the CISPR or RMS average detector e In the initial measurement determine the peak on another trace using the peak detector by assigning another marker to that trace For this marker frequency perform a refined measurement using the quasipeak detector Final Measurement at the Marker Position Finding peaks with the help of an initial marker peak search reduces data to be evaluated and thus measurement time A final measurement with a special EMI detector can then refine the intial results The R amp S FSW EMI measurement performs the final measurement automatically as soon as a detector for the final test is defined for an EMI marker and the marker is activated The final measurement starts immediately after the marker has been set The advantage of
281. l 95 dBm Procedure OV S W Ss Preset the R amp S FSW Set the center frequency to 128 MHz Set the span to 100 MHz Set the reference level to 30 dBm Set the RF attenuation to 0 dB The signal is measured with the auto peak detector and is completely hidden in the intrinsic noise of the R amp S FSW MultiView Spectrum Ref Level 30 00 dBm RBW 1 MHz 2 Att O SWT Sys VBW Lietz Mode Auto FFT I Frequency Sweep CF 128 0 MHz 1001 pts 10 0 MHz Span 100 0 MHz Fig 5 19 Sine wave signal with low S N ratio To suppress noise spikes average the trace In the Traces configuration dialog set the Trace mode to Average see Trace Mode on page 418 The traces of consecutive sweeps are averaged To perform averaging the R amp S FSW automatically switches on the sample detector The RF signal therefore can be more clearly distinguished from noise SSS SSS Sz User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 247 R amp S FSW Measurements MultiView Spectrum Ref Level 30 00 dam RBW 1 MHz Att Odd SWT 9ps VBW itMRz Mode Auto FFT 1001 10 0 MHz Span 100 0 MHz Fig 5 20 RF sine wave signal with low S N ratio with an averaged trace 7 Instead of trace averaging you can select a video filter that is narrower than the resolution bandwidth Set the trace mode back to Clear Write then set the VBW to 10 kHz manually in the Bandwidth configuration dialog The RF signal can be distinguished from noise more clearly
282. l within the selected resolution band width correctly irrespective of the amplitude distribution without additional correction factors being required The R amp S FSW allows you to perform ACLR measurements on input containing multiple signals for different communication standards A measurement standard is provided that allows you to define multiple discontiguous transmit channels at specified frequencies independant from the selected center frequency The ACLR measurement determines the power levels of the individual transmit adjacent and CACLR channels as well as the total power for each subblock of transmit channels A detailed measurement example is provided in chapter 5 2 7 Measurement Exam ples on page 147 Channel Power Results For channel or adjacent channel power measurements the individual channels are indi cated by different colored bars in the diagram The height of each bar corresponds to the measured power of that channel In addition the name of the channel Adj Alt1 TX1 etc or a user defined name is indicated above the bar separated by a line which has no further meaning For Fast ACLR measurements which are performed in the time domain the power versus time is shown for each channel ree User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 107 R amp S FSW Measurements Channel Power and Adjacent Channel Power ACLR Measurement All Spectrum Ref Level 7 B Att 1 ACLR 1001 pts 419 0 kHz Span 4 19 MHz
283. le CDMA transmission modes in particular may have power peaks that are large compared to the average power For signals of this kind the transmitter must provide large reserves for the peak power to prevent signal compression and thus an increase of the bit error rate at the receiver The peak power or the crest factor of a signal is therefore an important transmitter design criterion The crest factor is defined as the peak power to mean power ratio or logarith mically as the peak level minus the average level of the signal To reduce power con sumption and cut costs transmitters are not designed for the largest power that could ever occur but for a power that has a specified probability of being exceeded e g 0 01 The statistical functions provide information on such signal criteria 5 7 3 APD and CCDF Results Amplitude Probability Distribution APD As a result of the Amplitude Probability Distribution APD function the probability of measured amplitude values is displayed During a selectable measurement time all mea sured amplitude values are assigned to an amplitude range The number of amplitude values in the specific ranges is counted and the result is displayed as a histogram Each bar of the histogram represents the percentage of measured amplitudes within the spe cific amplitude range The x axis represents the amplitude values and is scaled in abso lute values dBm User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 209 R amp S
284. le contains all required parameters If the selected table is not valid for the selected band an error message is displayed If no conversion loss table is available yet create a new table first as described in To define a new conversion loss table on page 339 6 Optionally select Basic Settings gt Auto ID On to activate automatic signal identifi cation 7 If necessary adapt the tolerance limit by selecting Basic Settings gt Auto ID Thresh old E SS N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 338 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output To define a new conversion loss table 1 Select INPUT gt Input Source Config gt External Mixer gt Conversion Loss Table 2 Select New Table 3 Define a file name and optionally a comment for the new table 4 Define the band and mixer settings for which the conversion loss table is to be used These settings will be compared to the current mixer settings during the validation check when the table is imported 5 Define the reference values for the frequency dependant conversion loss a Select Insert Value to add a new row in the table b Enter the first reference frequency c Enter the corresponding conversion loss value The conversion loss function is updated and displayed in the preview diagram in the dialog box d Repeat these steps to define up to 50 reference values 6 Select Save The table is stored and is then available for impor
285. legecaetaetianeeee at 319 Bias CUMO 52s ccacdecstsssccasvcaads i aia u aaa a a aa aa e a aa Eiaa 320 Conversion Loss Tables ccccceceecceeccceeceeeeeeeee ence eaaaeaeeeeceeeeeeseeseceeeneneeneeeeeeees 321 Automatic Signal dentification cicksie dick bn didn addenda 322 Frequency Ranges In a common spectrum analyzer rather than providing one large and thus inaccurate filter or providing several filters to cover the required frequency range of the input signal at a high cost a single very accurate filter is used Therefore the input signal must be converted to the frequencies covered by the single accurate filter This is done by a mixer which converts and multiplies the frequency of the input signal with the help of the local oscillator LO The result is a higher and lower intermediate frequency IF The local oscillator can be tuned within the supported frequency range of the input signal In order to extend the supported frequency range of the input signal an external mixer can be used In this case the LO frequency is output to the external mixer where it is mixed with the RF input from the original input signal In addition the harmonics of the LO are mixed with the input signal and converted to new intermediate frequencies Thus a wider range of frequencies can be obtained The IF from the external mixer is then returned to the spectrum analyzer The frequency of the input signal can be expressed as a f
286. ling ratio is defined manually The span resolution bandwidth ratio can be set in the range from 1 to 10000 Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution RATio on page 768 RBW VBW Sets the coupling ratio between the resolution bandwidth and the video bandwidth This setting is only effective if VBW is set to auto mode For more information see chapter 6 5 1 3 Coupling VBW and RBW on page 364 Sine 1 1 video bandwidth resolution bandwidth This is the default setting for the coupling ratio RBW VBW and is rec ommended if sinusoidal signals are to be measured Pulse 1 video bandwidth 10 x resolution bandwidth or video bandwidth 10 MHz max VBW Recommended for pulse signals Noise 10 video bandwidth resolution bandwidth 10 Recommended for noise measurements E SE N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 370 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings bo Ty Bandwidth Filter and Sweep Configuration Manual The coupling ratio is defined manually The RBW VBW ratio can be set in the range of 0 001 to 1000 Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo AUTO on page 769 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo RATio on page 770 Filter Type Defines the filter type The following filter types are available Normal 3dB Channel RRC 5 Pole not available for sweep type FFT CISPR 6 dB requires EMI R amp S FSW K54 option MIL Std 6 dB requires EMI R amp S
287. lowing softkeys are not available these settings are configured in the Power Sensor Configuration dialog box seechap ter 6 2 3 2 Power Sensor Settings on page 284 e Trigger Level on page 387 e Slope on page 389 e Hysteresis on page 388 e Trigger Holdoff on page 388 Note For R amp S power sensors the Gate Mode Lvl is not supported The signal sent by these sensors merely reflects the instant the level is first exceeded rather than a time period However only time periods can be used for gating in level mode Thus the trigger impulse from the sensors is not long enough for a fully gated measurement the mea surement cannot be completed Remote command TRIG SOUR PSE see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 785 SWE EGAT SOUR PSE for gated triggering see SENSe SWEep EGATe SOURcCe on page 788 Time Trigger Source lt Trigger Settings Triggers in a specified repetition interval Remote command TRIG SOUR TIME see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 785 Trigger Level Trigger Settings Defines the trigger level for the specified trigger source For gated measurements this setting also defines the gate level For details on supported trigger levels see the data sheet Remote command TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IFPower on page 783 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel 1QPower on page 784 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernal lt po
288. mal 3 1 kHz 10 kHz 100 kHz 1 MHz 3 kHz 30 kHz 300 kHz 3 MHz Sweep Time Mode Auto Auto Auto Auto Sweep Time 4 19 ms 837 ps 2 64 ms 707 ps Detector RMS RMS RMS RMS 0 dBm 0 dBm 0 dBm 0 dBm RF Att Mode Auto Auto Auto Auto RF Attenuator 10 dB 10 dB 10 dB 10 dB Sweep Points 4001 32001 32001 Stop After Sweep off off off Transducer None None None None Limit Check Absolute Absolute Absolute Absolute Abs Limit Start 13 dBm 13 dBm 13 dBm 13 dBm Abs Limit Stop 13 dBm 13 dBm 13 dBm 13 dBm Range Siarl Range SloPhuerimoanui rinisin nauna E 201 Filer Typ Eerme a E T TRTE EE 201 REN cite aged e a EaR Ee a aa ee teaeuunsraieneouses 201 VEW eie a a a E E 201 Sweep TINS MOG ereccrocoirccineari ci a EEE EAER ET 201 MOWER TIMO cinneann a aa A aaa a aA aE EEE 201 BIE Ee EEE T A E A E N A T N 202 Pe arainn M Aaaa E E a 202 RF Att IMO ake cde cnecte ca siducascetne tikeaseciec sdleqec bins idbevacvade ltewsecndsaaceudeenseaaeevdraur aaeuaeneaenae 202 BRP ES UU UO EE A E ous Lut da cas sa Clete EN E 202 PIANO o Neena tin ctnecareussauudal a ra aaa 202 SWeep POMS enion dan aaa a a a Ea Aa aa A EENEN EEEE AEN 202 Stop After SWCD iriaiess ienai aeiia aaia aaaea iaa aa aa aa iaia aiaia 202 DR SO S E AE T ANA EAEE A E E E A E O 203 Limit COCK ieis oange a a a a pa aeaa a Aa 203 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 200 R amp S FSW Measurements a SSS Ee Se ee ee Spurious Emissions Measurement Abs Limit SIA SLORY norinni aiaia KAANAA
289. ment e Spurious Emissions Measurement Configuration cccccccesseeccceeeeeteesseeeeeeeees 199 e How to Perform a Spurious Emissions MeaSurement cccccccececeeceeeseeseeeeaeaes 205 e Reference ASCII Export File Format SpuriouS 222 ceeccceeeeeedeeeeeeeneeeees 206 5 6 1 About the Measurement The Spurious Emissions measurement monitors unwanted RF products outside the assigned frequency band generated by an amplifier The spurious emissions are usually measured across a wide frequency range The Spurious Emissions measurement allows a flexible definition of all parameters A result table indicates the largest deviations of the absolute power from the limit line for each range and the results can be checked against defined limits automatically MultiView Spectrum Ref Level 0 00 dBm Mode Auto Sweep 1 Spurious Emissions Start 9 0 kHz 68704 pts 1 27 GHz Stop 12 75 GHz 2 Result Summary Range Low Range Up RBW Frequency Power Abs Alvimit kHz 150 kH 1 136 62411 kHz 61 33 dBm 48 33 dB 0 MHz 10 kHz 302 94301 kHz 73 53 dBm 60 53 dB Hz z 230 76857 MHz 75 90 dBm 62 90 dB H 1 71948 GHz 72 30 dBm 59 30 dB 5 6 2 Spurious Emissions Measurement Results The measured signal including any spurious emissions and optionally the detected peaks are displayed in the Spurious Emissions measurement diagram If defined the limit lines and the limit check results are also indicated In addition to the graphical res
290. ment which monitors compliance with a spectral mask and opens a submenu to configure the measurement For details see chapter 5 5 Spectrum Emission Mask SEM Measurement on page 164 Remote command SENS SWE MODE ESP see SENSe SWEep MODE on page 674 Results CALC MARK FUNC POW RES CPOW PPOW see CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion POWer RESult on page 639 CALC LIM FAIL see CALCulate LIMit lt k gt FAIL on page 905 TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 853 TRACe lt n gt DATA X on page 854 chapter 11 5 6 Measuring the Spectrum Emission Mask on page 673 Spurious Emissions Activates the Spurious Emissions measurement which monitors unwanted RF products outside the assigned frequency band generated by an amplifier A submenu to configure the measurement is opened For details see chapter 5 6 Spurious Emissions Measurement on page 195 Remote command SENS SWE MODE LIST see SENSe SWEep MODE on page 674 Results TRAC DATA SPUR see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 853 chapter 11 5 7 Measuring Spurious Emissions on page 699 APD Measures the amplitude probability density APD and opens a submenu to configure the measurement For details see chapter 5 7 Statistical Measurements APD CCDF on page 208 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt STATistics APD STATe on page 712 Results CALCulate STATistics RESult lt t gt on page 719 User M
291. mic range When harmonics are being measured the obtainable dynamic range depends on the second harmonic intercept of the signal analyzer The second harmonic intercept is the virtual input level at the RF input mixer at which the level of the 2nd harmonic becomes equal to the level of the fundamental wave In practice however applying a level of this magnitude would damage the mixer Nevertheless the available dynamic range for meas uring the harmonic distance of a DUT can be calculated relatively easily using the second harmonic intercept As shown in figure 5 14 the level of the 2 harmonic drops by 20 dB if the level of the fundamental wave is reduced by 10 dB Level display id Z 2nd harmonic 4 intercept point 7 om ist harmonic 7 armoni r Fig 5 14 Extrapolation of the 1st and 2nd harmonics to the 2nd harmonic intercept at 40 dBm The following formula for the obtainable harmonic distortion d in dB is derived from the straight line equations and the given intercept point dy S H 1 P 1 D User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 228 R amp S FSW Measurements Harmonic Distortion Measurement where dz harmonic distortion S H second harmonic intercept P mixer level dBm D The mixer level is the RF level applied to the RF input minus the set RF attenuation The formula for the internally generated level P4 at the 2 harmonic in dBm is P4 2 Pi S H I 2 The lower measu
292. mmands for EMI Measurements on page 736 Marker Functions In addition to the measurement functions some special marker functions are available See chapter 7 4 2 3 Marker Function Configuration on page 458 All Functions Off Switches off all measurement functions and returns to a basic frequency sweep 5 2 Channel Power and Adjacent Channel Power ACLR Measurement Measuring the power in channels adjacent to the carrier or transmission channel is useful to detect interference The results are displayed as a bar chart for the individual channels e About Channel Power MeasureMentts cccccccseececeesseececeeseeeceeseeeeceuseeesenseeeeses 106 Channel Power RESUS i scccieciiis cciasdcevccaacsdevecsiendavasvaavsesedesassecaucseaasaaes candcsasnedaare 107 Channel Power BaSICS cccccccecsssseceecscseeceececessseceseneseceeeceuaeceeeteaeeeeeeseneeseeees 109 Channel Power Configurations ssriseraniisini rinii ni Niinan iNi alee 119 MSR ACLR Configuration eeir nir vied hated EE EEE 129 e How to Perform Channel Power Measurement ccccccssseeceecensseeeeeeenseeeeeees 143 Measurement Examples cccccccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaceeeaeeaneeaeeaeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeees 147 e Reference Predefined CP ACLR Standards cccccccccssseceecesseeeseceeseeeseeseeeeees 153 5 2 1 About Channel Power Measurements Measuring channel power and adjacent channel power is one of the most impor
293. mon signals see chapter 5 2 2 Channel Power Results on page 107 However the Tx D User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 118 R amp S FSW Measurements SS SS SS a a ee Channel Power and Adjacent Channel Power ACLR Measurement channel results are grouped by subblocks and subblock totals are provided instead of a total Tx channel power Instead of the individual channel frequency offsets the absolute center frequencies are indicated for the transmit channels The CACLR results for each gap channel are appended at the end of the table The CACLR results are calculated as the power in the CACLR channel divided by the power sum of the two closest transmis sion channels to either side of it 2 Result Summary Multi Standard Radio Channel Bandwidth Frequency Power M kt Te i 81 06 dBm 77 68 dBm 29 07 dBm 42 85 dBm t kA Tot 28 89 dBm channel Bandwidth Frequency Power M kt 43 85 dBm Channel Bandwidth Offset tower Upper 10 Mt e 33 27 dB 32 63 dB Alti 840 Mt 4 49 76 dB 50 37 dB Channel Bandwidth Offset tower E 40 Mt 14 08 dB 32 12 dB Restrictions and dependencies As the signal structure in multi standard radio signals may vary considerably the chan nels can be defined very flexibly for the ACLR measurement with the R amp S FSW No checks or limitations are implemented concerning the channel definitions apart from the maximum number of channels to be defined Thus you will not be notified if transmit ch
294. n 1 dB steps down to 0 dB also using the rotary knob Other entries are rounded to the next integer value The range is speci fied in the data sheet If the defined reference level cannot be set for the defined RF attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is displayed NOTICE Risk of hardware damage due to high power levels When decreasing the attenuation manually ensure that the power level does not exceed the maximum level allowed at the RF input as an overload may lead to hardware damage LSS M User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 357 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings ee a Amplitude and Vertical Axis Configuration For details see chapter 6 4 1 2 RF Attenuation on page 354 Remote command INPut ATTenuation on page 776 INPut ATTenuation AUTO on page 777 Using Electronic Attenuation Option B25 If option R amp S FSW B25 is installed you can also activate an electronic attenuator In Auto mode the settings are defined automatically in Manual mode you can define the mechanical and electronic attenuation separately Note Electronic attenuation is not available for stop frequencies or center frequencies in zero span gt 13 6 GHz In Auto mode RF attenuation is provided by the electronic attenuator as much as pos sible to reduce the amount of mechanical switching required Mechanical attenuation may provide a better signal to noise ratio however When yo
295. n an oscilloscope On the time axis the grid lines correspond to 1 10 of the current sweep time D User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 102 R amp S FSW Measurements eS SS MMM Available Measurement Functions The Frequency menu is displayed Use the general measurement settings to configure the measurement e g via the Overview see chapter 6 Common Measurement Set tings on page 273 Most result evaluations can also be used for zero span measurements although some functions e g markers may work slightly differently and some may not be available If so this will be indicated in the function descriptions see chapter 7 Common Analysis and Display Functions on page 397 Remote command SENSe FREQuency SPAN on page 765 INITiate IMMediate on page 635 INITiate CONTinuous on page 634 Ch Power ACLR Measures the active channel or adjacent channel power for one or more carrier signals depending on the current measurement configuration and opens a submenu to configure the channel power measurement For details see chapter 5 2 Channel Power and Adjacent Channel Power ACLR Mea surement on page 106 Remote command CALC MARK FUNC POW SEL ACP see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer SELect on page 641 Results CALC MARK FUNC POW RES ACP see CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion POWer RESult on page 639 chapter 11 5 3 Measuring the Channel Power and ACLR on page 643
296. n of this measurement can be defined automatically or manually To activate the automatic adjustment of a setting select the corresponding function in the AUTO SET menu or in the configuration dialog box for the setting where available MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode settings related to data acquisition can only be adjusted auto matically for the MSRA Master not the applications D Adjusting settings automatically during triggered measurements When you select an auto adjust function a measurement is performed to determine the optimal settings If you select an auto adjust funtion for a triggered measurement you are asked how the R amp S FSW should behave e default The measurement for adjustment waits for the next trigger e The measurement for adjustment is performed without waiting for a trigger The trigger source is temporarily set to Free Run After the measurement is com pleted the original trigger source is restored The trigger level is adjusted as follows For IF Power and RF Power triggers Trigger Level Reference Level 15 dB For Video trigger Trigger Level 85 Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure TRIG on page 794 Adjusting all Determinable Settings Automatically Auto Alll cceceeeeeeeceeeeeeees 394 Adjusting the Center Frequency Automatically Auto Freq ceceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 395 Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level cc
297. n of the frequency range for the pre defined bands see table 11 3 Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL BAND on page 806 Harmonic Order The harmonic order of the range for which the table is to be applied This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL HARMonic on page 808 Bias The bias current which is required to set the mixer to its optimum operating point It cor responds to the short circuit current The bias current can range from 10 mA to 10 mA The actual bias current is lower because of the forward voltage of the mixer diode s Tip You can also define the bias interactively while a preview of the trace with the changed setting is displayed see Bias Settings on page 331 Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL BIAS on page 806 Mixer Name Specifies the name of the external mixer for which the table is to be applied This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL MIXer on page 808 Mixer S N Specifies the serial number of the external mixer for which the table is to be applied This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL SNUMber on page 809 E a N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 335 R amp S
298. n page 351 E VOYY IY VIOdE AULO SWee E7 4 Frequency Signal Tracking Frequency Span FSCG 13 25 GHZ Full Span Span 26 5 GHZ Zero Span See Start Last Span Stop Axis Center Frequency Stepsize Stepsize Frequency Offset Value 0 0 Hz User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 347 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings Frequency and Span Configuration Frequency Signal Tracking State Tracking Bandwidth Tracking Threshold Signal Track Trace FREGUSNCY AXIS SCAG 2 0 2 ccccceceesececdyendecaccehenesedtedvenseteecnesesventeacntsesneceedneevabessbivvendeed 349 PU Sots ras cvcenancatdiveccadeablavsduastenddanedsashannered sashaendgad tat snacsad canbamnedadgansanneeadeabaswncauauana 349 BESO So eG arse cee Serta cca S See teva een aan eas T 349 East SPAN renina a aa concacncnaveetudaudanaacaundanannediuadderseenceateaasvausoadanher 350 Center Frequency StepsiZe ccccccscccccsssssscceceecseeeecsecseeeeeesecseeeeeessesneeeeessseneseeeeeees 350 Freguenoy OMSET aidoissa eae oh eee Nene and Ate ae eee 350 ROG NEI WAG MNOS acta coc sdecemectnntrincuce tea neu dianwcetantvndntudes ietdastecuselatavnsseneccnantdusteretewnceusstun 351 L Signal Tracking Sate rsen iiaeaae eaire eaaa a raal 351 L Tracking ai Ne ns2s 2 ncaa ced dan n aa eN Aa ENEA 351 L Tracking Threshold nncunccnciianinn nnani 351 L Signal Tack TACE ennaa a e 351 Center Defines the normal center frequen
299. n to the CF of the last Tx channel in the last subblock Adjacent channels are named Adj and Alt1 to Alt11 the names cannot be changed manually In all other respects channel definition is identical to common ACLR measurements Adjacent Channel Spacings Adjacent Channel Definition Channel spacings are normally predefined by the selected technology but can be changed For MSR signals adjacent channels are defined in relation to the center frequency of the first and last transmission channel in the entire block i e The spacing of the lower adjacent channels refers to the CF of the first Tx channel in the first subblock The spacing of the upper adjacent channels refers to the CF of the last Tx channel in the last subblock If you change the adjacent channel spacing ADJ all higher adjacent channel spacings ALT1 ALT2 are multiplied by the same factor new spacing value old spacing value Again only one value needs to be entered for equal channel spacing For different spac ing configure the spacings from top to bottom For details see chapter 5 2 6 3 How to Configure an MSR ACLR Measurement on page 145 Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing ACHannel on page 646 SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing ALTernate lt ch gt on page 647 Adjacent Channel Bandwidths Adjacent Channel Definition The adjacent channel bandwidth is normally predefined by the transmission technology standard The
300. nd SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESet on page 642 Sweep Time With the RMS detector a longer sweep time increases the stability of the measurement results For recommendations on setting this parameter see Sweep Time on page 113 The sweep time can be set via the softkey in the Ch Power menu and is identical to the general setting in the Sweep configuration dialog box Remote command SENSe SWEep TIME on page 772 Channel Setup The Channel Settings tab in the ACLR Setup dialog box provides all the channel set tings to configure the channel power or ACLR measurement You can define the channel settings for all channels independant of the defined number of used Tx or adjacent channels see Number of Channels Tx ADJ on page 123 For details on setting up channels see chapter 5 2 6 2 How to Set up the Channels on page 144 In addition to the specific channel settings the general settings Standard on page 121 and Number of Channels Tx ADJ on page 123 are also available in this tab The following settings are available in individual subtabs of the Channel Settings tab Channel Barwin Ses iiccsdratdexeciedecseestensisaneeeancdediousgec sd dieeuduattentuivdenseeietadedienegeedieesteead 127 Channel SPacinG S ccce i sa hed shed hada dene ET 127 LIMONES a ANS 128 MVC IGF NRCS ees iasid ace ca cate ecclesia eines canals acecetunec aiii 129 Channo NAMES oian aa EAA E A DAE ENAN 129
301. ndadeaiennand evade aa Ea EATE EEE 280 EE e E E AE E T E E 280 High Pass Filar T9 GHZ sona aA a AEEA E 280 VUGHPRESSIG ClO 023 ecssccexacecder m o E E aaa A AEE 280 INPUE CONNOCIOR iaraa a a a a ea a aaa aa aTa 281 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 279 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings b SSF EEE EE Ts Ty Data Input and Output Radio Frequency State Activates input from the RF INPUT connector Remote command INPut SELect on page 797 Input Coupling The RF input of the R amp S FSW can be coupled by alternating current AC or direct current DC AC coupling blocks any DC voltage from the input signal This is the default setting to prevent damage to the instrument Very low frequencies in the input signal may be dis torted However some specifications require DC coupling In this case you must protect the instrument from damaging DC input voltages manually For details refer to the data sheet Remote command INPut COUPling on page 796 Impedance The reference impedance for the measured levels of the R amp S FSW can be set to 50 Q or75Q 75 Q should be selected if the 50 Q input impedance is transformed to a higher impedance using a 75 Q adapter of the RAZ type 25 Q in series to the input impedance of the instrument The correction value in this case is 1 76 dB 10 log 750 500 This value also affects the unit conversion see Reference Level on page 356 Remote command INPut IMPedance on pa
302. ndawaatautiens 332 LO Level Defines the LO level of the external mixer s LO port Possible values are from 13 0 dBm to 17 0 dBm in 0 1 dB steps Default value is 15 5 dB Remote command SENSe MIXer LOPower on page 800 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 330 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings E EeE EE SS ___ aa2a__ _ E E EE E ES TT Ty Data Input and Output Signal ID Activates or deactivates visual signal identification Two sweeps are performed alter nately Trace 1 shows the trace measured on the upper side band USB of the LO the test sweep trace 2 shows the trace measured on the lower side band LSB i e the reference sweep Note that automatic signal identification is only available for measurements that perform frequency sweeps not in vector signal analysis or the I Q Analyzer for instance See also Automatic Signal Identification on page 322 Mathematical functions with traces and trace copy cannot be used with the Signal ID function Remote command SENSe MIXer SIGNal on page 800 Auto ID Activates or deactivates automatic signal identification Auto ID basically functions like Signal ID However the test and reference sweeps are converted into a single trace by a comparison of maximum peak values of each sweep point The result of this comparison is displayed in trace 3 if Signal ID is active at the same time If Signal ID is not activ
303. ndow to ensure correct operation For details see chapter 5 11 AM Modulation Depth Measurement on page 242 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion MDEPth STATe on page 735 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion MDEPth RESult on page 735 chapter 11 5 12 Measuring the AM Modulation Depth on page 734 Harmonic Distortion Measures the harmonic distortion including the total harmonic distortion and opens a submenu to configure the measurement User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 105 R amp S FSW Measurements a SS a ee es Channel Power and Adjacent Channel Power ACLR Measurement For details see chapter 5 9 Harmonic Distortion Measurement on page 227 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion HARMonics STATe on page 729 First harmonic CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CENTer on page 762 THD CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion HARMonics DISTortion on page 731 List of harmonics CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion HARMonics LIST on page 731 chapter 11 5 10 Measuring the Harmonic Distortion on page 729 EMI Detects electromagnetic interference in the signal and opens a submenu to configure the measurement For details see chapter 5 13 Electromagnetic Interference EMI Measurement R amp S FSW K54 on page 249 Remote command CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion FMEasurement STATe on page 737 chapter 11 5 13 Remote Co
304. ned for all alter nate ALT channels Thus only one value needs to be entered if all adjacent channels have the same bandwidth Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth CHANnel lt ch gt on page 646 SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth ACHannel on page 645 SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth ALTernate lt ch gt on page 645 Channel Spacings Channel spacings are normally defined by the selected standard but can be changed If the spacings are not equal the channel distribution in relation to the center frequency is as follows User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 127 R amp S FSW Measurements a SS a a Ss Channel Power and Adjacent Channel Power ACLR Measurement Odd number of Tx channels The middle Tx channel is centered to center frequency Even number of Tx channels The two Tx channels in the middle are used to calculate the frequency between those two channels This frequency is aligned to the center frequency The spacings between all Tx channels can be defined individually When you change the spacing for one channel the value is automatically also defined for all subsequent Tx channels in order to set up a system with equal Tx channel spacing quickly For different spacings a setup from top to bottom is necessary Tx1 2 spacing between the first and the second carrier Tx2 3 spacing between the second and the third carrier If you cha
305. never one of these parameters is changed A disable message is displayed on the screen To enable the correction function after changing one of these settings activate it again A new reference measurement is carried out Noise cancellation is also available in zero span Currently noise cancellation is only available for the following trace detectors see Detector on page 419 e RMS e Average e Sample e Positive Peak Remote command SENSe POWer NCORrection on page 776 Selected Trace The CP ACLR measurement can be performed on any active trace Remote command SENSe POWer TRACe on page 642 Absolute and Relative Values ACLR Mode The powers of the adjacent channels are output in dBm or dBm Hz absolute values or in dBc relative to the specified reference Tx channel Abs The absolute power in the adjacent channels is displayed in the unit of the y axis e g in dBm dByV Rel The level of the adjacent channels is displayed relative to the level of the transmission channel in dBc Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel MODE on page 665 Channel Power Levels and Density Power Unit By default the channel power is displayed in absolute values If Hz is activated the channel power density is displayed instead Thus the absolute unit of the channel power is switched from dBm to dBm Hz Note The channel power density in dBm Hz corresponds to the power inside a bandwidth of 1 Hz an
306. nfigurations You can define measurement configurations independently of a predefinded standard and save the current ACLR configuration as a user standard in an xml file You can then load the file and thus the settings again at a later time User defined standards are not supported for Fast ACLR and multicarrier ACLR meas urements Compatibility to R amp S FSP User standards created on an analyzer of the R amp S FSP family are compatible to the R amp S FSW User standards created on an R amp S FSW however are not necessarily com patible to the analyzers of the R amp S FSP family and may not work there To store a user defined configuration 1 Inthe Ch Power menu select the CP ACLR Config softkey to display the ACLR Setup dialog box 2 Configure the measurement as required see also chapter 5 2 6 2 How to Set up the Channels on page 144 3 Inthe General Settings tab select the Manage User Standards button to display the Manage dialog box 4 Define a file name for the user standard and select its storage location By default the xml file is stored in C R_S Instr acp_std However you can define any other storage location 5 Select Save SS ST User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 146 R amp S FSW Measurements 5 2 6 5 5 2 7 Channel Power and Adjacent Channel Power ACLR Measurement To load a user defined configuration 1 In the General Settings tab of the ACLR Setup dialog b
307. nfigured via the MEAS CONFIG key or in the Harmonic Distortion dialog box which is displayed as a tab in the Analysis dialog box or when you select the Harmonic Distortion Config softkey from the Harm Dist menu Harmonic Number of Harmonics 10 Harmonic Sweep ea 9 0 us Harmonic RBW Auto Adjust Settings The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in chapter 11 5 10 Measuring the Harmonic Distortion on page 729 Noor PaO Seane eaea aa aE aae a EEE e o aaa eenid 231 FHammonie Sweep TIME oirinimeensre aa a A E AARAA 232 Harmonie RBW AUG s 2ccc cccscceieted ecccveeats eeeecdeeedi eal eeud aeudetaeivds encveeteviciewedeeieieigevonceed 232 AASI SONDIS aa iiceeetic stant deecestinaddeetd iia avieds ede dade sic again ei inane deed 232 No of Harmonics Defines the number of harmonics to be measured The range is from 1 to 26 Default is 10 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion HARMonics NHARmonics on page 730 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 231 R amp S FSW Measurements 5 9 5 Harmonic Distortion Measurement Harmonic Sweep Time Defines the sweep time for the zero span measurement on each harmonic frequency This setting is identical to the normal sweep time for zero span see also Sweep Time on page 370 Remote command SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO on page 773 Harmonic RBW Auto Enables disables the automatic adjustment of the re
308. nformation on configuring interfaces see chapter 10 1 1 Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols on page 554 GeMerator Type cecs a ENEE EAEE 303 WCAG e E A E A N A A E N 304 TIL MAAS hake iania ain ener aae ainaka Sanaian e i balian nue Suenan nd Eain Ear AAE 304 GPIB Address 7 TCPIIP Address oriin aaa a a Aaa AAE 304 EEEE E A E E les denial T A A E a A A E 304 Edit Generator Set p File iiiscccteaccaddess cacacecatanasciadenaceacseasen aagaedeund aaiaiecctanaextacesasaameaesene 304 Frequency Min Frequency Max ccccccccesccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeteaeeseeneeeseeaeetseseeeseas 305 eVeliMine LI M erna an A oetdninieeld elas wean nae 305 Generator Type Selects the generator type and thus defines the generator setup file to use See also Overview of Generators Supported by the R amp S FSW B10 Option on page 294 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 303 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output For an overview of supported generators see Overview of Generators Supported by the R amp S FSW B10 Option on page 294 For information on generator setup files see Gen erator Setup Files on page 295 Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice GENerator TYPE on page 819 Interface Type of interface connection used The following interfaces are currently supported e GPIB e TCP IP not by all generators For details on which signal generators support which interfaces see the documentation
309. nge the adjacent channel spacing ADJ all higher adjacent channel spacings ALT1 ALT2 are multiplied by the same factor new spacing value old spacing value Again only one value needs to be entered for equal channel spacing For different spac ing configure the spacings from top to bottom For details see chapter 5 2 6 2 How to Set up the Channels on page 144 Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing CHANnel lt ch gt on page 647 SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing ACHannel on page 646 SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing ALTernate lt ch gt on page 647 Limit Checking During an ACLR measurement the power values can be checked whether they exceed user defined or standard defined limits A relative or absolute limit can be defined or both Both limit types are considered regardless whether the measured levels are abso lute or relative values The check of both limit values can be activated independently If any active limit value is exceeded the measured value is displayed in red and marked by a preceding asterisk in the result table 2 Result Summa W CDMA 3GPP DL x oO 307 RBW 1 000 MHz Range Low rPequenc Power Abs Power Rel ALimit 2 09053 GHz 40 68 dBm 71 22 dB 17 18 dB 2 09268 GHz 40 13 dBm 70 67 dB 20 63 dB 2 09647 GHz 52 60 dBm 83 14 dB 20 10 dB 2 09652 GHz 54 30 dBm 84 84 dB 22 38 dB 2 09728 GHz 51 51 dBm 82 05 dB 31 01 dB 2 10270 GHz 54 13 dBm 84 67 dB 33 63 dB 2 10355 GHz 51
310. nges You can easily define a sweep list with symmetrical range settings i e the ranges to the left and right of the reference range are defined symmectrically When symmetrical setup is activated the current sweep list configuration is changed to define a symmetrical setup regarding the reference range The number of ranges to the left of the reference range is reflected to the right i e any missing ranges on the right are inserted while superfluous SSE N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 168 R amp S FSW Measurements n__n alH Spectrum Emission Mask SEM Measurement ranges are removed The values in the ranges to the right of the reference range are adapted symmetrically to those in the left ranges Symmetrical ranges fulfull the conditions required for Fast SEM mode see chap ter 5 5 4 3 Fast SEM Measurements on page 171 Power classes If the signal power level to be monitored may vary and the limits will vary accordingly you can define power classes which can then be assigned to the frequency ranges Thus the limits for the signal levels can be defined differently for varying input levels For instance for higher input levels a transmission standard may allow for higher power levels in adjacent channels whereas for lower input levels the allowed deviation may be stricter Up to four different power classes can be defined 5 5 4 2 Limit Lines in SEM Measurements On the R amp S FSW the spectrum emission mask is
311. ngs Adjust Settings i i c 0ch eis eecceees sed ccaeeeeeddeeeeetencantaeestundianeeerets 125 WEG TMM Gees ics cca ceiasaaccuicenananasdniecsnanad cusedaasansadendesaabsaadagedgnbanadeacdcana nad detuduadrencueedesas 126 Standard The main measurement settings can be stored as a standard file When such a standard is loaded the required channel and general measurement settings are automatically set on the R amp S FSW However the settings can be changed Predefined standards are available for standard measurements but standard files with user defined configurations can also be created Note If the Multi Standard Radio standard is selected the ACLR Setup dialog box is replaced by the MSR ACLR Setup dialog box see chapter 5 2 5 MSR ACLR Config uration on page 129 If any other predefined standard or NONE is selected the ACLR Setup dialog box is restored see chapter 5 2 4 Channel Power Configuration on page 119 Note that changes in the configuration are not stored when the dialog boxes are exchanged Predefined Standards Standard Predefined standards contain the main measurement settings for standard measure ments When such a standard is loaded the required channel settings are automatically set on the R amp S FSW However the settings can be changed The predefined standards contain the following settings Channel bandwidths Channel spacings Detector Trace Average setting Resolution Bandwidth
312. ngs Tx Channel Settings Adj Gap Channel Settings Settings Adj Channels Spacing Bandwidth Weighting Filter Relative Limit Absolute Limit oe pee e ee ee ee OT PE E PP oT VA t CACLR Channels Spadng Bandwidth Weighting Filter Relative Limit Absolute Limit GAP 1 2 5mHz 3 84MHz N For details on MSR signals see chapter 5 2 3 4 Measurement on Multi Standard Radio MSR Signals on page 116 For details on setting up channels see chapter 5 2 6 3 How to Configure an MSR ACLR Measurement on page 145 Number of Adjacent Channels ADJ Count 2 c cccecccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseieeeeteseeeeeeteees 139 Limit GRO GKING snc E EEEE E 139 Adiacent Channel Definition essrsrisirariiisireii inire a REAA AEEA deters 140 L Adjacent Channel SpadngS eiren inania a a 140 L Adjacent Channel Bandwidths cccscsscscssscsessscsescscsescscsescscsessscecsescecseseeas 140 L Weighting Filters ccccccccsecccsssccscseceseseseseseececsesesccesceccesescceseeceeseneeeeenees 141 DTT WN E ES 141 Gap GCACLR Channel DeniniWONs t scssnceteecdiessscedtedetieaaedecdeadeuesbes sauatedthutataveddetveree 142 L Gap CACLR Channel Spacing6 scssccesccecccececcsesesesetetseetetsseteseeeees 142 L Gap CACLR Channel Bandwidths cccsccccsesesesssescececsnsssesesescsescecseeneees 142 L Weighting FINI osiss5ncsivesosachacusdosnsdnncsedinnetinanesbsnnetindsdcesuneabdsbassiubostanehesut 142 Limit A ei
313. nnel s 2 2 c 0 ccccciccseseeeccecedcdansccousceddcasnaccncdededdesaceedececdennes 144 e How to Configure an MSR ACLR Measurement ccceccecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeaaeees 145 e How to Manage User Defined Configurations cccceseceeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeaaeees 146 e How to Compare the Tx Channel Power in Successive Measurements 5 147 How to Perform a Standard Channel Power Measurement Performing a channel power or ACLR measurement according to common standards is a very easy and straightforward task with the R amp S FSW 1 Press the MEAS key or tap Select Measurement in the Overview 2 Select Channel Power ACLR The measurement is started immediately with the default settings 3 Select the CP ACLR Standard softkey and select a standard from the list The measurement is restarted with the predefined settings for the selected standard 4 If necessary edit the settings for your specific measurement as described in chap ter 5 2 6 2 How to Set up the Channels on page 144 or load a user defined con figuration see To load a user defined configuration on page 147 D User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 143 R amp S FSW Measurements Channel Power and Adjacent Channel Power ACLR Measurement 5 2 6 2 Howto Set up the Channels Channel definition is the basis for measuring power levels in certain frequency ranges Usually the power levels in one or more carrier Tx channels and possibly the a
314. nstrument Type lt Type gt lt Application gt Application lt Application gt lt Instrument gt lt LinkDirection Name Name gt lt ReferencePower gt E a MN User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 190 R amp S FSW Measurements e The e The Spectrum Emission Mask SEM Measurement lt Method gt Method lt Method gt lt ReferencePower gt lt PowerClass Index n gt lt For contents of the PowerClass node see table 5 5 gt lt Define up to four PowerClass nodes gt lt PowerClass gt lt LinkDirection gt lt RS_SEM_ACP_File gt PowerClass element is structured as follows lt PowerClass Index n gt lt StartPower Unit dBm InclusiveFlag true Value StartPowerValue gt lt StopPower Unit dBm InclusiveFlag false Value StopPowerValue gt lt DefaultLimitFailMode gt Limit Fail Mode lt DefaultLimitFailMode gt lt Range Index n gt lt For contents of the Range node see table 5 6 gt lt Define up to twenty Range nodes gt lt Range gt lt PowerClass gt Range element is structured as follows lt Range Index n gt lt Name Name gt lt ChannelType gt Channel Type lt Channel Type gt lt WeightingFilter gt lt Type gt FilterType lt Type gt lt RollOffFactor gt Factor lt RollOffFactor gt lt Bandwith gt Bandwidth lt Bandwidth gt lt WeightingFilter gt lt FrequencyRange gt lt Start gt RangeStart
315. nt 106 e Carrier to Noise Measurements cccccececceeeeeceeeaeeeeceeeeeeeedeeeeseneeeneeaaaaeeeeeeeees 154 e Occupied Bandwidth Measurement OBW 222 0 ccseeceeetecedeeeeeesseeadenereeesees 158 e Spectrum Emission Mask SEM Measurement ccccceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeteeeeeneaeeeees 164 Spurious Emissions Measurement ccccccecccceeeeeeeeececeeceeceeeeeeeeeteeecssanaeeeeeeeees 195 e Statistical Measurements APD CODE ceccisscexeetiecsavidexcteneces esaadtened essa vaaandenteasies 208 e Time Domain Power Measurement ccccccccceceeeeeccececeeeceeeeeeeeseeenesaeeeneseeeeess 222 e Harmonic Distortion MeaSUureMent cccccceeceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeescnneeeeeeeees 227 Third Order Intercept TO Measurement c c0ccc se eeseeeetessciieeveseaesesieaeeeee 233 e AM Modulation Depth Measurementt ccccceeceeeeececceeeeceeeeeeeeeteeeeeaaneeeeeeeeees 242 6 Basie MEASUPEMGING eenia i aaa aiaia an 245 e Electromagnetic Interference EMI Measurement R amp S FSW K54 ee 249 Available Measurement Functions The measurement function determines which settings functions and evaluation methods are available in the R amp S FSW The various measurement functions are described in detail here They are selected in the Select Measurement dialog box that is displayed when you press the MEAS key or tap Select Measurement in the configuration Overview User
316. nt Remote command SENSe ESPectrum MSR GSM CPResent on page 694 SENSe ESPectrum MSR LTE CPResent on page 694 Apply to SEM Configures the SEM sweep list according to the specified MSR settings Remote command SENSe ESPectrum MSR APPLy on page 693 5 5 5 5 Standard Files In the Standard Files tab of the Spectrum Emission Mask dialog box you can save the current measurement settings as a user defined standard or load stored measurement settings Furthermore you can delete an existing settings file Sweep List Reference Range Power Classes Standard Files Drive Flue sem_std C R_S Instr sem_std Restore Standard Files File Name For details see chapter 5 5 6 1 How to Manage SEM Settings Files on page 187 Selecting the Storage Location Drive Path Files Select the storage location of the settings file on the instrument or an external drive The Drive indicates the internal C or any connected external drives e g a USB stor age device The Path contains the drive and the complete file path to the currently selected folder The Files list contains all subfolders and files of the currently selected path User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 182 R amp S FSW Measurements a aa Spectrum Emission Mask SEM Measurement The default storage location for the SEM settings files is C R_S instr sem_std Remote command MMEMory CATalog on page 90
317. nually but is determined auto matically depending on the center frequency For details on the used frequencies see the data sheet The currently used output frequency is indicated in the field otherwise used to define the frequency manually in the Output settings dialog box see IF Wide Out Frequency on page 342 Input Source Settings The input source determines which data the R amp S FSW will analyze Input settings can be configured via the INPUT OUTPUT key in the Input dialog box Some settings are also available in the Amplitude tab of the Amplitude dialog box The Digital IQ input source is only available in applications that support I Q data pro cessing and is described in detail in the R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer User Manual External mixers are not supported in MSRA mode Radio Frequency IMPON isciani aa iaae aa 279 Proba SOUNE era ATEREA E A 281 Radio Frequency Input The default input source for the R amp S FSW is Radio Frequency i e the signal at the RF INPUT connector on the front panel of the R amp S FSW If no additional options are installed this is the only available input source 1 Cia 2 Seactrum uea I Input Source Power Sensor Probes Frequency External Input Coupling Mixer Impedance Digital I 9 Q High Pass Fiter 1 3 GHz Analog YIG Preselector Baseband Input Connector Radio Prequeney State 020040 dacs ida i alerted ine ee 280 NP COPING eiaa sacs suaduacs sdnnn
318. o cedures Measurement Example 1 ACPR Measurement on an CDMA2000 Signal 148 Measurement Example 2 Measuring Adjacent Channel Power of a W CDMA Uplink SIGMA A E E renee bulge E E TE 149 Measurement Example 3 Measuring the Intrinsic Noise of the R amp S FSW with the Channel Power Funcion sciecciairn neninn a EE a AE E E 152 E I User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 147 R amp S FSW Measurements Channel Power and Adjacent Channel Power ACLR Measurement 5 2 7 1 Measurement Example 1 ACPR Measurement on an CDMA2000 Signal Test setup Signal generator settings e g R amp S SMU Frequency 850 MHz Level 0 dBm Modulation CDMA2000 Procedure 1 Preset the R amp S FSW Set the center frequency to 850 MHz Set the span to 4 MHz Set the reference level to 70 dBm a Ff Oo DN Select the Channel Power ACLR measurement function from the Select Measure ment dialog box 6 Set the CDMA2000 1X standard for adjacent channel power measurement in the ACLR Setup dialog box The R amp S FSW sets the channel configuration according to the 2000 standard with 2 adjacent channels above and 2 below the transmit channel The spectrum is dis played in the upper part of the screen the numeric values of the results and the channel configuration in the lower part of the screen The various channels are rep resented by vertical lines on the graph The frequency span resolution bandw
319. of the OBW measurement the occupied bandwidth Occ BW is indicated in the marker results Furthermore the marker at the center frequency and the temporary markers are indicated The measurement is performed on the trace with marker 1 In order to evaluate another trace marker 1 must be placed on another trace see Assigning the Marker to a Trace The OBW calculation is repeated if the Search Limits are changed without performing a new sweep Thus the OBW for a multicarrier signal can be determined using only one sweep MultiView Spectrum Ref Level 0 00 dBm Att dB SWT ims 30 2 Mode Auto FFT 1 Occupied Bandwidth CF 2 1 GHz 1001 pts 1 15 MHz Span 11 52 MHz 2 Marker Table Type Ref Tre stimulus Response Function Function Result Mi 1 2 09 27 37 dBm Q sHz lt 8 dBm oc Bw 4 166073926 MHz T2 1 2 SH 33 12 dBm Remote command The determined occupied bandwidth can also be queried using the remote command CALC MARK FUNC POW RES OBWorCALC MARK FUNC POW RES AOBW While the OBW parameter returns only the occupied bandwidth the AOBW parameter also returns the position and level of the temporary markers T1 and T2 used to calculate the occupied bandwidth CALC MARK FUNC POW SEL OBW see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer SELect on page 641 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer STATe on page 641 CALC MARK FUNC POW RES OBW see CALCulate MARKer FUNC
320. of the six available traces COMMON saria uiaei aa iaaa a a a aE A aa ei Ea a 216 FO EE E EE EE E T N A E E cee seaunaiaeu eaasnee 216 Rango A UEB oraren a a A EAA EN 216 Range lt x gt Start Stop necesn a 216 Comment An optional comment can be defined for the gate range settings of each trace Remote command SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe lt k gt COMMent on page 714 Period Length of the period to be traced The period is the same for all traces If you change the period for one trace it is automatically changed for all traces Make sure the defined period is not longer than the total measurement time of the current measurement Keep in mind that the measurement time depends on the bandwidth and the number of samples see Number of Samples on page 214 The current measure ment time is indicated as Meas Time in the channel bar Remote command SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe PERiod on page 714 Range lt x gt Use Activates tracing of the defined range during a gated measurement Remote command SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe lt k gt STATe lt range gt on page 715 Range lt x gt Start Stop Defines the start and stop points of the range within the tracing period Make sure the value for the stopping time is smaller than the length of the period SS User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 216 R amp S FSW Measurements Statistical Measurements APD CCDF Note You can define
321. ommon Measurement Settings nn SSS a ee Se Bandwidth Filter and Sweep Configuration 6 5 3 Reference List of Available RRC and Channel Filters For power measurement a number of especially steep edged channel filters are available see the following table The indicated filter bandwidth is the 3 dB bandwidth For RRC filters the fixed roll off factor a is also indicated D The available Gaussian 3dB sweep filters are listed in the R amp S FSW data sheet Table 6 2 Filter types Filter Bandwidth Filter Type Application 100 Hz CFiLter 200 Hz CFlLter AO 300 Hz CFiLter 500 Hz CFiLter 1 kHz CFiLter 1 5 kHz CFlLter 2 kHz CFiLter 2 4 kHz CFiLter SSB 2 7 kHz CFiLter 3 kHz CFILter 3 4 kHz CFILter 4 kHz CFILter DAB Satellite 4 5 kHz CFILter 5 kHz CFILter 6 kHz CFILter 6 kHz a 0 2 RRC APCO 8 5 kHz CFILter ETS300 113 12 5 kHz channels 9 kHz CFILter AM Radio 10 kHz CFILter 12 5 kHz CFILter CDMAone 14 kHz CFILter ETS300 113 20 kHz channels 15 kHz CFILter 16 kHz CFILter ETS300 113 25 kHz channels 18 kHz a 0 35 RRC TETRA User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 375 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings EE E SSF E Bandwidth Filter and Sweep Configuration Filter Bandwidth Filter Type Application 20 kHz
322. on Measurement Settings an 8 a Bandwidth Filter and Sweep Configuration 6 5 1 3 Coupling VBW and RBW The video bandwidth can be coupled to the resolution bandwidth automatically In this case if the resolution bandwidth is changed the video bandwidth is automatically adjus ted Coupling is recommended if a minimum sweep time is required for a selected resolution bandwidth Narrow video bandwidths require longer sweep times due to the longer set tling time Wide bandwidths reduce the signal noise ratio Table 6 1 Overview of RBW VBW ratios and recommendations for use Ratio RBW VBW Recommendation for use 1 1 Recommended for sinusoidal signals This is the default setting for automatic coupling 0 1 Recommended when the amplitudes of pulsed signals are to be measured correctly The IF filter is exclusively responsible for the pulse shape No addi tional evaluation is performed by the video filter 10 Recommended to suppress noise and pulsed signals in the video domain Manually set 0 001 to 1000 Recommended for other measurement requirements 6 5 1 4 Coupling Span and RBW The resolution bandwidth can be coupled to the span setting either by a manually defined factor or automatically If the span is changed the resolution bandwidth is automatically adjusted The automatic coupling adapts the resolution bandwidth to the currently set frequency span 100 The 6 dB bandwidths 200 Hz 9 kHz and 120 kHz
323. on filter in the measurement setup Change the y axis scaling to 1 dB div or the range to 10 dB a Press the AMPT key then select Scale Config gt Range b Enter 10 dB MultiView Spectrum Ref Level RBW 2 MHz Att 3ms VBW 2MHz Mode Auto NOR Ext TG 100 0 MHz 1001 pts 20 0 MHz 300 0 MHz Fig 6 13 Reference line with measurement results using larger scale User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 317 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings 6 2 5 6 2 5 1 Data Input and Output External Mixer Option R amp S FSW B21 If the R amp S FSW External Mixer option R amp S FSW B271 is installed an external mixer can be connected to the R amp S FSW to increase the available frequency range In this case the input to measure is not taken from the RF input connector but from the EXT MIXER connector s Basics on Extenniall MIKN S oeiia aa AA a 318 External Mixer Set nNgS ncccccraniniarcin OEE 326 How to Work with External MIXeMS 222 2 eccceteeeeeeeeecsceteneeendeeederteteeeteuenseeteee 336 e Measurement Example Using an External MixXe cceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteseeeeeeees 339 Basics on External Mixers Some background knowledge on basic terms and principles used with external mixers is provided here for a better understanding of the required configuration settings Prequency Rangos eerren a A ac eee denen aee 318 Two port and Three port MIXES onaniaa n a
324. on loss tables are often provided with the external mixer and can be imported to the R amp S FSW Alternatively you can define your own conversion loss tables Imported tables are checked for com patibility with the current settings before being assigned Conversion loss tables are configured and managed in the Managing Conversion Loss Tables tab For details on conversion loss tables see Conversion Loss Tables on page 321 For details on importing tables see Import Table on page 333 Remote command Average for range 1 SENSe MIXer LOSS LOW on page 805 Table for range 1 SENSe MIXer LOSS TABLe LOW on page 804 Average for range 2 SENSe MIXer LOSS HIGH on page 804 Table for range 2 SENSe MIXer LOSS TABLe HIGH on page 804 Basic Settings The basic settings concern general use of an external mixer They are only available if the External Mixer State is On a ban hal ee 0 Radio Frequency Basic Settings Mixer Settings Conversion Loss Table External Mixer Bias Settings Range 1 Digital IQ Signal ID Bias Settings Range 2 Auto ID Bias Value Auto ID Threshold MOOV E adtee tel ncaa E E relied eed 330 Sal NN eie anaiei a sastaaadsdend aa a E a aaa 331 PUN E AE gh east cane cscs T N E ae sana A NL OT AE 331 AUOD TASSO eaaa a Aa AEE AAEM 331 Bias SONGS eiea A EEEE TEE EEE eed eee 331 L Write to lt CVL table TIN ccna fasta cca ttdancetsietneatddeovatiaidsi dea dt
325. on page 237 The marker positions can be edited the TOI is then recalculated according to the new marker values To reset all marker positions automatically use the Search Signals function Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 860 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X on page 858 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X RELative on page 870 Search Signals Performs a new search on the input signals and recalculates the TOI according to the measured values Remote command CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion TOI SEARchsignal ONCE on page 733 5 10 5 How to Determine the Third Order Intercept The precise TOI for the R amp S FSW in relation to the input signals is provided in the data sheet 1 Apply a two tone signal with equal carrier levels to the R amp S FSW input 2 On the R amp S FSW press the MEAS key 3 Select the Third Order Intercept measurement function from the Select Measure ment dialog box The calculated TOI is indicated in the marker information The markers required for calculation are displayed in the marker table 4 Ifthe signal changes significantly during or after the TOI measurement use the Search Signals function to start a new signal search automatically and restart the calculation of the TOI User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 239 R amp S FSW Measurements _ C eee ee Sa aes Third Order Intercept TOI Mea
326. onfiguration Example Gated Statistics A statistics evaluation has to be done over the useful part of the signal between t3 and t4 The period of the GSM signal is 4 61536 ms t1 t2 t3 t4 t5 t1 External positive trigger slope t2 Begin of burst after 25 us t3 Begin of useful part to be used for statistics after 40 us t4 End of useful part to be used for statistics after 578 us t5 End of burst after 602 us The instrument has to be configured as follows User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 220 R amp S FSW Measurements au ee Ml a Statistical Measurements APD CCDF Trigger Offset t2 t1 25 us now the gate ranges are relative to t2 Range Start t3 t2 15 us start of range 1 relative to t2 Range1 End t4 t2 553 us end of range 1 relative to t2 5 7 7 2 Measurement Example Measuring the APD and CCDF of White Noise Generated by the R amp S FSW Setting the RBW When the amplitude distribution is measured the analysis bandwidth must be set so that the complete spectrum of the signal to be measured falls within the bandwidth This is the only way of ensuring that all the amplitudes will pass through the IF filter without being distorted If the selected bandwidth is too small for a digitally modulated signal the ampli tude distribution at the output of the IF filter becomes a Gaussian distribution according to the central limit theorem and thus corresponds to a white noise signal T
327. ou change the reference level the measurement is not restarted the results are merely shifted in the display Only if the reference level changes due to a E a M User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 353 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings 6 4 1 2 Amplitude and Vertical Axis Configuration coupled RF attenuation see Attenuation Mode Value on page 357 the measurement is restarted In general the R amp S FSW measures the signal voltage at the RF input The level display is calibrated in RMS values of an unmodulated sine wave signal In the default state the level is displayed at a power of 1 mW dBm Via the known input impedance 50 O or 75 Q see Impedance on page 280 conversion to other units is possible RF Attenuation The attenuation is meant to protect the input mixer from high RF input levels The level at the input mixer is determined by the set RF attenuation according to the formula leVEl mixer eVElinput RF attenuation The maximum mixer level allowed is 10 dBm Mixer levels above this value may lead to incorrect measurement results which is indicated by the RF OVLD status display Fur thermore higher input levels may damage the instrument Therefore the required RF attenuation is determined automatically according to the reference level by default High attenuation levels also avoid intermodulation On the other hand attenuation must be compensated for by re amplifying the signal levels a
328. oup Delay e GSM e VSA Remote command INPut FILTer YIG STATe on page 797 Input Connector Determines whether the RF input data is taken from the RF INPUT connector default or the optional BASEBAND INPUT I connector This setting is only available if the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 is installed and active for input For more information on the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 see the R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer and I Q Input User Manual Remote command INPut CONNector on page 796 Probe Settings Probes are configured in a separate tab on the Input dialog box which is displayed when you select the INPUT OUTPUT key and then Input Source Config Input Source Power Sensor Probes Probe I Name Serial Number Part Number Not Present Type Single Ended Microbutton Action tl Run Single For each possible probe connector Baseband Input Baseband Input Q the detected type of probe if any is displayed The following information is provided for each con nected probe e Probe name e Serial number e R amp S part number e Type of probe Differential Single Ended For more information on using probes with an R amp S FSW see chapter 6 2 1 3 Using Probes on page 276 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 281 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings 6 2 3 6 2 3 1 Data Input and Output For general information on the R amp S RTO probes see the
329. ous Emissions dialog box which is displayed when you select the Spurious Setup button in the Overview or the Sweep List softkey from the Spurious Emissions menu For details on using the configuration Overview see chapter 6 1 Configuration Over view on page 273 The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in chapter 11 5 7 Measuring Spurious Emissions on page 699 The following settings are available in individual tabs of the Spurious Emissions con figuration dialog box or via softkeys in the SpurEm menu User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 199 R amp S FSW Measurements 5 6 4 1 Spurious Emissions Measurement SWEEP Listenin aa ada ee adan eai iaae adaa ania a adaa adena 200 e Adjusting the X Axis to the Range DefinitionS sessseseesserrrrssssrnsserernsssrsnss 203 ListEvaluaton cic cance onan cade ded eva a E A E AE 204 Sweep List For Spurious Emissions measurements the input signal is split into several frequency ranges which are swept individually and for which different limitations apply In the Sweep List dialog box you configure the individual frequency ranges and limits If you edit the sweep list always follow the rules and consider the limitations described in chapter 5 6 3 1 Ranges and Range Settings on page 198 Rangei _ Range2 Range3 Range 9 kHz 150 kHz 30 MHz 1 GHz 150 kHz 30 MHz 1 GHz 12 75 GHz Normal 3 Normal 3 Normal 3 Nor
330. ox select the Manage User Standards button to display the Manage dialog box Select the user standard file Select Load The stored settings are automatically set on the R amp S FSW and the measurement is restarted with the new parameters How to Compare the Tx Channel Power in Successive Measurements For pure channel power measurements where no adjacent channels and only one Tx channel is defined you can define a fixed reference power and compare subsequent measurement results to the stored reference power 1 Configure a measurement with only one Tx channel and no adjacent channels see also chapter 5 2 6 2 How to Set up the Channels on page 144 Select the Set CP Reference softkey in the Ch Power menu or the Set CP Ref erence button in the ACLR Setup dialog box The channel power currently measured on the Tx channel is stored as a fixed refer ence power The reference value is displayed in the Reference field of the result table in relative ACLR mode Start a new measurement The resulting power is indicated relative to the fixed reference power Repeat this for any number of measurements To start a new measurement without the fixed reference temporarily define a second channel or preset the instrument Measurement Examples The R amp S FSW has test routines for simple channel and adjacent channel power meas urements These routines give quick results without any complex or tedious setting pr
331. p S FSW However the settings can be changed Predefined standards are available for standard measurements but standard files with user defined configurations can also be created Note If the Multi Standard Radio standard is selected the ACLR Setup dialog box is replaced by the MSR ACLR Setup dialog box see chapter 5 2 5 MSR ACLR Config uration on page 129 If any other predefined standard or NONE is selected the ACLR Setup dialog box is restored see chapter 5 2 4 Channel Power Configuration on page 119 Note that changes in the configuration are not stored when the dialog boxes are exchanged Predefined Standards Standard Predefined standards contain the main measurement settings for standard measure ments When such a standard is loaded the required channel settings are automatically set on the R amp S FSW However the settings can be changed The predefined standards contain the following settings Channel bandwidths Channel spacings Detector Trace Average setting Resolution Bandwidth RBW Weighting Filter Predefined standards can be selected via the CP ACLR Standard softkey in the CH Power menu or in the General Settings tab of the CP ACLR Setup dialog box For details on the available standards see chapter 5 2 8 Reference Predefined CP ACLR Standards on page 153 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer PRESet on page 643 User Defined Standa
332. pe SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution TYPE on page 769 Filter bandwidth SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution on page 767 5 13 4 3 LISN Control Settings For measurements with power lines the following settings are available for the R amp S FSW to control which phase of the LISN is to be tested e g for EMI measurements LISN control requires the EMI measurement R amp S FSW K54 option The LISN control settings are available when you do one of the following e lf the EMI measurement is selected press the MEAS CONFIG key then select LISN Config e Press the INPUT OUTPUT key then select LISN Config e Inthe Overview select Output then select LISN Config User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 265 R amp S FSW Measurements Electromagnetic Interference EMI Measurement R amp S FSW K54 150 kHz Highpass For more information see chapter 5 13 3 4 Controlling V Networks LISN on page 256 LSN TG sesh sae eedecpadasaacetesabane speed aa a a veal ites eed ev dat a ia ida a a Eaa 266 PUR at catenin dese A E I deve phic A A A E tne cones 266 490 KRZ PHONES F e E S 266 LISN Type Selects the network type and activates output to the network via the user port of the R amp S FSW The network type determines the supported phases see table 5 10 Off disables LISN control and output Remote command INPut LISN TYPE on page 740 Phase Selects the phase to be measured Phase N and L
333. peak search to obtain a general overview If you perform measurements according to a particular EMI standard a preset also elim inates the risk of wrong settings inherited from previous measurements Note that EMI measurements are possible in the Spectrum application only Preparing the measurement 1 2 Press the PRESET key The R amp S FSW restores the default settings Define the frequency range of the measurement ____SES a N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 269 R amp S FSW Measurements 10 Electromagnetic Interference EMI Measurement R amp S FSW K54 a Press the FREQ key b Press the Start Frequency softkey and enter a frequency of 150 kHz c Press the Stop Frequency softkey and enter a frequency of 1 GHz The R amp S FSW scales the horizontal axis accordingly Press the MEAS key on the front panel and select the EMI measurement The EMI main menu is displayed Select the EMI Config softkey and define the resolution bandwidth and filter type to be used for the measurement By default the R amp S FSW uses a filter with a 3 db bandwidth EMI measurements usually require a filter with a 6R amp S FSWdB bandwidth Define the dwell time for which each marker position is measured during the final measurement To obtain an overview of exceptional values in the input signal during the initial mea surement activate the Auto Peak Search Select the measurement bandwidth a Select the Res
334. pected at the frequency of the real mixer product in both sweeps If the level difference is lower than the the user defined threshold the signal obtained in the test sweep is displayed If a signal occurs only in the test sweep or reference sweep it is an unwanted mixer product The level of this signal is compared to the noise floor in the other sweep If the S N ratio is sufficiently large the threshold is exceeded This means that the signal with the lower level i e noise in this case is dis played _ ____ES SS SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSS _ _ SS SS S _S _SSSS Ea User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 323 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings ES SSS SSSSSSSSSSS S SSSSL SS SS S SS S S S S S SS S S S S S S S S S _ S S _S S S S S S_PS5 EEE Ss sy Data Input and Output Note that the Auto ID method operates according to the fail safe principle i e unwanted mixer products may not be detected as such but signals which are in fact real input signals are not blanked out Time constant spectrum The automatic comparison of the test sweep and reference sweep with the Auto ID func tion can only be applied usefully for signals with a time constant spectrum since the two sweeps are always required to determine the actual spectrum Mixer products with low S N ratio If the S N ratio of a mixer product is lower than the user defined thereshold the level difference between the test sweep and re
335. ported by a special configu ration with the R amp S FSW 1 Press the MEAS key or tap Select Measurement in the Overview 2 Select Channel Power ACLR The measurement is started immediately with the default settings 3 Select the CP ACLR Standard softkey and select the Multi Standard Radio standard from the list 4 Select the CP ACLR Config softkey to configure general MSR settings including the number of subblocks up to 5 5 Select the Tx Channel Settings tab to configure the subblocks and transmission channels For each subblock a Define the center frequency position and bandwidth of the subblock as well as the number of transmission channels it contains b For each transmission channel in the subblock define the center frequency and select the technology used for transmission If necessary edit the bandwidth and define the use of a weighting filter for the channel 6 Select the Adj Gap Channel Settings tab to configure the adjacent and gap CACLR channels 7 Define the number of adjacent channels and the settings for each channel e The spacing defined as the distance from the center frequency of the first trans mission channel in the first subblock If the distance between each adjacent channel and the next is identical you only need to define the spacing for the first adjacent channel the others are adapted automatically e The bandwidth if it is identical for all adjacent channels
336. prbiaandeees 178 Channel Powar S tuiS enie A ve lee haleea ves aetna 179 Eee ee cree ee 179 ERRO Filter A sinora eee eee ies 179 Be Noes oars nese onic esata at EE EN 179 Power Reference Type Defines how the reference power is calculated Channel Measures the channel power within the reference range using the inte Power gral bandwidth method see also IBW method on page 110 Addi tional settings can be configured for this method Peak Power Determines the peak power within the reference range Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RTYPe on page 688 earl User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 178 R amp S FSW Measurements SS SSS a Spectrum Emission Mask SEM Measurement Channel Power Settings If the Power Reference Type Channel Power was selected additional parameters can be configured Tx Bandwidth Channel Power Settings Defines the bandwidth used for measuring the channel power with minimum span lt Tx Bandwidth lt span of reference range Remote command SENSe ESPectrum BWID on page 687 RRC Filter State Channel Power Settings Activates or deactivates the use of an RRC filter Remote command SENSe ESPectrum FILTer RRC STATe on page 688 Alpha Channel Power Settings Sets the alpha value of the RRC filter if activated Remote command SENSe ESPectrum FILTer RRC ALPHa on page 688 5 5 5 3 Power Classes In the Power Cla
337. put and Output New Table Opens the Edit Conversion loss table dialog box to configure a new conversion loss table For details on table configuration see Creating and Editing Conversion Loss Tables on page 333 Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 809 Edit Table Opens the Edit Conversion loss table dialog box to edit the selected conversion loss table For details on table configuration see Creating and Editing Conversion Loss Tables on page 333 Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 809 Delete Table Deletes the currently selected conversion loss table after you confirm the action Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL CLEAr on page 807 Import Table Imports a stored conversion loss table from any directory and copies it to the instrument s C r_s instr user cv1 directory It can then be assigned for use for a specific frequency range see Conversion loss on page 329 Creating and Editing Conversion Loss Tables Conversion loss tables can be defined and edited in the Edit conversion loss table dialog box which is displayed when you select the New Table button in the External Mixer gt Conversion loss table settings A preview pane displays the current configuration of the conversion loss function as described by the position value entries LSS NS User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 333 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings Data Input and
338. r 10 sweeps For sweep count 1 no averaging maxhold or minhold operations are per formed For more information see chapter 6 5 1 8 How Much Data is Measured Sweep Points and Sweep Count on page 366 D User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 371 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings a i a Bandwidth Filter and Sweep Configuration For spectrogram displays the sweep count determines how many sweeps are combined in one frame in the spectrogram i e how many sweeps the R amp S FSW performs to plot one trace in the spectrogram result display For more details see Time Frames on page 413 Remote command SENSe SWEep COUNt on page 771 SENSe AVERage COUNt on page 842 Sweep Points Defines the number of measured values to be collected during one sweep For details see chapter 6 5 1 8 How Much Data is Measured Sweep Points and Sweep Count on page 366 All values from 101 to 32001 can be set The default value is 1001 sweep points For EMI measurements 200001 sweep points are available Remote command SENSe SWEep POINts on page 772 Optimization Defines the FFT filter to be used for FFT sweep mode by defining the partial span size The partial span is the span which is covered by one FFT analysis Auto Automatically applies the sweep optimization mode that is best for the current measurement Dynamic Optimizes the sweep mode for a large dynamic range Speed Selects the fastest possibl
339. r Trigger External Trigger Level 20 0 dBm Hysteresis 0 0 dB Dropout Time 100 0 pus Holdoff Time foos Slope Rising Falling Continuous Valis UPd eniai iaaa aia i ia aa ia 286 E E R OE S EE E T EEP E S E ETE 286 ZETOING POWER Songoro aaka ena A AANEEN 286 Frequency Mantal eccrine EEE E AN 286 Freduoney Coupling eenias NER EE AERA AN 287 ME e EA E E spe diecdenstattdeeeeaaetlea 0 287 Meas Time AveragE 6 505 rinii ar ei EE EEEE AET S ae 287 Setting the Reference Level from the Measurement Meas gt Ref cccccceeseeees 287 Reference Valte ecinic cvs atest alate eet aaaeeeaa ee eave eres 287 Use Ref bev Olsebicsnccieiidecccnctibudaccssevledacace a EEEO 288 Average Count Number of ReadingS cccccccceccceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeaeeseeneeeeteaeeneenees 288 DUI OVOS Bannan a ee ee Rene epee re eon en reer ee eter ec rererr rr feree eer rreeeer reece eer rerece 288 Using the power sensor as an external triQger 2 cc eceeeeteeecesecenteaeedesentaaeeestenes 288 L External Trigger LeVel ccscscccssseccsesescscsescsesssssesesessessseseseseseseseccseseeeeenees 288 Me PA NIN 1 ccna T E E whee Dian cet A E 289 Mh Hoda enai na di a E E A Ea 289 L Drop Out TIME onenean niu bent a Ea aaa A Aia M 289 o e A E caesarean anon 289 State Switches the power measurement for all power sensors on or off Note that in addition to this general setting each power sensor can be activated or deactivated individually
340. r of readings to average To define the number of readings to be taken into account manually select Manual and enter the number in the Number of Readings field To activate the duty cycle correction select DutyCycle and enter a percentage as the correction value If you selected dB or as units relative display define a reference value a To set the currently measured power as a reference value press the Meas gt Ref button b Alternatively enter a value manually in the Reference Value field c Optionally select the Use Ref Level Offset option to take the reference level offset set for the analyzer into account for the measured power To use the power sensor as an external power trigger select the External Power Trigger option and define the trigger settings For details see How to Configure a Power Sensor as an External PSE Trigger on page 291 If necessary repeat steps 3 10 for another power sensor Set the Power Sensor State at the top of the Power Sensor tab to On to activate power measurement for the selected power sensors The results of the power measurement are displayed in the marker table Function Sensor lt 1 4 gt How to Zero the Power Sensor 1 2 To display the Power Sensor tab of the Input dialog box do one of the following e Select Input from the Overview e Select the INPUT OUTPUT key and then the Power Sensor Config softkey Select the tab tha
341. r source If a trigger source other than Free Run is set TRG is displayed in the channel bar and the trigger source is indicated For gated measurements this setting also defines the gating source For more information see Trigger Source on page 377 Note When triggering or gating is activated the squelch function is automatically disa bled User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 384 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings NaNO 8 SS a ee Trigger and Gate Configuration See Demodulating Marker Values and Providing Audio Output on page 444 Remote command TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 785 SENSe SWEep EGATe SOURce on page 788 Free Run lt Trigger Source lt Trigger Settings No trigger source is considered Data acquisition is started manually or automatically and continues until stopped explicitely In the Spectrum application this is the default setting Remote command TRIG SOUR IMM see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 785 External Trigger 1 2 3 Trigger Source Trigger Settings Data acquisition starts when the TTL signal fed into the specified input connector on the front or rear panel meets or exceeds the specified trigger level See Trigger Level on page 387 Note The External Trigger 1 softkey automatically selects the trigger signal from the TRIGGER INPUT connector on the front panel For details see the Instrument Tour chapter in the R amp S FSW Getting Sta
342. r useful signals The transducer converts the measured value such as field strength current or RFI voltage into a voltage across 50 Q During the measurement the transducer is considered a part of the instru ment A transducer usually has a frequency dependent transducer factor that includes the fre quency response of the corresponding device During level measurement the transducer factor automatically converts the results into the correct unit and magnitude A transducer factor consists of a maximum of 1001 reference values Each reference value includes frequency unit and level The R amp S FSW EMI measurement adds several predefined transducer factors In addition you can also create new and edit existing transducer factors For more information see chapter 9 2 Basics on Transducer Factors on page 513 Initial Measurement Peak Search The purpose of an initial peak search is to find signals with a high interference level quickly Usually the peak search is performed with a fast detector like the peak or average detector The initial peak search is the basis for a possible refined measurement of inter ferences with the detectors specific to EMI measurements The results of the initial peak search are shown in the Marker Table see chapter 5 13 2 EMI Measurement Results on page 250 Peak searches can be performed automatically or manually Automatic peak search If enabled the automatic peak search starts as soon as yo
343. rds Standard In addition to the predefined standards you can save your own standards with your spe cific measurement settings in an xml file so you can use them again at a later time User defined standards are stored on the instrument in the C R_S instr acp_std direc tory A sample file is provided for an MSR ACLR measurement MSR_ACLRExample xml It sets up the measurement for the MSR signal generator waveform described in the file C R_S instr user waveform MSRA GSM WCDMA LET GSM wvy Note that ACLR user standards are not supported for Fast ACLR and multicarrier ACLR measurements Note User standards created on an analyzer of the R amp S FSP family are compatible to the R amp S FSW User standards created on an R amp S FSW however are not necessarily compatible to the analyzers of the R amp S FSP family and may not work there User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 131 R amp S FSW Measurements Channel Power and Adjacent Channel Power ACLR Measurement The following parameter definitions are saved in a user defined standard Number of adjacent channels Channel bandwidth of transmission Tx adjacent Adj and alternate Alt channels Channel spacings Weighting filters Resolution bandwidth Video bandwidth Detector ACLR limits and their state Sweep time and sweep time coupling Trace and power mode MSR only subblock and gap channel definition User defined standards are managed in the Manage dialog
344. re information see chapter 5 13 3 2 Detectors and Dwell Time on page 252 Remote command CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion FMEasurement DWEL1 on page 739 Frequency Axis Scaling Switches between linear and logarithmic scaling for the frequency axis N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 264 R amp S FSW Measurements Electromagnetic Interference EMI Measurement R amp S FSW K54 By default the frequency axis has linear scaling Logarithmic scaling of the frequency axis however is common for EMI measurements over large frequency ranges as it enhances the resolution of the lower frequencies On the other hand high frequencies get more crowded and become harder to distinguish For more information see chapter 6 3 1 4 Coping with Large Frequency Ranges Log arithmic Scaling on page 346 Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe X SPACing on page 762 Res BW CISPR Defines the measurement bandwidth for commercial EMC standards according to CISPR For more information see chapter 5 13 3 1 Resolution Bandwidth and Filter Types on page 252 Remote command Filter type SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution TYPE on page 769 Filter bandwidth SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution on page 767 Res BW MIL Defines the measurement bandwidth for military EMC standards For more information see chapter 5 13 3 1 Resolution Bandwidth and Filter Types on page 252 Remote command Filter ty
345. re the Start and Stop values of the two Limit nodes that are used to determine the power class Note also that there are two Limit nodes to be defined one that gives the limit in absolute values and one in relative values Make sure units for the Start and Stop nodes are identical for each Limit node For details refer to chapter 5 5 5 1 Sweep List on page 173 The child nodes and attributes of this element are shown in table 5 6 The following tables show the child nodes and attributes of each element and show if a child node or attribute is mandatory for the R amp S FSW to interpret the file or not Since the hierarchy of the XML can not be seen in the tables either view one of the default files already stored on the R amp S FSW in the c r_s instr sem_std directory or check the structure as shown below Below a basic example of the structure of the file is shown containing all mandatory attributes and child nodes Note that the PowerClass element and the range element are themselves elements of the BaseFormat element and are to be inserted where noted The separation is done here simply for reasons of a better overview Also no example values are given here to allow a quick reference to the tables above Italic font shows the placeholders for the values e The BaseFormat element is structured as follows lt RS_SEM_ACP_FileFormat Version 1 0 0 0 gt lt Name gt Standard lt Name gt lt Instrument gt lt Type gt I
346. rement Limit Checking Gap CACLR Channel Definition During an ACLR measurement the power values can be checked whether they exceed user defined or standard defined limits A relative or absolute limit can be defined or both for each individual gap channel Both limit types are considered regardless whether the measured levels are absolute or relative values The check of both limit values can be activated independently If any active limit value is exceeded the measured value is displayed in red and marked by a preceding asterisk in the result table Note that in addition to activating limit checking for individual channels limit checking must also be activated globally for the MSR ACLR measurement see Limit Checking on page 139 Remote command CALCulate LIMit ACPower STATe on page 655 CALCulate LIMit ACPower GAP lt gap gt ABSolute STATe on page 657 CALCulate LIMit ACPower GAP lt gap gt ABSolute on page 657 CALCulate LIMit ACPower GAP lt gap gt RELative STATe on page 658 CALCulate LIMit ACPower GAP lt gap gt RELative on page 658 CALCulate LIMit ACPower GAP lt gap gt RESul1t on page 658 How to Perform Channel Power Measurements The following step by step instructions demonstrate the most common tasks when per forming channel power measurements e How to Perform a Standard Channel Power Measurement ccsceceseeeeeeeeaes 143 Howto Set up the Cha
347. rement limit for the harmonic is the noise floor of the signal analyzer The harmonic of the measured DUT should if sufficiently averaged by means of a video filter be at least 4 dB above the noise floor so that the measurement error due to the input noise is less than 1 dB Rules for measuring high harmonic ratios The following rules for measuring high harmonic ratios can be derived e Select the smallest possible IF bandwidth for a minimal noise floor e Select an RF attenuation which is high enough to measure the harmonic ratio only The maximum harmonic distortion is obtained if the level of the harmonic equals the intrinsic noise level of the receiver The level applied to the mixer according to 2 is P dBm IP2 P noise f 2 At a resolution bandwidth of 10 Hz noise level 143 dBm S H I 40 dBm the optimum mixer level is 51 5 dBm According to 1 a maximum measurable harmonic distortion of 91 5 dB minus a minimum S N ratio of 4 dB is obtained Detecting the origin of harmonics If the harmonic emerges from noise sufficiently approx gt 15 dB it is easy to check by changing the RF attenuation whether the harmonics originate from the DUT or are gen erated internally by the signal analyzer If a harmonic originates from the DUT its level remains constant if the RF attenuation is increased by 10 dB Only the displayed noise is increased by 10 dB due to the additional attenuation If the harmonic
348. rement parameters for each range as required E SSS User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 205 R amp S FSW Measurements Se a ee eed Spurious Emissions Measurement 6 Optionally define a limit check a Activate the limit check by setting Limit Check to Absolute The limit check is always activated or deactivated for all ranges simultaneously b Define the limit line s start and stop values for each range of the signal If a signal level higher than the defined limit is measured the limit check fails which may indicate a spurious emission 7 Configure the peak detection during a Spurious Emissions measurement select the Evaluations button in the Overview e To indicate the determined peaks in the display activate the Show Peaks option e To restrict peak detection define a Margin Only peaks that exceed this value are detected e To allow for more peaks per range to be detected than the default 1 increase the Peaks Per Range value and set Details to On 8 Start a sweep The determined powers and limit deviations for each range are indicated in the eval uation list If activated the peak power levels for each range are also indicated in the diagram 9 To save the evaluation list export the results to a file as described in How to Save the Spurious Emissions Evaluation List on page 206 How to Save the Spurious Emissions Evaluation List The evaluation list from a Spurious Emissions measurement can be sav
349. rigger button In this case further parameters are available for the output signal Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe on page 790 Level Output Type lt Trigger 2 3 Defines whether a constant high 1 or low 0 signal is sent to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 790 LSS MN User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 389 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings e a e Ee ST Trigger and Gate Configuration Pulse Length Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines the length of the pulse sent as a trigger to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe LENGth on page 791 Send Trigger Output Type Trigger 2 3 Sends a user defined trigger to the output connector immediately Note that the trigger pulse level is always opposite to the constant signal level defined by the output Level setting e g for Level High a constant high signal is output to the connector until the Send Trigger button is selected Then a low pulse is sent Which pulse level will be sent is indicated by a graphic on the button Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe IMMediate on page 791 Gate Settings Gate settings define one or more extracts of the signal to be measured Note Gating is not available for measurements on I Q based data Gated Trigger Gate Settings Switches gated triggering on or off If the gate is switched on a gat
350. robability Distribution APD and the Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function CCDF Only one of the signal statistic functions can be switched on at a time About INE Measurements cic ieiceceesssdeceewieonicecextaes leek evhedteeed Eia 208 6 Typical APP CANONS sis cessnccdtenneceachsdeaanecchalaceddoaadenanasctusaasvedaxccanaceeaaatecchaneneadecdeanas 209 e APD and CCDF RESUNG 6 icsc zlecsteneeearcecntsivedeacuan tucdecetnaetacecceesdetaddaansndccedeasetaanaceas 209 e APD and CCDF Basics Gated Triggering 0 t2d cisietdeeiiiieeedeciaetadiens 212 APD and CCDF Configurauon c ii icscseccrieniceteiieaisieiein baaddeenets 213 e Howto Perform an APD or CCDF Measurement ccccceeceeeeeeseeeeeseceeeeeeeeeeess 219 E e E A E E E E T A EE A 220 e Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement ccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 222 5 7 1 About the Measurements The probability of amplitude values can be measured with the Amplitude Probability Dis tribution function APD During a selectable measurement time all occurring amplitude values are assigned to an amplitude range The number of amplitude values in the indi vidual ranges is counted and the result is displayed as a histogram Alternatively the Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function CCDF can be dis played It shows the probability that the mean signal power amplitude will be exceeded in percent Only one of the signal statistic fun
351. rt gt on page 783 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel VIDeo on page 784 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel RFPower on page 784 Repetition Interval Trigger Settings Defines the repetition interval for a time trigger The shortest interval is 2 ms E a SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSS__L_ _ _ S SSSS_S_ z User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 387 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings Trigger and Gate Configuration The repetition interval should be set to the exact pulse period burst length frame length or other repetitive signal characteristic Remote command TRIGger SEQuence TIME RINTerval on page 786 Drop Out Time lt Trigger Settings Defines the time the input signal must stay below the trigger level before triggering again For more information on the drop out time see Trigger Drop Out Time on page 379 Remote command TRIGger SEQuence DTIMe on page 781 Trigger Offset Trigger Settings Defines the time offset between the trigger event and the start of the sweep For more information see Trigger Offset on page 378 offset gt 0 Start of the sweep is delayed offset lt 0 Sweep starts earlier pre trigger Only possible for zero span e g I Q Analyzer application and gated trigger switched off Maximum allowed range limited by the sweep time pretriggernax sweep time For the trigger sources External or IF Power a common input signal is used for both trigger and gate Therefore changes to
352. rted manual External Trigger 1 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER INPUT connector on the front panel External Trigger 2 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector on the front panel Note Connector must be configured for Input in the Outputs con figuration see Trigger 2 3 on page 343 External Trigger 3 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on the rear panel Note Connector must be configured for Input in the Outputs con figuration see Trigger 2 3 on page 343 Remote command TRIG SOUR EXT TRIG SOUR EXT2 TRIG SOUR EXT3 See TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 785 SWE EGAT SOUR EXT for gated triggering see SENSe SWEep EGATe SOURce on page 788 Video Trigger Source Trigger Settings Defines triggering by the video signal i e the filtered and detected version of the input signal the envelope of the IF signal as displayed on the screen Define a trigger level from 0 to 100 of the diagram height The absolute trigger level is indicated by a horizontal trigger line in the diagram which you can also move graphi cally to change the trigger level E SS A User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 385 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings Trigger and Gate Configuration Video mode is only available in the time domain and not for I Q based data Remote command TRIG SOUR VID see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 785
353. s By default the pre defined range is used However you can take advantage of the extended frequency range by overriding the defined start and stop frequencies by the maximum possible values RF Overrange option Additional ranges If due to the LO frequency the conversion of the input signal is not possible using one harmonic the band must be split An adjacent partially overlapping frequency range can be defined using different harmonics In this case the sweep begins using the harmonic defined for the first range and at a specified frequency in the overlapping range hand over frequency switches to the harmonic for the second range Which harmonics are supported depends on the mixer type Two port and Three port Mixers External mixers are connected to the R amp S FSW at the LO OUT IF IN and IF IN connec tors When using three port mixers the LO signal output from the R amp S FSW and the IF input from the mixer are transmitted on separate connectors whereas for two port mixers both signals are exchanged via the same connector LO OUT IF IN Because of the diplexer contained in the R amp S FSW the IF signal can be tapped from the line which is used to feed the LO signal to the mixer __L_L__SE N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 319 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output Two port mixer Three port mixer External Mixer External Mixer RF RF INPUT
354. s when an external generator option R amp S FSW B10 is active FFT Filter Mode In order to convert a signal in the time domain to a spectrum of frequencies e g in FFT sweep mode FFT analysis is performed Several analysis steps are required to cover the entire span The partial span which is covered by one FFT analysis is defined by the FFT filter Narrow filters provide a better frequency resolution On the other hand the narrower the filter the more steps are required to cover the entire span thus increasing analysis time This allows you to perform measurements near a carrier with a reduced reference level due to a narrower analog prefilter 6 5 1 6 Which Data May Pass Filter Types While the filter is irrelevant when measuring individual narrowband signals as long as the signal remains within the RBW the measurement result for broadband signals is very dependant on the selected filter type and its shape If the filter is too narrow the signal is distorted by the filter If the filter is too wide multiple signals can no longer be distinguished Generally the smaller the filter width and the steeper its edges the longer the settling time and thus the longer the sweep time must be All resolution bandwidths are realized with digital filters Normal 8dB Gaussian filters are set by default Some communication standards require different filters FFT Filters FFT filters are not supported as resolution or video filters in the
355. saaaaeseeeesaeeaneeeceeeneeeeeeess 163 5 4 1 About the Measurement The occupied bandwidth is defined as the bandwidth containing a defined percentage of the total transmitted power A percentage between 10 and 99 9 can be set Measurement principle The bandwidth containing 99 of the signal power is to be determined for example The algorithm first calculates the total power of all displayed points of the trace In the next step the points from the right edge of the trace are summed up until 0 5 of the total power is reached Auxiliary marker 1 is positioned at the corresponding frequency Then the points from the left edge of the trace are summed up until 0 5 of the power is reached Auxiliary marker 2 is positioned at this point 99 of the power is now between the two markers The distance between the two frequency markers is the occupied band width which is displayed in the marker field P SSSR SSS User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 158 R amp S FSW Measurements Occupied Bandwidth Measurement OBW OBW within defined search limits multicarrier OBW measurement in one sweep The occupied bandwidth of the signal can also be determined within defined search limits instead of for the entire signal Thus only a single sweep is required to determine the OBW for a multicarrier signal To do so search limits are defined for an individual carrier and the OBW measurement is restricted to the frequency range contained within
356. scillation around the trigger level Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt TRIGger HYSTeresis on page 834 Trigger Holdoff Using the power sensor as an external trigger Defines the minimum time in seconds that must pass between two trigger events Trig ger events that occur during the holdoff time are ignored Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt TRIGger HOLDoff on page 833 Drop Out Time Using the power sensor as an external trigger Defines the time the input signal must stay below the trigger level before triggering again Slope Using the power sensor as an external trigger Defines whether triggering occurs when the signal rises to the trigger level or falls down to it Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt TRIGger SLOPe on page 835 How to Work With a Power Sensor The following step by step instructions demonstrate how to set up a power sensor For details on individual functions and settings see chapter 6 2 3 2 Power Sensor Set tings on page 284 The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in chapter 11 7 6 5 Working with Power Sensors on page 825 Power sensors can also be used to trigger a measurement at a specified power level e g from a signal generator This is described in How to Configure a Power Sensor as an External PSE Trigger on page 291 How to Set Up a Power Sensor Up to 4 external power sensors can be configured separately an
357. sed for the Final Test i e the subsequent EMI measurement at the marker positions 2 Selecta limit line against which the marker results are checked a Press the LINES key and then the Lines Config softkey then select the Lines Config tab b Inthe Line Config dialog box select the View filter option Show compati ble All stored limit lines with the file extension LIN in the 1imits subfolder of the main installation folder of the instrument that are compatible to the current EMI measurement settings are displayed in the overview c Inthe overview click the Check Traces setting for the EN55011A limit line and select trace 1 to be included in the limit check Trace 2 which is defined as the average will always be lower than trace 1 which contains peak values 3 Press the RUN SINGLE key to start a new EMI measurement If activated a peak search is performed For each active marker a final measurement is performed using the specified detector for the specified dwell time If activated the signal is demodulated During the initial measurement demodulation is performed for the entire measurement span during the final measurement only the detected peak marker positions are demodulated for the defined dwell time The specified traces to be checked are compared with the active limit line The status of the limit check for the final measurement is indicated in the Result Summary Evaluating the measurement Ch
358. set ia wt tt ttt anessan TR o EE CEPR EEE Te HA HeT Hoi T O NNT T SSR NNSS E HU am in H a _ Mixer level dBm Fig 5 18 Intermodulation free dynamic range as a function of level at the input mixer and of the selected resolution bandwidth Useful signal offset 10 to 100 kHz DANL 145 dBm Hz TOI 15 dBm typical values at 2 GHz If the intermodulation products of a DUT with a very high dynamic range are to be mea sured and the resolution bandwidth to be used is therefore very small it is best to measure the levels of the useful signals and those of the intermodulation products separately using asmall span The measurement time will be reduced in particular if the offset of the useful signals is large To find signals reliably when frequency span is small it is best to syn chronize the signal sources and the R amp S FSW 5 10 3 TOI Results As a result of the TOI measurement the following values are displayed in the marker area of the diagram Label Description TOI Third order intercept point M1 Maximum of first useful signal M2 Maximum of second useful signal M3 First intermodulation product M4 Second intermodulation product User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 237 R amp S FSW Measurements 5 10 4 Third Order Intercept TOI Measurement MultiView Spectrum Ref Level 2 00 dBm RBW 200 kHz Att OdB SWT 42ps VBW 200kHz Mode Auto
359. signals The inter modulation product of third order causes the highest interference It is the intermodulation product generated from one of the useful signals and the 2nd harmonic of the second useful signal in case of two tone modulation In order to measure the third order intercept point TOI a two tone signal with equal carrier levels is expected at the R amp S FSW input Marker 1 and marker 2 both normal markers are set to the maximum of the two signals Marker 3 and marker 4 are placed on the intermodulation products The R amp S FSW calculates the third order intercept point from the level difference between the first 2 markers and the markers 3 and 4 and displays it in the marker field TOI Basics If several signals are applied to a transmission two port device with nonlinear character istic intermodulation products appear at its output at the sums and differences of the signals The nonlinear characteristic produces harmonics of the useful signals which intermodulate at the characteristic The frequencies of the intermodulation products are above and below the useful signals The figure 5 15 shows intermodulation products Ps and Ps2 generated by the two useful signals Py and Pyp E a N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 233 Third Order Intercept TO Measurement Level fs1 fut fu2 fs2 Frequency Fig 5 15 Intermodulation products Ps1 and Ps2 The intermodulation product at fi is generated by mixing the 2nd harmon
360. solution bandwidth for Normal 3dB Gaussian and 5 Pole filter types The automatic adjustment is carried out according to RBW RBW n If RBW is not available the next higher value is used Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion HARMonics BANDwidth AUTO on page 730 Adjust Settings If harmonic measurement was performed in the frequency domain a new peak search is started in the frequency range that was set before starting the harmonic measurement The center frequency is set to this frequency and the reference level is adjusted accord ingly If harmonic measurement was performed in the time domain this function adjusts the reference level only Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion HARMonics PRESet on page 730 How to Determine the Harmonic Distortion In chapter 7 4 4 Measurement Example Measuring Harmonics Using Marker Func tions on page 473 measuring harmonics was described using marker functions This task can be performed much simpler using the Harmonic Distortion measurement as described in the following procedure 1 Select the Harmonic Distortion measurement function from the Select Measure ment dialog box 2 Define the number of harmonics to be determined using the No of Harmonics soft key 3 Perform a sweep The trace for the determined harmonics are displayed in the diagram separated by red display lines The measured power for each harmon
361. splay in the channel bar Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo AUTO on page 769 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo on page 769 E a User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 369 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings a SSS SS a Bandwidth Filter and Sweep Configuration Sweep Time Defines the duration of a single sweep during which the defined number of sweep points are measured The sweep time can be defined automatically or manually The allowed sweep times depend on the device model refer to the data sheet For more information see chapter 6 5 1 7 How Long the Data is Measured Sweep Time on page 366 Auto The sweep time is coupled to the span not zero span video bandwidth VBW and resolution bandwidth RBW If the span resolution band width or video bandwidth is changed the sweep time is automatically adjusted Manual For manual mode define the sweep time Allowed values depend on the ratio of span to RBW and RBW to VBW For details refer to the data sheet Numeric input is always rounded to the nearest possible sweep time Remote command SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO on page 773 SENSe SWEep TIME on page 772 Span RBW Sets the coupling ratio if RBW is set to auto mode For more information see chapter 6 5 1 4 Coupling Span and RBW on page 364 Auto 100 resolution bandwidth span 100 This coupling ratio is the default setting of the R amp S FSW Manual The coup
362. sses tab of the Spectrum Emission Mask dialog box you configure power classes which can then be assigned to the sweep list ranges For details see Power classes on page 169 Sweep List Reference Range PowerClasses Standard Files Power Class PMin lt P lt PMax Used Power Classes cieccccciseseke seen viceee ofa Wack eenneesvalen end esbeateeenty teed dvanyeendeedbatNingens 180 PUMA PMI K a N EEATT adanardees delta eeebls 180 Sweep Lis Eere i a ia E vats AES A TE EO a A ATA aa 180 Adding or Removing a Power CHASE oce2824 seavedauedeviessnawediceseryeyanavegguecdecins seb setguedensdbaes 180 o UUU User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 179 R amp S FSW Measurements 5 5 5 4 Spectrum Emission Mask SEM Measurement Used Power Classes Defines which power classes are considered for the SEM measurement Limits can be defined only for used power classes It is only possible to select either one specific power class or all of the defined power classes If All is selected the power class that corresponds to the currently measured power in the reference range is used for monitoring The limits assigned to that power class are applied see Limit Check 1 4 on page 176 Remote command CALCulate LIMit ESPectrum PCLass lt class gt EXCLusive on page 691 To define all limits in one step CALCulate LIMit ESPectrum PCLass lt class gt LIMit STATe on page 691 PMin PMax Defines
363. stance from one sweep point to the next is calculated graphically on a logarithmic axis and is not based on the frequency itself Thus the frequency resolution between two sweep points deteriorates with higher fre quencies ion ieee Insuficient sweep points Resolution fiter bandwidth Resolution fitter bandwidth Filter may miss a signal covers one sweep point covers several sweep points The resolution bandwidth should cover at least one sweep point more is better If this condition is not met signals or interferences could be missed during refined measure ment of narrowband interferers If the distance between two sweep points is larger than RBW 3 a warning is displayed in the status bar Increase sweep points Example Linear axis ee a O 1 MHz 10 MHz With a linear axis the distance between the sweep points is equal e g 200 kHz Logarithmic axis ee oe ee S 1Hz 1 MHz 1 GHz With a logarithmic axis the distance between sweep points is variable In the spectrum from 10 Hz to 100 Hz the distance is a few Hz Between 100 MHz and 1 GHz the distance is several MHz The R amp S FSW EMI measurement supports a maximum of 200000 sweep points This number is based on typical bands measured with a single resolution bandwidth There are sufficient sweep points to make sure that a signal is found during the refined mea surement even when covering 30 MHz to 1 GHz with logarithmic scaling and 120 kHz RBW Controlling V
364. started immediately with the default set tings They can be configured via the MEAS CONFIG key or in the APD CCDF dialog User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 213 R amp S FSW Measurements Statistical Measurements APD CCDF boxes which are displayed as a tab in the Analysis dialog box or when you select the APD Config softkey from the APD menu or the CCDF Config softkey from the CCDF menu The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in chapter 11 5 8 Analyzing Statistics APD CCDF on page 712 Analysis Bandwidth Number of Samples Both dialog boxes are identical except for the Percent Marker setting which is only available for CCDF measurements Percent Marker CCDF OMY heeidi ENA AAE TEE 214 Analysis Bandwidth 2 c0cisesaeccetscosceewestave des i i A EAT 214 Number Of Samples 00c ceccsnsseccunecesceenneeteceenenteeeeuessneesdatcceedeeanebaneeuansncnataneacnaeeaes 214 Gated TMOG ess a E A vane seleeseyanedenceuteaan 215 Edit Gate RINGES ccnn r A EEE ees 215 PRONG SUNOS e a N 215 Percent Marker CCDF only Defines a probability value Thus the power which is exceeded with a given probability can be determined very easily If marker 1 is deactivated it is switched on automatically Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y PERCent on page 713 Analysis Bandwidth Defines the analysis bandwidth For correct measurement of the signal statistics the anal
365. sting Settings Automatically Lower Level Hysteresis When the reference level is adjusted automatically using the Auto Level function the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are also adjusted In order to avoid frequent adaptation due to small changes in the input signal you can define a hysteresis This setting defines a lower threshold the signal must fall below compared to the last mea surement before the reference level is adapted automatically Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis LOWer on page 793
366. sults of the previous sweeps are included in the analysis of the next sweeps for trace modes Max Hold Min Hold and Average This function is available in single sweep mode only e On When the average or peak values are determined for the new sweep the results of the previous sweeps in the spectrogram are also taken into account e Off The average or peak values are determined from the results of the newly swept frames only Remote command CALCulate SGRam CONT on page 845 Frame Count Spectrogram Frames Defines the number of frames to be captured in a single sweep Thus the frame count defines the number of traces the R amp S FSW plots in the spectro gram result display in a single sweep The maximum number of possible frames depends on the history depth see History Depth on page 426 The sweep count on the other hand determines how many sweeps are combined in one frame in the spectrogram i e how many sweeps the R amp S FSW performs to plot one trace in the spectrogram result display see Sweep Average Count on page 371 This softkey is available in single sweep mode For more details see Time Frames on page 413 Remote command CALCulate SGRam FRAMe COUNt on page 846 Clear Spectrogram Spectrogram Frames Resets the spectrogram result display and clears the history buffer Remote command CALCulate SGRam CLEar IMMediate on page 845 N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 374 R amp S FSW C
367. surement 5 10 6 Measurement Example Measuring the R amp S FSW s Intrinsic Inter modulation Test setup Signal generator settings e g R amp S FSW SMU Device Level Frequency Signal generator 1 4 dBm 799 6 MHz Signal generator 2 4 dBm 800 4 MHz Setting up the measurement 1 Preset the R amp S FSW 2 Set the center frequency to 800 MHz and the frequency span to 3 MHz 3 Set the reference level to 10 dBm and RF attenuation to 0 dB 4 Set the resolution bandwidth to 10 kHz The noise is reduced the trace is smoothed further and the intermodulation products can be seen clearly 5 Set the VBW to 1 kHz Measuring intermodulation using the Third Order Intercept TOI measurement function 1 Press the MEAS key and select the Third Order Intercept measurement function from the Select Measurement dialog box The R amp S FSW activates four markers to measure the intermodulation distance Two markers are positioned on the useful signals and two on the intermodulation products The TOI is calculated from the level difference between the useful signals and the intermodulation products It is then displayed on the screen eer User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 240 R amp S FSW MultiView Spectrum Ref Level 10 00 dBm e RBW 10 kHz Att OdB SWT 419s VBW 1kHz Mode Auto FFT CF 800 0 MHz 1001 pts 2 Marker Table Type Ref Tre Stimulus 1 799 6004 MHz 800 3996 MHz 798 8012 MHz 801
368. t a new entry is inserted above the selected entry The position of the new entry is selected such that it divides the span to the previous entry in half Delete Value Deletes the currently selected position value entry Shift x Shifts all positions in the table by a specific value The value can be entered in the edit dialog box The conversion loss function in the preview pane is shifted along the x axis Shift y Shifts all conversion loss values by a specific value The value can be entered in the edit dialog box The conversion loss function in the preview pane is shifted along the y axis Save The conversion loss table is stored under the specified name in the C r_s instr user cv1 directory of the instrument How to Work with External Mixers The required tasks to work with external mixers are described step by step e To connect a three port mixer on page 337 LSS a User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 336 Data Input and Output e To connect a two port mixer on page 338 e To activate and configure the external mixer on page 338 e To define a new conversion loss table on page 339 e To shift the conversion loss values on page 339 To connect a three port mixer External mixers can be connected at the LO OUT IF IN and IF IN female connectors option R amp S FSW B21 Both two port and three port mixers can be used Connect the mixer as follows RF INPUT Use the supplied coaxial cable to feed in the LO s
369. t and assignment to a specific fre quency range To shift the conversion loss values In order to increase each reference value in the conversion loss table a constant value ao the values can be shifted either in x directoin or in y direction 1 Select INPUT gt Input Source Config gt External Mixer gt Conversion Loss Table 2 Select the assigned conversion loss table 3 Select Edit Table 4 Select Shift y and enter the constant value lt a gt to shift all y values in the table by this value Or Select Shift x and enter the constant value lt a gt to shift all x values in the table by this value 5 Select Save 6 2 5 4 Measurement Example Using an External Mixer The following example demonstrates the operation of external mixers as well as the required settings A sine wave signal with f 14 5 GHz is applied to the input of a multi plier The spectrum at the multiplier output is to be recorded in the range of 52 GHz to 60 GHz using a 2 port mixer for the V band The mixer used is a double diode mixer The example of operation is described in the following steps e To set up the measurement on page 340 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 339 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output e To activate and configure the external mixer on page 340 e To take into account the cable loss in the IF path on page 341 To set up the measurement External Mixer M
370. t can be saved to a file which can be exported to another application for further analysis for example For details on the file format of the SEM export file see chapter 5 5 7 2 ASCII File Export Format Spectrum Emission Mask on page 194 1 Configure and perform an SEM measurement as described in chapter 5 5 6 How to Perform a Spectrum Emission Mask Measurement on page 185 2 Inthe Overview select the Evaluation button 3 If necessary change the Decimal Separator to COMMA for evaluation in other languages 4 Select the Save button 5 In the file selection dialog box select a storage location and file name for the result file 6 Select the Save button The file with the specified name and the extension dat is stored in the defined storage location E Sansa User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 188 R amp S FSW Measurements Spectrum Emission Mask SEM Measurement 5 5 7 Reference SEM File Descriptions 5 5 7 1 This reference provides details on the format of the SEM settings and result files e Format Description of SEM XML File S c ccccssscecesececceseeeeeessssesseeeeeeeeeeeesaeeas 189 e ASCII File Export Format Spectrum Emission Mask cccccesceeeeesseeeeeeeeees 194 Format Description of SEM XML Files The SEM XML files offer a quick way to change the measurement settings A set of ready made XML files for different standards is already provided You can also
371. t is assigned to the power sensor you want to zero E a N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 290 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings 6 2 4 3 Data Input and Output Press the Zeroing Power Sensor button A dialog box is displayed that prompts you to disconnect all signals from the input of the power sensor Disconnect all signals sending input to the power sensor and press ENTER to con tinue Wait until zeroing is complete A corresponding message is displayed How to Configure a Power Sensor as an External PSE Trigger The following step by step instructions demonstrate how to configure a power sensor to be used as an external power sensor trigger To configure a power sensor as an external power sensor PSE trigger 1 Connect a compatible power sensor to the Power Sensor interface on the front panel of the R amp S FSW For details on supported sensors see Using a Power Sensor as an External Power Trigger on page 283 Set up the power sensor as described in How to Set Up a Power Sensor on page 289 In the Power Sensor tab of the Input dialog box select the External Power Trig ger option Enter the power level at which a trigger signal is to be generated External Trigger Level and the other trigger settings for the power sensor trigger Press the TRIG key on the front panel of the instrument and then select Trigger Gate Config In the Trigger and Gate dialog box select Si
372. t signal peak is measured usually shorter than for pulsed signals R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings Configuration Overview Basic measurement settings that are common to many measurement tasks regardless of the application or operating mode are described here If you are performing a specific measurement task using an operating mode other than Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode or an application other than the Spectrum application be sure to check the specific application or mode description for settings that may deviate from these common settings Configuration OVErViCW ccccccccesceeeeeeeeeeeaeececaeeeeeaaeeceeaeeseeaeeeseaeeeseeneesneeeeeeees 273 Data put and Output iison iisa a aE EAA 275 Frequency and Span Configuration vsc cc vied i in eine 344 e Amplitude and Vertical Axis Configuration ce cecceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeteeseeeeeeeetseeeaaees 353 e Bandwidth Filter and Sweep Configuration c cc ec eeececeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 361 Trigger and Gate Configuration esserci 377 Adjusting Settings Automatically siinne 394 6 1 Configuration Overview Overview Throughout the measurement channel configuration an overview of the most important currently defined settings is provided in the configuration Overview The Overview is displayed when you select the Overview icon which is available at the bottom of all softkey menus ae _ RBW 3 MHz a SWI Sms VBW 3Mhz Mode Auto Swe
373. tant tasks for a signal analyzer with the necessary test routines in the field of digital transmission User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 106 R amp S FSW Measurements 5 2 2 Channel Power and Adjacent Channel Power ACLR Measurement While theoretically channel power could be measured at highest accuracy with a power meter its low selectivity means that it is not suitable for measuring adjacent channel power as an absolute value or relative to the transmit channel power The power in the adjacent channels can only be measured with a selective power meter A signal analyzer cannot be classified as a true power meter because it displays the IF envelope voltage However it is calibrated such as to correctly display the power of a pure sine wave signal irrespective of the selected detector This calibration cannot be applied for non sinusoidal signals Assuming that the digitally modulated signal has a Gaussian amplitude distribution the signal power within the selected resolution band width can be obtained using correction factors These correction factors are normally used by the signal analyzer s internal power measurement routines in order to determine the signal power from IF envelope measurements These factors apply if and only if the assumption of a Gaussian amplitude distribution is correct Apart from this common method the R amp S FSW also has a true power detector i e an RMS detector It displays the power of the test signa
374. te channels The measured power values for the TX and adjacent channels are also output as a table in the second window Which powers are measured depends on the number of configured channels For each channel the following values are displayed User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 108 R amp S FSW Measurements 5 2 3 5 2 3 1 Channel Power and Adjacent Channel Power ACLR Measurement Label Description Channel Channel name as specified in the Channel Settings see Channel Names on page 129 Bandwidth Configured channel bandwidth see Channel Bandwidths on page 127 Offset Offset of the channel to the TX channel Configured channel spacing see Channel Bandwidths on page 127 Power The measured power values for the TX and lower and upper adjacent channels The powers of the transmission channels are output in dBm or dBm Hz or in dBc relative Lower Upper a to the specified reference TX channel Retrieving Results via Remote Control All or specific channel power measurement results can be retrieved using the CALC MARK FUNC POW RES command from a remote computer see CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion POWer RESult on page 639 Alternatively the results can be output as channel power density i e in reference to the measurement bandwidth Furthermore the measured power values of the displayed trace can be retrieved as usual using the TRAC DATA commands see TRACe lt n gt
375. ter Frequency Automatically Auto Freq on page 395 Stepping Through the Frequency Range Center Frequency Stepsize Using the arrow keys you can move the center frequency in discrete steps through the available frequency range The step size by which the center frequency is increased or decreased is defined by the Center Frequency Stepsize The Center Frequency Stepsize also defines the step size by which the value is increased or decreased when you use the rotary knob to change the center frequency however the rotary knob moves in steps of only 1 10 of the Center Frequency Steps ize to allow for a more precise setting By default the step size is set in relation to the selected span or resolution bandwidth for zero span measurements In some cases however it may be useful to set the step size to other values For example to analyze signal harmonics you can define the step size to be equal to the center frequency In this case each stroke of the arrow key selects the center fre quency of another harmonic Similarly you can define the step size to be equal to the current marker frequency Keeping the Center Frequency Stable Signal Tracking If the signal drifts on the display but you want to keep the center frequency on the signal peak the center frequency can be adjusted automatically using signal tracking In this case the signal trace is surveyed in a specified bandwidth around the expected center frequency After
376. tes the signal pulse power from this value and the mean power Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt DCYCle STATe on page 829 SENSe PMETer lt p gt DCYCle VALue on page 829 Using the power sensor as an external trigger If activated the power sensor creates a trigger signal when a power higher than the defined External Trigger Level is measured This trigger signal can be used as an external power trigger by the R amp S FSW This setting is only available in conjunction with a compatible power sensor For details on using a power sensor as an external trigger see Using a Power Sensor as an External Power Trigger on page 283 Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt TRIGger STATe on page 835 TRIG SOUR PSE see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 785 External Trigger Level Using the power sensor as an external trigger Defines the trigger level for the power sensor trigger For details on supported trigger levels see the data sheet Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt TRIGger LEVel on page 834 _La_L_L_LLLLLL_ EE m User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 288 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings 6 2 3 3 Data Input and Output Hysteresis Using the power sensor as an external trigger Defines the distance in dB to the trigger level that the trigger source must exceed before a trigger event occurs Setting a hysteresis avoids unwanted trigger events caused by noise o
377. th lt bandwidth in Hz gt Filter bandwidth Only if the filter type is RRC FrequencyRange Yes Start lt frequency in Hz gt Start value of the range Yes Stop lt frequency in Hz gt Stop value of the range Yes Limit dBm Hz dBm dBc A Range must contain Yes dBr dB exactly two limit nodes one of the limit nodes has to have a relative unit e g dBc the other one must have an absolute unit e g dBm Start Value lt numeric_value gt Power limit at start frequency Yes Unit dBm Hz dBm dBc Sets the unit of the start dBr dB value Stop Value lt numeric_value gt Power limit at stop frequency Unit dBm Hz dBm dBc Sets the unit of the stop value LimitFailMode Absolute Relative If used it has to be identical No Absolute and Rela to DefaultLimitFailMode tive Absolute or Relative RBW Bandwidth lt bandwidth in Hz gt RBW on page 175 Yes Type NORM PULS No CFIL RRC VBW Bandwidth lt bandwidth in Hz gt VBW on page 175 Yes D User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 193 R amp SEFSW Measurements Spectrum Emission Mask SEM Measurement Child Node Attribute Value Parameter Description Mand Detector NEG POS SAMP If used it has to be identical No RMS AVER in all ranges QUAS Sweep Mode Manual Auto Sweep Time Mode Yes on page 175 Time lt time in sec gt Sweep Time on page 175 No Amplitude No ReferenceLevel
378. th the next measurement During the initial mea surement demodulation is performed for the entire measurement span during the final measurement only the detected peak marker positions are demodulated for the defined dwell time Increase the number of sweep points for the EMI measurement a Press the SWEEP key on the front panel b Select the Sweep Config softkey c Set the number of Sweep Points up to 200001 so that the distance between two sweep points is smaller than RBW 3 Optionally select or configure limit lines against which the marker results are checked a Press the LINES key and then the Lines Config softkey then select the Lines Config tab SSS SS N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 268 R amp S FSW Measurements 14 15 Electromagnetic Interference EMI Measurement R amp S FSW K54 b Inthe Line Config dialog box select the View filter option Show compati ble All stored limit lines with the file extension LIN in the 1imits subfolder of the main installation folder of the instrument that are compatible to the current EMI measurement settings are displayed in the overview c Select the Check Traces setting for a limit line in the overview and select the trace numbers to be included in the limit check One limit line can be assigned to several traces Define a suitable unit for the measured values as the default unit dBm is not suitable for EMI measurements or select a trans
379. the R amp S FSW and the generator For more information on coupling frequencies see Coupling the Frequencies on page 299 Auto Default setting a series of frequencies is defined one for each sweep point based on the current frequency at the RF input of the R amp S FSW see Automatic Source Frequency Numerator Denominator Off set on page 306 the RF frequency range covers the currently defined span of the R amp S FSW unless limited by the range of the signal generator Manual The generator uses a single fixed frequency defined by Manual Source Frequency which is displayed when you select Manual cou pling Remote command SOURce EXTernal FREQuency COUPling STATe on page 815 Manual Source Frequency Defines the fixed frequency to be used by the generator Remote command SOURce EXTernal FREQuency on page 815 Automatic Source Frequency Numerator Denominator Offset With automatic frequency coupling a series of frequencies is defined one for each sweep point based on the current frequency at the RF input of the R amp S FSW However the frequency used by the generator may differ from the input from the R amp S FSW The RF frequency may be multiplied by a specified factor or a frequency offset can be added or both Note The input for the generator frequency is not validated i e you can enter any values However if the allowed frequency ranges of the generator are exceeded an error mes
380. the evaluation list to a file Retrieving Results via Remote Control The measured spurious values of the displayed trace can be retrieved using the TRAC DATA SPUR Command see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 853 Spurious Emissions Basics Some background knowledge on basic terms and principles used in Spurious Emissions measurements is provided here for a better understanding of the required configuration settings e Ranges and Range Seung ii cc2cciccenel i 198 e Limit Lines in Spurious Measurement ceeeeeececenenaeceecceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeess 198 o MMI User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 197 R amp S FSW Measurements 5 6 3 1 Spurious Emissions Measurement Ranges and Range Settings Conditions for ranges The following rules apply to ranges e The minimum span of a range is 20 Hz e The individual ranges must not overlap but may have gaps e The maximum number of ranges is 30 in firmware versions lt 1 60 20 ranges e The maximum number of sweep points in all ranges is limited to 100001 If you set a span that is smaller than the overall span of the ranges the measurement includes only the ranges that lie within the defined span and have a minimum span of 20 Hz Defining ranges by remote control In Spurious Emissions measurements there are no remote commands to insert new ranges between existing ranges directly However you can delete or re define the exist ing ranges to creat
381. the gate delay will affect the trigger delay Trigger Offset as well For the Time trigger source this function is not available Remote command TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TIME on page 782 Hysteresis Trigger Settings Defines the distance in dB to the trigger level that the trigger source must exceed before a trigger event occurs Settting a hysteresis avoids unwanted trigger events caused by noise oscillation around the trigger level This setting is only available for IF Power trigger sources The range of the value is between 3 dB and 50 dB with a step width of 1 dB For more information see Trigger Hysteresis on page 378 Remote command TRIGger SEQuence I1FPower HYSTeresis on page 782 Trigger Holdoff Trigger Settings Defines the minimum time in seconds that must pass between two trigger events Trig ger events that occur during the holdoff time are ignored For more information see Trigger Holdoff on page 379 Remote command TRIGger SEQuence 1FPower HOLDoff on page 782 LSS Se SSS User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 388 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings 5 M Trigger and Gate Configuration Slope Trigger Settings For all trigger sources except time you can define whether triggering occurs when the signal rises to the trigger level or falls down to it For gated measurements in Edge mode the slope also defines whether the gate starts on a falling or rising edge
382. the offset depends on the selected generator The default setting is 0 Hz Offsets other than 0 Hz are indicated by the FRQ label in the channel bar see also Displayed Information and Errors on page 301 Swept frequency range The Fanalyzer Values for the calibration sweep start with the start frequency and end with the stop frequency defined in the Frequency settings of the R amp S FSW The resulting output frequencies Result Frequency Start and Result Frequency Stop are displayed in the External Generator gt Measurement Configuration for reference If the resulting frequency range exeeds the allowed ranges of the signal generator an error message is displayed see Displayed Information and Errors on page 301 and the Result Frequency Start and Result Frequency Stop values are corrected to comply with the range limits The calibration sweep nevertheless covers the entire span defined by the R amp S FSW however no input is received from the generator outside the generator s defined limits TTL synchronization Some Rohde amp Schwarz signal generators support TTL synchronization when connected via GPIB The TTL interface is included in the AUX CONTROL connector of the R amp S FSW B10 option When pure GPIB connections are used between the R amp S FSW and the signal generator the R amp S FSW sets the generator frequency for each frequency point individually via GPIB and only when the setting procedure is finished th
383. the required syntax and commands only change the values of the parameters Errors will only be detected and displayed when you try to use the new generator see also Displayed Information and Errors on page 301 Calibration Mechanism A common measurement setup includes a signal generator a device under test DUT and a signal and spectrum analyzer Therefore it is useful to measure the attenuation or gain caused by the cables and connectors from the signal generator and the signal ana lyzer in advance The known level offsets can then be removed from the measurement results in order to obtain accurate information on the DUT Calculating the difference between the currently measured power and a reference trace is referred to as calibration Thus the measurement results from the controlled external generator including the inherent distortions can be used as a reference trace to cali brate the measurement setup The inherent frequency and power level distortions can be determined by connecting the R amp S FSW to the signal generator The R amp S FSW sends a predefined list of frequencies to the signal generator see also Coupling the Frequencies on page 299 The signal generator then sends a signal with the specified level at each frequency in the predefined list The R amp S FSW measures the signal and determines the level offsets to the expected values Saving calibration results A reference dataset for the calibration results
384. the selected generator type is displayed read only in an editor c Edit the configuration values according to your generator Be sure not to change the syntax of the file d Save the file under a different name with the extension gen e Now you can select the new generator type from the selection list on the Interface Configuration tab 7 Select the type of interface GPIB TCP IP and the address used to connect the generator to the R amp S FSW SSS N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 310 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Data Input and Output If the generator supports TTL Synchronization activate this function Select Reference External to synchronize the analyzer with the generator Switch to the Measurement Configuration subtab Set the Source State to On Define the generator output level as the Source Power Optionally to define a constant level offset for the external generator define a Source Offset The default frequency list for the calibration sweep contains 1001 values divided in equi distant frequencies between the R amp S FSW s start and stop frequency For most cases this automatic coupling should be correct Check the Result Frequency Start and Result Frequency Stop values to make sure the required measurement span is covered If necessary change the frequency settings on the R amp S FSW FREQ key gt Frequency Config
385. the sensors manually by deactivating the Auto option and selecting a serial number from the list Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt STATe on page 832 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer lt p gt DEFine on page 826 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer lt p gt CONFigure AUTO STATe on page 825 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer COUNt on page 825 Zeroing Power Sensor Starts zeroing of the power sensor For details on the zeroing process refer to How to Zero the Power Sensor on page 290 Remote command CALibration PMETer lt p gt ZERO AUTO ONCE on page 827 Frequency Manual Defines the frequency of the signal to be measured The power sensor has a memory with frequency dependent correction factors This allows extreme accuracy for signals of a known frequency Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt FREQuency on page 829 E a N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 286 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output Frequency Coupling Selects the coupling option The frequency can be coupled automatically to the center frequency of the instrument or to the frequency of marker 1 Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt FREQuency LINK on page 830 Unit Scale Selects the unit with which the measured power is to be displayed Available units are dBm dB W and If dB or is selected the display is relative to the reference value that
386. the time values with a greater numerical resolution than is dis played the values are only rounded for display Remote command SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe lt k gt STARt lt range gt on page 714 SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe lt k gt STOP lt range gt on page 715 5 7 5 3 Scaling for Statistics Diagrams The diagram scaling for statistical measurements can be configured in the Scaling dia log box which is displayed when you select the AMPT key and then the Scale Config softkey The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in chapter 11 5 8 4 Scaling the Diagram on page 715 Amplitude Scale X Axis Y Axis Range 20 dB Y Unit Pct Abs eae 0 0 dBm Y Max Offset 0 0 dB Y Min 0 Adjust Settings Default Settings In statistical diagrams the x axis displays the signal level values y axis in standard display while the y axis displays the probability of the values oO De PAWUG cdr sass nae sce ap aad dav ap cael A O EA E EE 218 Me I EAE T A E AEE ean low E AET AEE OAE anes 218 E e N E A 218 L Shifting the Display Offset s csssssssssssssssssscssscscsscecssscsnscecstscecsnecseeeeas 218 WRN 2a E est tea 241 cu ual ean ese dae tates usa aetade eet d onset E E A AE 218 EO tara ts E eG aT aT 218 I RN ears eee eee 218 Dort SOUINGS e S thease A 218 Adjust Settings casare earrainn anna EaR E E EEEREN EEEREN 219 User Manual 1173 9411
387. the upper side band USB of the LO the test sweep trace 2 shows the trace measured on the lower side band LSB i e the reference sweep Spectrum Ref Level 10 00 dBm RBW 3 MHz SWT 60 ms YBW 3MHz2 Mode Auto Sweep ExtMix U 14P Clrw SigID USB 24P Clrw SigID LSB 20 dBm 30 dBm 40 dBm 50 dBm CF 50 0 GHz Span 20 0 GHz Fig 6 16 Signal identification function Signal ID with external mixer B21 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 322 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings gE SSS SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSS S SS S S S SS S S S S S S S SSS__PS EEE ESS SS as Data Input and Output The reference sweep is performed using an LO setting shifted downwards by 2 IF lt Har monic order gt Input signals in the desired sideband that are converted using the specified harmonic are displayed in both traces at the same position on the frequency axis Image signals and mixer products caused by other harmonics are displayed at different positions in both traces The user identifies the signals visually by comparing the two traces Since the LO frequency is displaced downwards in the reference sweep the conversion loss of the mixer may differ from the test sweep Therefore the signal eve should only be measured in the test sweep trace 1 Auto ID function The Auto ID fucntion basically functions like Signal ID function However the test and reference sweeps are converted into a single trace by a comparison of max
388. those limits Then the search limits are adapted for the next carrier and the OBW is automatically re calculated for the new range MultiView 3 Spectrum Ref Level 10 00 dBm s Att OdB SWT 2 ms 1 Occupied Bandwidth CF 497 5 MHz 10001 pts 2 57 MHz Span 25 7 M 2 Marker Table Type Ref Tre Stimulus Response Function Function Result Mi 1 496 63 Hz 31 40 dBm Bm Occ By 4 165553445 MHz For step by step instructions see How to determine the OBW for a multicarrier signal using search limits on page 163 Prerequisites To ensure correct power measurement especially for noise signals and to obtain the correct occupied bandwidth the following prerequisites and settings are necessary e Only the signal to be measured is displayed in the window or search limits are defined to include only one carrier signal An additional signal would falsify the measure ment e RBW lt lt occupied bandwidth approx 1 20 of occupied bandwidth for voice com munication type 300 Hz or 1 kHz e VBW 23x RBW e RMS detector e Span 2 2 to 3 x occupied bandwidth Some of the measurement specifications e g PDC RCR STD 27B require measure ment of the occupied bandwidth using a peak detector The detector setting of the R amp S FSW has to be changed accordingly then User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 159 R amp S FSW Measurements a SS ee ee ee sed Occupied Bandwidth Measurement OBW 5 4 2 OBW Results As a result
389. tion POWer RESult on page 639 L__L_L_LL_LzLLL_ SSS SS User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 160 R amp S FSW Measurements Occupied Bandwidth Measurement OBW 5 4 3 OBW Configuration OBW measurements are selected via the OBW button in the Select Measurement dialog box The measurement is started immediately with the default settings It can be configured via the MEAS CONFIG key or in the Occupied Bandwidth dialog box which is displayed as a tab in the Analysis dialog box or when you select the OBW Config softkey from the OBW menu OB tings aoi rae aeia 99 0 ANATA ne aM 14 0 kHz Search Limits Left Limit 0 0 Hz Right Limit 26 5 GHz Search Limits Off Adjust Settings This measurement is not available in zero span O Configuring search limits for OBW measurement The OBW measurement uses the same search limits as defined for marker search see Search Limits on page 452 However only the left and right limits are considered The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in chapter 11 5 5 Measuring the Occupied Bandwidth on page 671 H Power Badwi diN oiis aeaaaee adna ieran daia d aaeb aeaiia u bia adina 161 Channel Banawi otaa E AA EE EMAA 162 Adjust Seting eccuci E EEEE EE 162 Search Limits Left RIJN cienastus iaaa aa aiaia 162 Deactivating All Search Limits aeesreseesrenrrrisnnrenrrrrnnnannnnnasnnnnnnnnidnnnaarnnanananannnaaa nana 162
390. tive measurements in the unit dBm Remote command CALCulate lt n gt PMETer lt p gt RELative MAGNitude on page 827 N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 287 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output Use Ref Lev Offset If activated takes the reference level offset defined for the analyzer into account for the measured power see Shifting the Display Offset on page 356 If deactivated takes no offset into account Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt ROFFset STATe on page 831 Average Count Number of Readings Defines the number of readings averages to be performed after a single sweep has been started This setting is only available if manual averaging is selected Meas Time Average setting The values for the average count range from 0 to 256 in binary steps 1 2 4 8 For average count 0 or 1 one reading is performed The general averaging and sweep count for the trace are independent from this setting Results become more stable with extended average particularly if signals with low power are measured This setting can be used to minimize the influence of noise in the power sensor measurement Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt MTIMe AVERage COUNt on page 830 Duty Cycle Sets the duty cycle to a percent value for the correction of pulse modulated signals and activates the duty cycle correction With the correction activated the sensor calcula
391. tly e Known signals shorter dwell time possible as the signal level does not change during the final measurement When you change the frequency or the attenuation the R amp S FSW waits until the lowpass filter has settled before starting the measurement CISPR Average detector CISPR filter only The CISPR Average detector displays a weighted average signal level according to CISPR 16 1 1 The average value according to CISPR 16 1 1 is the maximum value detected while calculating the linear average value during the specified dwell time The CISPR Average detector is only available for the CISPR filter The CISPR Average detector is applied to measure pulsed sinusoidal signals with a low pulse frequency for example It is calibrated with the RMS value of an unmodulated sinusoidal signal The average value is determined by lowpass filters of the 2nd order simulating a mechanical pointer instrument The filter bandwidth and time lag of the detector depend on the measured frequency The time lag of the simulated pointer instrument reflects the weighting factor of the signal depending on its form modulation etc Table 5 8 Required parameters depending on frequency for CISPR Average detector Band A Band B Band C D Band E Frequency range lt 150 kHz 150 kHz to 30 MHz 30 MHz to 1 GHz gt 1 GHz IF bandwidth 200 Hz 9 kHz 120 kHz 1 MHz Time lag of the 160 ms 160 ms 100 ms 100 ms simulated pointer instrument
392. to each side of the transmission channel are defined SEM Results As a result of the Spectrum Emission Mask measurement the measured signal levels the result of the limit check mask monitoring and the defined limit lines are displayed in a diagram see also chapter 5 5 4 2 Limit Lines in SEM Measurements on page 169 Furthermore the TX channel power P is indicated with the used power class Example For example P lt 31 is indicated if the lowest power class is defined from infinity to 31 and the power is currently 17 dBm MultiView Spectrum Ref Level 41 00 dBm Offset 40 00 dB Mode Auto Sweep 1 Spectrum Emission Mask CF 2 1 GHz 1001 pts 2 55 MHz Span 25 5 MHz 2 Result Summary W CDMA 3GPP DL Tx Power 33 74 dBm Tx Bandwidth 3 840 MHz RBW 1 000 MHz Rangel Range Up RBW Frequency Power Abs Power Rel Altimit le lars 000 MHz 1 0 2 09153 GHz 39 37 dBm 73 11 dB 18 61 dB 2 09494 GHz 39 75 dBm 73 48 dB 22 98 dB 2 09642 GHz 50 91 dBm 84 65 dB 21 15 dB 2 09652 GHz 51 84 dBm 85 57 dB 22 65 dB 2 09739 GHz 52 33 dBm al 34 57 dB 2 10259 GHz 49 37 dBm 50 68 dBm 51 81 dBm 38 64 dBm 72 37 dB 39 24 dBm 72 97 dB In addition to the graphical results of the SEM measurement displayed in the diagram a result table is displayed to evaluate the limit check results see also chapter 5 5 4 2 Limit Lines in SEM Measurements on page 169 E a SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSaSSSSSESSSSSSqqqqa User Manual 1173 9411 02
393. tors on the front or rear panel for details see the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual In the Trigger and Gate dialog box define the Trigger Source External If you are using one of the variable TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors you must define their use as input connectors In the Trigger In Out tab of the Trigger and Gate dialog box set the corresponding trigger to Input Note Trigger 2 is on the front panel Trigger 3 is on the rear panel Configure the external trigger as described for the other power triggers To define a power trigger 1 In the Trigger and Gate dialog box define the Trigger Source IF Power or Video Note that the video signal corresponds to the envelope of the IF signal it has been processed by the resolution and video filters and the selected detector Define the Trigger Level the power level at which the measurement will start For a Video trigger source you can move the level line graphically to define the level If you define the value numerically you must enter a percentage of the full diagram height as the level Define whether the signal must cross the trigger level on a falling or on a rising edge Slope to trigger the measurement To start the measurement with a time delay define a Trigger Offset To reject triggers due to noise or jittering in the signal define a Hysteresis that is larger than the expected noise or jittering After the previous trigger
394. trol The generator in this setup is referred to as a tracking generator A measurement with a tracking generator is useful to measure any effects on the power level caused by the cables and connectors from the signal generator and the signal ana lyzer in advance The known effects can then be removed from the measurement results in order to obtain accurate information on the DUT Basics on External Generator Control Some background knowledge on basic terms and principles used for external generator control is provided here for a better understanding of the required configuration settings i External generator control is only available in the Spectrum I Q Analyzer and Analog Demodulation applications e External Generator COnnections cccccccccccesssceececeeseecececaeeeseeeeeetenseeeteceuaseeeeeees 292 e Overview of Generators Supported by the R amp S FSW B10 Option 65 294 Generator Setup FilesS c ccccccc cece cece ceeeeeeceeeeeeaeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecseeeeaancaneeeeeeeees 295 Calibration MECHANISM sisiiciesscaicdansicetetrasiadtidersbinaMetaasaidtodiaraddaden a a 296 Norma lzatOM arna een a E E a 296 e Reference Trace Reference Line and Reference LevVel cscccceeeeeeeeeeeaeaes 298 Coupling the Frequencies c cccccccccccecceeeeeeeeee eee eseeceeseeaeeseneaeeaeceeseeeeeeeeeeeess 299 Displayed Information and EMmors s ccesielieee ceded dae deeetee
395. trum EMISJON MISK iiaiai deg daadana aii aa auswaxnnnneseaeddcas lt kacsadenns 104 SpunNouS EMISSIONS aiaia aiad aie a aaia d a ecavectnseddadaseudqunccnesseetaccdedcwerieads 104 PR UM A IA E E AEE A 104 GDP cerned inene a N E G A E A ice A AAA EE a 105 Time Domain POWT vec cciaiccccki cede afebdecladiedendsand insna evaaveapebecena a Ea a ae aia aaia iaa 105 TON yaaa a a r e a N a A N 105 AM Mod DEPtoennnnaaeaa ies Ea A Ea EA a 105 Harmonie Distortion aa a a i E a aa a aiia Eaa a EEEa 105 E A O E E N E A E see henaeaaeiadeaanre 106 Marker PUMCUONS sneren a i a a aa aaaea a a aaa 106 AILFUNCIONS OR ricer A E a A rs eee reas 106 Frequency Sweep A common frequency sweep of the input signal over a specified span Can be used for general purposes to obtain basic measurement results such as peak levels and spectrum traces The Frequency menu is displayed This is the default measurement if no other function is selected Use the general measurement settings to configure the measurement e g via the Overview see chapter 6 Common Measurement Settings on page 273 Remote command SENSe FREQuency STARt on page 765 SENSe FREQuency STOP on page 765 INITiate IMMediate on page 635 INITiate CONTinuous on page 634 Zero Span A sweep in the time domain at the specified center frequency i e the frequency span is set to zero The display shows the time on the x axis and the signal level on the y axis as o
396. tton in the Select Measurement dialog box The measurement is started immediately with the default set tings It can be configured via the MEAS CONFIG key or in the Spectrum Emission Mask configuration dialog box which is displayed when you select the SEM Setup button in the Overview or one of the softkeys from the SEMask menu The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in chapter 11 5 6 Measuring the Spectrum Emission Mask on page 673 The following settings are available in individual tabs of the Spectrum Emission Mask configuration dialog box SWE LIS ai ccsicccvecacoscedsaasdvadea E eeavtncsvcanncdeddadessaundataatresatedeate 173 Reference Rang scce sadn ane tice kiai daia 178 Power CldsSo Sonone a aia aaa a aa a a a e 179 MSR SetiNgS ieia aaia a iga aaa EEEE a A iaa iaaa 180 Standard Fil S seara a iaaa aaa aai aedades 182 LietEvaluatiom ania a a aa a a aa a ata Aaaa 184 Sweep List For SEM measurements the input signal is split into several frequency ranges which are swept individually and for which different limitations apply In the Sweep List tab of the Spectrum Emission Mask dialog box you configure the individual frequency ranges and mask limits If you edit the sweep list always follow the rules and consider the limitations described in chapter 5 5 4 1 Ranges and Range Settings on page 167 Sweep List Reference Range Power Classes MSR Settings Standard F
397. u can measure the AM modulation depth of a modulated signal About the Measurement cccccccccceceeeeeseceeeeeeesaeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeesequeeneeesanaeneeeeeees 242 e AM Modulation Depth ReSults c ccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeaeeaeceeeeeeeeeseeseccnnaeeeeeeeeees 242 e AM Modulation Depth Configuration cccccccecesseceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeteseeaeeeeeesseeeeaaeees 243 e Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement cccccceeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeees 244 e How to Determine the AM Modulation Depth cccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeees 245 5 11 1 About the Measurement The AM modulation depth also known as a modulation index indicates how much the modulated signal varies around the carrier amplitude It is defined as Mbepth peak signal amplitude unmodulated carrier amplitude So for Mpeptn 0 5 for example the carrier amplitude varies by 50 above and below its unmodulated level and for Mpepth 1 0 it varies by 100 When this measurement is activated marker 1 is set to the peak level which is consid ered to be the carrier level Delta markers 2 and 3 are automatically set symmetrically to the carrier on the adjacent peak values of the trace The markers can be adjusted man ually if necessary The R amp S FSW calculates the power at the marker positions from the measured levels The AM modulation depth is calculated as the ratio between the power values at the reference marker
398. u select the EMI measurement and one or more markers are active During automatic peak search the R amp S FSW looks D User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 257 R amp S FSW Measurements 5 13 3 7 Electromagnetic Interference EMI Measurement R amp S FSW K54 for the strongest peaks in the frequency range you are measuring and positions a marker on those peaks after each sweep If a limit line is assigned to the trace the peak search is based on the level difference between the trace and the limit line For each active marker a peak is searched You can use up to 16 markers simultaneously The largest peak is always assigned to the active marker with the lowest number sub sequent peaks are assigned to the active markers in ascending order The R amp S FSW allows you to distribute markers among several traces If you do so the marker with the lowest number assigned to a particular trace is positioned on the largest peak of the corresponding trace Manual peak search If automatic peak search is off you can set the markers to any frequency you need more information about manually You can change the marker position with the rotary knob or the cursor keys or position it to a particular frequency with the number keys Setting markers is the same as setting markers in other Spectrum measurements For more information see chapter 7 4 Marker Usage on page 435 Searching for peaks over several traces You can search for peaks on s
399. u switch off electronic attenuation the RF attenuation is automatically set to the same mode auto manual as the electronic attenuation was set to Thus the RF attenu ation may be set to automatic mode and the full attenuation is provided by the mechanical attenuator if possible Both the electronic and the mechanical attenuation can be varied in 1 dB steps Other entries are rounded to the next lower integer value If the defined reference level cannot be set for the given attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is displayed in the status bar Remote command INPut EATT STATe on page 778 INPut EATT AUTO on page 777 INPut EATT on page 777 Input Settings Some input settings affect the measured amplitude of the signal as well The parameters Input Coupling and Impedance are identical to those in the Input settings see chapter 6 2 2 Input Source Settings on page 279 Preamplifier option B24 Input Settings If option R amp S FSW B24 is installed a preamplifier can be activated for the RF input signal For R amp S FSW 26 models the input signal is amplified by 30 dB if the preamplifier is activated For R amp S FSW 8 or 13 models the following settings are available You can use a preamplifier to analyze signals from DUTs with low input power Off Deactivates the preamplifier 15 dB The RF input signal is amplified by about 15 dB 30 dB The RF input signal
400. ude the effects from the component How to Compensate for Additional Gain or Attenuation after Calibration If a gain or an attenuation is inserted in the measurement after calibration this effect can be reflected in the display of the normalized trace on the R amp S FSW Thus the measured trace and the normalized trace are not so far apart in the display so that you can zoom into the normalized trace without cropping the measurement trace Prerequisite a calibration has been performed for the original measurement setup except for the component causing an additional gain or attenuation as described in How to Calibrate a Measurement Setup using an External Generator on page 310 1 Insert the additional component in the calibrated measurement setup and perform a new measurement 2 Press the INPUT OUTPUT key and select External Generator Config 3 Switch to the Source Calibration subtab 4 With active normalization set the Reference Value to the same value as the gain or attenuation the inserted component causes 5 Optionally shift the reference line further down in the result display by decreasing the Reference Position The normalized reference trace moves to the position of the measured trace 6 Optionally zoom into the measured trace by changing the y axis scaling or the range AMPT gt Scale Config gt Range The measured trace is still fully visible and the absolute values are still valid 6 2 4
401. uired Since phase noise decreases as the carrier offset increases its influence decreases with increasing frequency offset from the useful signals The following diagrams illustrate the intermodulation free dynamic range as a function of the selected bandwidth and of the level at the input mixer signal level set RF attenu ation at different useful signal offsets Distortion free Dynamic Range Dyn tangai 1 MHz carrier offset _ gt Mixer level dBm Fig 5 17 Intermodulation free range as a function of level at the input mixer and the set resolution bandwidth Useful signal offset 1 MHz DANL 145 dBm Hz TOI 15 dBm typical values at 2 GHz The optimum mixer level i e the level at which the intermodulation distance is at its maximum depends on the bandwidth At a resolution bandwidth of 10 Hz it is approx 35 dBm and at 1 kHz increases to approx 30 dBm Phase noise has a considerable influence on the intermodulation free range at carrier offsets between 10 and 100 kHz see figure 5 18 At greater bandwidths the influence of the phase noise is greater than it would be with small bandwidths The optimum mixer level at the bandwidths under consideration becomes almost independent of bandwidth and is approx 40 dBm E N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 236 R amp S FSW Measurements Third Order Intercept TO Measurement Distortion free Dynamic Range Dyn range dB 10 to 100 kHz carrier off
402. ultiplier RF Input 14 5 GHz Fig 6 19 External Mixer test setup 1 1 Connect the LO OUT IF IN output of the R amp S FSW to the LO IF port of the external mixer 2 Connect the multiplier to the RF input of the external mixer 3 Apply a sine wave signal with f 14 5 GHz to the input of the multiplier To activate and configure the external mixer 1 Select INPUT gt Input Source Config gt External Mixer ON to activate the external mixer for the current application N Select Mixer Settings gt Band to define the required frequency range 3 From the Band selection list select the band V 4 Inthe Mixer Settings select Conversion Loss Table for Range 1 to define fre quency dependent level correction 5 From the selection list select a conversion loss table stored on the instrument No further settings are necessary since the selected file contains all required parameters If the selected table is not valid for the selected band an error message is displayed User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 340 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings 6 2 6 Data Input and Output If no conversion loss table is available yet create a new table first as described in To define a new conversion loss table on page 339 A span is automatically set which covers the whole V band 50 to 75 GHz Reduce the video bandwidth by selecting BW gt Video Bandwidth Manual 7 MHz This allows for correct signal ident
403. ults a result table can be displayed to evaluate the measured powers and limit check results see also chapter 5 6 3 2 Limit Lines in Spurious Measurements on page 198 The details of the evaluation list can be configured 2 Result Summary Range Low Range Up Frequency Power Abs Atinit 136 62411 kHz 61 33 dBm 48 33 dB 302 94301 kHz 73 53 dBm 60 53 dB 230 76857 MHz 75 90 dBm 62 90 dB 1 71948 GHz 72 30 dBm 59 30 dB The following information is provided in the evaluation list for each range E a M User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 196 R amp S FSW Measurements 5 6 3 Spurious Emissions Measurement Column Description Range Low Frequency range start for the range the peak value belongs to Range Up Frequency range end for the range the peak value belongs to RBW RBW of the range Frequency Frequency at the peak value Power Abs Absolute power level at the peak value ALimit Deviation of the absolute power level from the defined limit for the peak value By default one peak per range is displayed However you can change the settings to e Display all peaks e Display a certain number of peaks per range e Display only peaks that exceed a threshold Margin In addition to listing the peaks in the list evaluation detected peaks can be indicated by blue squares in the diagram 1 Spurious Emissions Start 9 0 kHz 68704 pts 1 27 GHz Stop 12 75 GHz Furthermore you can save
404. unction of the LO frequency and the selected harmonic of the first LO as follows fin N flo fie where fin frequency of input signal n order of harmonic used for conversion fLo frequency of first LO 7 65 GHz to 17 45 GHz fir intermediate frequency variable defined internally depending on RBW and span SSS N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 318 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings E SSS SSSSSSSSSSSS S SSSSSSS SS SS S S SS S S SS S _ SS _S S _S S _S S _ S S S S SS__P5R amp E a Data Input and Output Thus depending on the required frequency band the appropriate order of harmonic must be selected For commonly required frequency ranges predefined bands with the appro priate harmonic order setting are provided By default the lowest harmonic order is selected that allows conversion of input signals in the whole band For the band USER the order of harmonic is defined by the user The order of harmonic can be between 2 and 61 the lowest usable frequency being 16 53 GHz The frequency ranges for pre defined bands are described in table 11 3 Changes to the band and mixer settings are maintained even after using the PRESET function A Preset band function allows you to restore the original band settings Extending predefined ranges In some cases the harmonics defined for a specific band allow for an even larger fre quency range than the band require
405. urement Trigger Gate Settings dialog box see chapter 6 6 Trigger and Gate Configuration on page 377 Define how the results are evaluated for display Trace dialog box see chap ter 7 3 2 1 Trace Settings on page 417 If necessary configure the vertical axis of the display Amplitude dialog box see chapter 6 4 Amplitude and Vertical Axis Configuration on page 353 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 245 R amp S FSW Measurements 8 a a ed Basic Measurements 7 To start the measurement select one of the following e RUN SINGLE key e Single Sweep softkey in the Sweep menu The defined number of sweeps are performed then the measurement is stopped While the measurement is running the RUN SINGLE key is highlighted To abort the measurement press the RUN SINGLE key again The key is no longer highlighted The results are not deleted until a new measurement is started 8 To repeat the same number of sweeps without deleting the last trace select the Continue Single Sweep softkey in the Sweep menu To start continuous sweeping 1 If you want to average the trace or search for a maximum over more or less than 10 sweeps configure the Average Sweep Count Sweep Config dialog box see Sweep Average Count on page 371 2 To start the measurement select one of the following e RUN CONT key e Continuous Sweep softkey in the Sweep menu After each sweep is completed a new one is started
406. ution Bandwidth and Filter Types 2 c cccteceseccceteeeeenseeeeeeeneeeteeedeneeere 252 e Detectors and Dwell Time ccccccccceeceecccnceeceeeeeeeeee sete eesaaaeceaeaesaeeeceeeaeeeeeees 252 e Frequency Resolution Sweep Points and Scalliing ccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 255 Controlling V Networks LISN scsi iicpcecccccctsagececctiesdeeetietdedetels anA 256 Using Transducer FACS i oo c even ceatee nce kee accent read ane ender 257 Initial Measurement Peak Search wnccsccccacscdeciasaaaacceceisssaadeacsinanamadcaadsasaandereceans 257 e Final Measurement at the Marker PoSitiOn ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteees 258 MWCO CNS ooieoe aaia axadsciaa vianeadand duedteasouancuateaneceneadente 259 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 251 R amp S FSW Measurements 5 13 3 1 13 3 2 Electromagnetic Interference EMI Measurement R amp S FSW K54 Resolution Bandwidth and Filter Types EMI testing requires resolution filters with a 6 dB bandwidth The R amp S FSW EMI mea surement adds the following bandwidths that comply to commercial and military stand ards to those already available with the base unit Commercial CISPR FFC etc e 200 Hz e 9kHz e 120 kHz e 1 MHz not with Quasipeak detector see Quasipeak detector CISPR filter only on page 253 Military MIL Std e 10Hz e 100 Hz e 1kHz e 10kHz e 100 kHz e 1MHz For the Quasipeak CISP
407. ved by reducing the video bandwidth Since the average noise indica tion lies well below the generated noise peak values the minimum level diminishes For identification using the Auto ID function signals should have this minimum noise level Display of mixer products at the same frequency If the input signal consists of a very large number of spectral components it will become more and more probable that two different unwanted mixer products will be displayed at the same frequency in the test sweep and reference sweep SS User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 324 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output gt a COCA COE PLE tT PEAT EESE AT DET L e e ala a i i A E ra E i mi ERR NAT LL Fig 6 17 Different mixer products displayed at the same frequency in the test sweep and reference Sweep large span Example The external mixer is set to use the 2nd order harmonic The signal recorded in the test sweep is displayed by trace 1 The IF filter of the R amp S FSW is represented at a 3 dB bandwidth of 20 kHz the real IF bandwidth being 30 kHz If however the 3 dB bandwidth of the signal recorded in the reference sweep is examined trace 2 it will be found to be larger exactly by a factor of 2 This shows that the two products were generated by mixing with LO harmonics of different orders The signal recorded in the test sweep was gener ated by mixing with the 3rd order h
408. vel Reference Level in the Amplitude menu 6 2 4 3 External Generator Control Settings The External Generator settings are available in the Input dialog box if the R amp S FSW External Generator Control option R amp S FSW B10 is installed For each measurement User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 302 R amp S FSW Common Measurement Settings Data Input and Output channel one external generator can be configured To switch between different configu rations define multiple measurement channels To display this dialog box press the INPUT OUPUT key and then select External Gen erator Config For more information on external generator control see chapter 6 2 4 2 Basics on Exter nal Generator Control on page 292 Interface Configuration Settings iseer nna NE NARREA 303 Measurement SGUtngS cc cide ied Aiea nae T A 305 Soule Calibration Functions essere iui Enan REEN EEEE a 307 Interface Configuration Settings The interface settings for the connection to the external generator are defined in the Interface Configuration subtab of the External Generator tab ionut s Spectrum al i InputSource Power Sensor Tracking Generator Interface Sett Measurement Tac ngs Configuration Generator Name Frequency Min Interface Interface Frequency Max Configuration TTL Handshake Level Min Source Calibration GPIB Address Level Max Reference Internal Edit Generator Setup File For more i
409. weep time For details see chapter 6 6 1 3 Determining the Parameters in Preview Mode on page 382 Note The zero span settings refer only to the preview diagram The main diagram remains unchanged The trigger and gate settings are applied to the measurement when the dialog box is closed or Update Main Diagram is selected If preview mode is switched off any changes to the settings in this dialog box are applied to the measurement diagram directly In this case the zero span settings for the preview diagram are not displayed For information on the zero span settings see e Center on page 348 e RBW on page 264 e Sweep Time on page 370 Frequency Preview Defines the center frequency Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 762 RBW lt Preview Defines the bandwidth value The available resolution bandwidths are specified in the data sheet Numeric input is always rounded to the nearest possible bandwidth Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution on page 767 Sweep Time Preview Defines the sweep time Allowed values depend on the ratio of span to RBW and RBW to VBW For details refer to the data sheet Numeric input is always rounded to the nearest possible sweep time Remote command SENSe SWEep TIME on page 772 Trigger Settings The trigger settings define the beginning of a measurement Trigger Source lt Trigger Settings Defines the trigge
410. with an xml extension 2 Select the Load button The settings from the selected file are restored to the R amp S FSW and you can repeat the SEM measurement with the stored settings How to save a user defined SEM settings file 1 Configure the SEM measurement as required see chapter 5 5 6 How to Perform a Spectrum Emission Mask Measurement on page 185 User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 187 R amp S FSW Measurements 5 5 6 2 Spectrum Emission Mask SEM Measurement 2 Inthe Standard Files tab of the Spectrum Emission Mask dialog box define a file name and storage location for the settings file 3 Select the Save button The settings are stored to a file with the extension xml as specified How to delete an SEM settings file 1 Inthe Standard Files tab of the Spectrum Emission Mask dialog box select the file you want to delete 2 Select the Delete button 3 Confirm the message The settings file is removed from the R amp S FSW How to restore default SEM settings files The R amp S FSW is delivered with predefined settings files which can be edited and over written However you can restore the original files gt Inthe Standard Files tab of the Spectrum Emission Mask dialog box select the Restore Standard Files button The original predefined settings files are available for selection on the R amp S FSW How to Save SEM Result Files The evaluation list from an SEM measuremen
411. xed reference marker is set to the maximum of the measured carrier signal Then switch off the carrier so that only the noise of the test setup is active in the channel The carrier to noise ratio is displayed after the subsequent measure ment has been completed Frequency Span The frequency span should be set to approximately 4 times the channel bandwidth in order to measure the carrier to noise ratio correctly This setting is defined automatically by the Adjust Settings function 5 3 2 Carrier to Noise Results As a result of the carrier to noise measurement the evaluated bandwidth and the calcu lated C N ratio are displayed in the result window The fixed reference marker is indicated in the diagram _LL_L_L_L_L L_LEE ES M User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 155 R amp S FSW Measurements 5 3 3 Carrier to Noise Measurements MultiView Spectrum Ref Level 0 00 dBm RBW 2 kHz Att 10dB SWT 2 1 ms VBW 2kHz Mode Auto FFT 1C N CF 200 056 MHz 1001 pts 20 0 kHz Span 200 0 kHz 2 Result Summary N 89 44 dBc 3 Marker Table Type REF TFE Stimulus Response Function Function Result L 200 0 MHz 5 27 dBm Mi 1 200 0 MHz 5 28 dBm Remote command You can also query the determined carrier to noise ratio via the remote command CALC MARK FUNC POW RES CN orCALC MARK FUNC POW RES CNO see CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion POWer RESult on page 639 Carrier to Noise Configuration The Carrier to noise
412. y points are allocated in equidistant steps between the start and stop frequency This is useful for example to determine the effects of a particular device component and then remove these effects from a subsequent measurement which includes this compo nent For an example see How to Remove the Effects of a Particular Component from Mea surement Results Using Calibration on page 311 Note that the normalized measurement data is stored not the original reference trace D Thus if you store the normalized trace directly after calibration without changing any settings the transducer factor will be 0 dB for the entire span by definition of the nor malized trace Reference Trace Reference Line and Reference Level Reference trace The calibration results are stored internally on the R amp S FSW as a reference trace For each measured sweep point the offset to the expected values is determined If normali zation is activated the offsets in the reference trace are removed from the current mea surement results to compensate for the inherent distortions Reference line The reference line is defined by the Reference Value and Reference Position in the External Generator gt Source Calibration settings It is similar to the Reference Level defined in the Amplitude settings However as opposed to the reference level this reference line only affects the y axis scaling in the diagram it has no effect on the expected input power
413. yed amplitude range is indicated as Mean Pwr lt x dB gt In addition to the histogram a result table is displayed containing the following informa tion e Number of samples used for calculation e For each displayed trace Mean Mean power Peak Peak power Crest Crest factor peak power mean power 10 Level values over 10 above mean power 1 Level values over 1 above mean power 0 1 Level values over 0 1 above mean power 0 01 Level values over 0 01 above mean power Percent marker In addition to the results for specific percentages in the table a percent marker can be activated for a freely selectable percentage This marker indicates how many level values are over lt x gt above the mean power _L_L L_L_LLLLLL_ EE N User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 211 R amp S FSW Measurements Statistical Measurements APD CCDF Percent marker As all markers the percent marker can be moved simply by selecting it with a finger or mouse cursor and dragging it to the desired position Diagram Scaling The scaling for both the x axis and y axis of the statistics diagram can be configured In particular you can restrict the range of amplitudes to be evaluated and the probabilities to be displayed Remote commands CALCulate lt n gt STATistics CCDF X lt t gt on page 718 CALCulate STATistics RESult lt t gt on page 719 5 7 4 APD and CCDF Basics Gated Triggerin
414. ysis bandwidth has to be wider than the signal bandwidth in order to measure the peaks of the signal amplitude correctly To avoid influencing the peak amplitudes the video bandwidth is automatically set to 10 MHZ The sample detector is used for detecting the video voltage The calculated measurement time is displayed for reference only Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution on page 767 Number of Samples Defines the number of power measurements that are taken into account for the statistics User Manual 1173 9411 02 13 214 R amp S FSW Measurements 5 7 5 2 Statistical Measurements APD CCDF For statistics measurements with the R amp S FSW the number of samples to be measured is defined instead of the sweep time Since only statistically independent samples con tribute to statistics the sweep or measurement time is calculated automatically and dis played in the channel bar Meas Time The samples are statistically independent if the time difference is at least 1 RBW The measurement time is therefore expressed as follows Meas Time Ngampies RBW Remote command CALCulate lt n gt STATistics NSAMples on page 713 Gated Trigger Activates and deactivates gating for statistics functions for the ACP and the CCDF meas urements If activated the trigger source is changed to External Trigger 1 The gate ranges are defined using the Edit Gate Ranges function Remote command SENSe SW

R&S FSW User Manual - Rohde & Schwarz Norway

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&amp;S FSW User Manual - Rohde &amp; Schwarz Norway

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&S FSW User Manual - Rohde & Schwarz Norway